AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

C TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SECTION AT B

AT

E
CONTENTS
INDEX FOR DTC ........................................................ 5 Fail-Safe ................................................................. 43 F
Alphabetical Index .................................................... 5 How To Perform Trouble Diagnosis For Quick and
DTC No. Index ......................................................... 6 Accurate Repair ...................................................... 45
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 7 A/T Electrical Parts Location .................................. 50 G
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System Circuit Diagram ....................................................... 51
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis .................... 52
SIONER” .................................................................. 7 Check Before Engine is Started .............................. 56
H
Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check at Idle ........................................................... 56
of A/T and Engine .................................................... 7 Cruise Test - Part 1 ................................................. 58
Precautions for TCM, A/T Assembly and Control Cruise Test - Part 2 ................................................. 60
Valve Assembly Replacement .................................. 8 Cruise Test - Part 3 ................................................. 60 I
Precautions .............................................................. 9 Vehicle Speed When Shifting Gears ...................... 62
Service Notice or Precautions .................................11 Vehicle Speed When Performing and Releasing
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis .................11 Complete Lock-Up .................................................. 62 J
PREPARATION ......................................................... 12 Vehicle Speed When Performing and Releasing
Special Service Tools ............................................. 12 Slip Lock-Up ........................................................... 62
Commercial Service Tools ...................................... 13 Symptom Chart ....................................................... 63
K
A/T FLUID ................................................................. 14 TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values ........... 86
Changing A/T Fluid ................................................ 14 CONSULT-II ............................................................ 89
Checking A/T Fluid ................................................. 14 Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT-II ......... 101
A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning ...................................... 16 DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE ............ 103 L
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM .......................................... 19 Description ............................................................ 103
Cross-Sectional View ............................................. 19 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 103
Shift Mechanism ..................................................... 20 Possible Cause ..................................................... 103 M
TCM Function ......................................................... 31 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 103
CAN Communication .............................................. 32 Wiring Diagram — AT — CAN .............................. 104
Input/Output Signal of TCM .................................... 32 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 105
Line Pressure Control ............................................ 33 DTC P0615 START SIGNAL CIRCUIT ................... 106
Shift Control ........................................................... 34 Description ............................................................ 106
Lock-Up Control ..................................................... 35 CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 106
Engine Brake Control ............................................. 36 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 106
Control Valve .......................................................... 37 Possible Cause ..................................................... 106
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM ............ 39 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 106
Introduction ............................................................ 39 Wiring Diagram — AT — STSIG .......................... 107
OBD-II Function for A/T System ............................. 39 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 108
One or Two Trip Detection Logic of OBD-II ............ 39 DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH. 110
OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) ................. 39 Description ............................................................ 110
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ........................... 42 CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 110
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ............................................ 43 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 110
DTC Inspection Priority Chart ................................ 43 Possible Cause ..................................................... 110

Revision: 2004 October AT-1 2004 M45

 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 110 Description ............................................................ 146
Wiring Diagram — AT — PNP/SW ....................... 112 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 146
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 113 Possible Cause ..................................................... 146
Component Inspection .......................................... 115 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 146
DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REV- Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 147
OLUTION SENSOR) ............................................... 116 DTC P1703 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE
Description ............................................................ 116 (ROM) ...................................................................... 148
CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 116 Description ............................................................ 148
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 116 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 148
Possible Cause ..................................................... 116 Possible Cause ..................................................... 148
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 116 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 148
Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSA/T ......................... 117 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 149
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 118 DTC P1704 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE
DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL ................... 121 (EEPROM) ............................................................... 150
Description ............................................................ 121 Description ............................................................ 150
CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 121 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 150
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 121 Possible Cause ..................................................... 150
Possible Cause ..................................................... 121 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 150
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 121 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 151
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 122 DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR ........ 152
DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH Description ............................................................ 152
SOLENOID VALVE ................................................. 123 CONSULT-II Reference Value ............................... 152
Description ............................................................ 123 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 152
CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 123 Possible Cause ..................................................... 152
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 123 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 152
Possible Cause ..................................................... 123 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 153
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 123 DTC P1710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Wiring Diagram — AT — TCV .............................. 124 CIRCUIT .................................................................. 154
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 125 Description ............................................................ 154
Component Inspection .......................................... 127 CONSULT-II Reference Value ............................... 154
DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP). 128 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 154
Description ............................................................ 128 Possible Cause ..................................................... 154
CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 128 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 154
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 128 Wiring Diagram — AT — FTS ............................... 155
Possible Cause ..................................................... 128 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 156
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 128 Component Inspection .......................................... 159
Wiring Diagram — AT — TCCSIG ........................ 130 DTC P1716 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR .... 160
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 131 Description ............................................................ 160
Component Inspection .......................................... 133 CONSULT-II Reference Value ............................... 160
DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE. 134 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 160
Description ............................................................ 134 Possible Cause ..................................................... 160
CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 134 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 160
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 134 Wiring Diagram — AT — TRSA/T ......................... 161
Possible Cause ..................................................... 134 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 162
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 134 DTC P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR ....... 165
Wiring Diagram — AT — LPSV ............................ 135 Description ............................................................ 165
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 136 CONSULT-II Reference Value ............................... 165
Component Inspection .......................................... 138 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 165
DTC P1701 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE Possible Cause ..................................................... 165
(POWER SUPPLY) .................................................. 140 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 165
Description ............................................................ 140 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 166
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 140 DTC P1730 A/T INTERLOCK ................................. 167
Possible Cause ..................................................... 140 Description ............................................................ 167
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 140 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 167
Wiring Diagram — AT — POWER ........................ 141 Possible Cause ..................................................... 167
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 144 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 167
Component Inspection .......................................... 145 Wiring Diagram — AT — I/LOCK .......................... 168
DTC P1702 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE Judgement of A/T Interlock ................................... 172
(RAM) ...................................................................... 146 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 172

Revision: 2004 October AT-2 2004 M45

DTC P1731 A/T 1ST ENGINE BRAKING ............... 174 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 205
Description ........................................................... 174 Wiring Diagram — AT — D/CF ............................. 206 A
CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 174 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 207
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 174 DTC P1767 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH
Possible Cause .................................................... 174 SOLENOID VALVE ................................................. 209 B
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 174 Description ............................................................ 209
Wiring Diagram — AT — E/BRE .......................... 175 CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 209
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 176 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 209
DTC P1752 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE . 179 Possible Cause ..................................................... 209 AT
Description ........................................................... 179 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 209
CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 179 Wiring Diagram — AT — HLR/C .......................... 210
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 179 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 211 D
Possible Cause .................................................... 179 Component Inspection .......................................... 213
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 179 DTC P1769 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH
Wiring Diagram — AT — I/C ................................ 180 SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION .............................. 215 E
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 181 Description ............................................................ 215
Component Inspection ......................................... 183 CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 215
DTC P1754 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 215
FUNCTION .............................................................. 185 Possible Cause ..................................................... 215 F
Description ........................................................... 185 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 215
CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 185 Wiring Diagram — AT — HLR/CF ........................ 216
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 185 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 217 G
Possible Cause .................................................... 185 DTC P1772 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 185 VALVE ..................................................................... 220
Wiring Diagram — AT — I/CF .............................. 186 Description ............................................................ 220 H
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 187 CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 220
DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE . 189 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 220
Description ........................................................... 189 Possible Cause ..................................................... 220
I
CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 189 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 220
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 189 Wiring Diagram — AT — LC/B ............................. 221
Possible Cause .................................................... 189 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 222
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 189 Component Inspection .......................................... 224 J
Wiring Diagram — AT — FR/B ............................. 190 DTC P1774 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 191 VALVE FUNCTION .................................................. 226
Component Inspection ......................................... 193 Description ............................................................ 226 K
DTC P1759 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 226
FUNCTION .............................................................. 194 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 226
Description ........................................................... 194 Possible Cause ..................................................... 226 L
CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 194 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 226
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 194 Wiring Diagram — AT — LC/BF ........................... 227
Possible Cause .................................................... 194 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 228
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 194 DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH .................. 230 M
Wiring Diagram — AT — FR/BF ........................... 195 Description ............................................................ 230
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 196 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
DTC P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE. 199 . 230
Description ........................................................... 199 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 230
CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 199 Possible Cause ..................................................... 230
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 199 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 230
Possible Cause .................................................... 199 Wiring Diagram — AT — MMSW ......................... 231
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 199 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 232
Wiring Diagram — AT — D/C ............................... 200 Component Inspection .......................................... 233
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 201 A/T Position Indicator ........................................... 233
Component Inspection ......................................... 203 DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1 ............... 234
DTC P1764 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE Description ............................................................ 234
FUNCTION .............................................................. 205 CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 234
Description ........................................................... 205 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 234
CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 205 Possible Cause ..................................................... 234
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 205 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 234
Possible Cause .................................................... 205

Revision: 2004 October AT-3 2004 M45

 Wiring Diagram — AT — FPSW1 ......................... 235 A/T Does Not Shift: 2nd Gear → 1st Gear ............ 300
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 236 Vehicle Does Not Decelerate by Engine Brake ..... 302
DTC P1843 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 3 ............... 238 SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM .................................... 304
Description ............................................................ 238 Control Device Removal and Installation .............. 304
CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 238 Adjustment of A/T Position .................................... 305
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 238 Checking of A/T Position ....................................... 305
Possible Cause ..................................................... 238 A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM ..................................... 306
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 238 Description ............................................................ 306
Wiring Diagram — AT — FPSW3 ......................... 239 Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location .......... 306
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 240 Wiring Diagram — AT — SHIFT ........................... 307
DTC P1845 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 5 ............... 242 Shift Lock Control Unit Reference Values ............. 309
Description ............................................................ 242 Component Inspection .......................................... 310
CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 242 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE .......................................... 312
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 242 Control Valve Assembly ........................................ 312
Possible Cause ..................................................... 242 Revolution Sensor ................................................. 319
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 242 Parking Components ............................................ 325
Wiring Diagram — AT — FPSW5 ......................... 243 AIR BREATHER HOSE ........................................... 330
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 244 Removal and Installation ....................................... 330
DTC P1846 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 6 ............... 246 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY ................................. 331
Description ............................................................ 246 Removal and Installation ....................................... 331
CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 246 OVERHAUL ............................................................. 334
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 246 Components .......................................................... 334
Possible Cause ..................................................... 246 Oil Channel ........................................................... 340
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 246 Locations of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings,
Wiring Diagram — AT — FPSW6 ......................... 247 Thrust Washers and Snap Rings .......................... 341
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 248 DISASSEMBLY ....................................................... 342
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION, MANUAL MODE, Disassembly .......................................................... 342
BRAKE AND THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CIR- REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS ...................... 357
CUIT ........................................................................ 250 Oil Pump ............................................................... 357
CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 250 Front Sun Gear, 3rd One-Way Clutch ................... 360
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 251 Front Carrier, Input Clutch, Rear Internal Gear ..... 362
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS ............ 254 Mid Sun Gear, Rear Sun Gear, High and Low
Wiring Diagram — AT — NONDTC ...................... 254 Reverse Clutch Hub .............................................. 367
A/T CHECK Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On . 256 High and Low Reverse Clutch .............................. 372
Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” or “N” Position . 258 Direct Clutch ......................................................... 374
In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves When Pushed ...... 259 ASSEMBLY ............................................................. 376
In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves .............................. 260 Assembly (1) ......................................................... 376
Large Shock (“N” to “D” Position) ......................... 262 Adjustment ............................................................ 388
Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward in “R” Position. 265 Assembly (2) ......................................................... 390
Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward in “D” Position . 268 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .... 397
Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 ..................... 271 General Specifications .......................................... 397
A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 ................................ 274 Vehicle Speed When Shifting Gears ..................... 397
A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3 ................................ 277 Vehicle Speed When Performing and Releasing
A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4 ................................ 280 Complete Lock-Up ................................................ 397
A/T Does Not Shift: D4 → D5 ................................ 283 Vehicle Speed When Performing and Releasing
A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up ............................ 286 Slip Lock-Up .......................................................... 397
A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition .................. 288 Stall Speed ............................................................ 397
Lock-up is Not Released ...................................... 290 Line Pressure ........................................................ 398
Engine Speed Does Not Return to Idle ................ 291 Solenoid Valves .................................................... 398
Cannot Be Changed to Manual Mode .................. 293 A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor .............................. 398
A/T Does Not Shift: 5th Gear → 4th Gear ............ 294 Turbine Revolution Sensor .................................... 398
A/T Does Not Shift: 4th Gear → 3rd Gear ............ 296 Revolution Sensor ................................................. 398
A/T Does Not Shift: 3rd Gear → 2nd Gear ........... 298 Reverse Brake ...................................................... 398
Total End Play ....................................................... 398

Revision: 2004 October AT-4 2004 M45

 INDEX FOR DTC

INDEX FOR DTC PFP:00024

A
Alphabetical Index ACS0018W

NOTE:
If DTC “U1000” is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for “DTC U1000 CAN B
COMMUNICATION LINE”. Refer to AT-103 .
DTC
Items OBD-II Except OBD-II AT
Reference page
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
CONSULT-II CONSULT-II
GST*1 only “A/T”
A/T 1ST E/BRAKING — P1731 AT-174 D
ATF PRES SW 1/CIRC — P1841 AT-234
ATF PRES SW 3/CIRC — P1843 AT-238
E
ATF PRES SW 5/CIRC — P1845 AT-242
ATF PRES SW 6/CIRC — P1846 AT-246
A/T INTERLOCK P1730 P1730 AT-167 F
A/T TCC S/V FNCTN P0744 P0744 AT-128
ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC P0710 P1710 AT-154
G
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000 U1000 AT-103
D/C SOLENOID/CIRC P1762 P1762 AT-199
D/C SOLENOID FNCTN P1764 P1764 AT-205 H
ENGINE SPEED SIG — P0725 AT-121
FR/B SOLENOID/CIRC P1757 P1757 AT-189
I
FR/B SOLENOID FNCT P1759 P1759 AT-194
HLR/C SOL/CIRC P1767 P1767 AT-209
HLR/C SOL FNCTN P1769 P1769 AT-215 J
I/C SOLENOID/CIRC P1752 P1752 AT-179
I/C SOLENOID FNCTN P1754 P1754 AT-185
L/PRESS SOL/CIRC P0745 P0745 AT-134 K
LC/B SOLENOID/CIRC P1772 P1772 AT-220
LC/B SOLENOID FNCT P1774 P1774 AT-226
L
MANU MODE SW/CIR — P1815 AT-230
PNP SW/CIRC P0705 P0705 AT-110
STARTER RELAY/CIRC — P0615 AT-106 M
TCC SOLENOID/CIRC P0740 P0740 AT-123
TCM·EEPROM — P1704 AT-150
TCM-POWER SUPPLY — P1701 AT-140
TCM·RAM — P1702 AT-146
TCM·ROM — P1703 AT-148
TP SEN/CIRC A/T — P1705 AT-152
TURBINE REV S/CIRC P1716 P1716 AT-160
VEH SPD SE/CIR·MTR — P1721 AT-165
VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT P0720 P0720 AT-116

*1: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012.

Revision: 2004 October AT-5 2004 M45

 INDEX FOR DTC

DTC No. Index ACS0018X

NOTE:
If DTC “U1000” is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for “DTC U1000 CAN
COMMUNICATION LINE”. Refer to AT-103 .
DTC
OBD-II Except OBD-II Items
Reference page
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
CONSULT-II CONSULT-II
GST*1 only “A/T”
— P0615 STARTER RELAY/CIRC AT-106
P0705 P0705 PNP SW/CIRC AT-110
P0710 P1710 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC AT-154
P0720 P0720 VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT AT-116
— P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIG AT-121
P0740 P0740 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC AT-123
P0744 P0744 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN AT-128
P0745 P0745 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC AT-134
— P1701 TCM-POWER SUPPLY AT-140
— P1702 TCM·RAM AT-146
— P1703 TCM·ROM AT-148
— P1704 TCM·EEPROM AT-150
— P1705 TP SEN/CIRC A/T AT-152
P1716 P1716 TURBINE REV S/CIRC AT-160
— P1721 VEH SPD SE/CIR·MTR AT-165
P1730 P1730 A/T INTERLOCK AT-167
— P1731 A/T 1ST E/BRAKING AT-174
P1752 P1752 I/C SOLENOID/CIRC AT-179
P1754 P1754 I/C SOLENOID FNCTN AT-185
P1757 P1757 FR/B SOLENOID/CIRC AT-189
P1759 P1759 FR/B SOLENOID FNCT AT-194
P1762 P1762 D/C SOLENOID/CIRC AT-199
P1764 P1764 D/C SOLENOID FNCTN AT-205
P1767 P1767 HLR/C SOL/CIRC AT-209
P1769 P1769 HLR/C SOL FNCTN AT-215
P1772 P1772 LC/B SOLENOID/CIRC AT-220
P1774 P1774 LC/B SOLENOID FNCT AT-226
— P1815 MANU MODE SW/CIRC AT-230
— P1841 ATF PRES SW 1/CIRC AT-234
— P1843 ATF PRES SW 3/CIRC AT-238
— P1845 ATF PRES SW 5/CIRC AT-242
— P1846 ATF PRES SW 6/CIRC AT-246
U1000 U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT AT-103

*1: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012.

Revision: 2004 October AT-6 2004 M45

 PRECAUTIONS

PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001
A
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER” ACS0018Y

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along B
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front AT
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Man-
ual.
WARNING: D
● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be per-
formed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. E
● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to per-
sonal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section. F
● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
G
Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of A/T and Engine ACS0018Z

The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the
driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration. H
CAUTION:
● Be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable from the negative termi-
nal before any repair or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, sole- I
noid valves, etc. will cause the MIL to light up.
● Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will
cause the MIL to light up due to an open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease, J
dirt, bent terminals, etc.)
● Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. Interference of the harness with a
bracket, etc. may cause the MIL to light up due to a short circuit. K
● Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube
may cause the MIL to light up due to a malfunction of the EGR system or fuel injection system, etc.
● Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the TCM and L
ECM before returning the vehicle to the customer.

Revision: 2004 October AT-7 2004 M45

 PRECAUTIONS

Precautions for TCM, A/T Assembly and Control Valve Assembly Replacement
ACS00190

CAUTION:
● Check data (Unit ID) in TCM with data monitor of CONSULT-II before replacing A/T assembly or
control valve assembly.
● Check if new data (Unit ID) are entered correctly after replacing A/T assembly or control valve
assembly and erasing data in TCM.
● When replacing A/T assembly, control valve assembly or TCM, refer to the pattern table below and erase
the EEPROM in the TCM if necessary.
EEPROM ERASING PATTERNS
A/T assembly or control
TCM Erasing EEPROM in TCM Remarks
valve assembly
Not required because the EEPROM in the TCM is in
Replaced Replaced Not required
the default state.
Not required because the EEPROM in the TCM is in
Not replaced Replaced Not required
the default state.
Required because data has been written in the
EEPROM in the TCM and because the TCM cannot
Replaced Not replaced Required
write data from the ROM assembly in the transmis-
sion.

METHOD FOR ERASING THE EEPROM IN THE TCM

1. Connect CONSULT-II to data link connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON. Confirm that CONSULT-II turn “ON”.
3. Move selector lever in “R” position.
4. Touch “START” on CONSULT-II.
5. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
6. Fully press the accelerator pedal (8/8 throttle), and hold it in the fully open position. (This will set the
closed throttle position signal to OFF.)
7. Touch “ERASE” on CONSULT-II, and then touch “YES”.
8. Wait 3 seconds and then release the accelerator pedal.
9. Turn ignition switch OFF.
METHOD FOR WRITING DATA FROM THE ROM ASSEMBLY IN THE TRANSMISSION
In the following procedure, the TCM reads data from the ROM assembly and writes it to the EEPROM in the
TCM.
1. With the EEPROM in the TCM erased.
2. Move selector lever in “P” position.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
CHECK METHOD
● Normal: About 2 seconds after the ignition switch ON, the A/T CHECK indicator lamp lights up for 2
seconds.
● Abnormal: Even after the ignition switch ON, the A/T CHECK indicator lamp does not light up after 2 sec-
onds or illuminates immediately.
Cope for Abnormal
● Replace the control valve assembly.
● Replace the TCM.

Revision: 2004 October AT-8 2004 M45

 PRECAUTIONS

Precautions ACS00191

A
● Before connecting or disconnecting the TCM harness con-
nector, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery
cable from the negative terminal. Because battery voltage is
applied to TCM even if ignition switch is turned OFF. B

AT

D
SEF289H

● When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or

from TCM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or E
break).
Make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on TCM
pin terminal, when connecting pin connectors. F

SEF291H
H
● Before replacing TCM, perform TCM input/output signal
inspection and make sure whether TCM functions properly
or not. AT-86, "TCM INSPECTION TABLE" . I

K
MEF040DA

● After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform L

“DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE”.
If the repair is completed the DTC should not be displayed
in the “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”. M

SEF217U

Revision: 2004 October AT-9 2004 M45

 PRECAUTIONS

● When removing the RE5R05A model transmission from a vehi-

cle, do not use the companion flange section at the rear end of
the transmission as a support point.
● Always use the specified brand of A/T fluid. Refer to MA-10,
"Fluids and Lubricants" .
● Use paper rags not cloth rags during work.
● After replacing the A/T fluid, dispose of the waste oil using the
methods prescribed by law, ordinance, etc.
● Before proceeding with disassembly, thoroughly clean the out-
side of the transmission. It is important to prevent the internal
parts from becoming contaminated by dirt or other foreign mat-
ter.
● Disassembly should be done in a clean work area.
● Use lint-free cloth or towels for wiping parts clean. Common
shop rags can leave fibers that could interfere with the operation
of the transmission.
● Place disassembled parts in order for easier and proper assem-
bly.
● All parts should be carefully cleaned with a general purpose,
non-flammable solvent before inspection or reassembly.
● Gaskets, seals and O-rings should be replaced any time the SCIA0490E
transmission is disassembled.
● It is very important to perform functional tests whenever they are indicated.
● The valve body contains precision parts and requires extreme care when parts are removed and serviced.
Place disassembled valve body parts in order for easier and proper assembly. Care will also prevent
springs and small parts from becoming scattered or lost.
● Properly installed valves, sleeves, plugs, etc. will slide along bores in valve body under their own weight.
● Before assembly, apply a coat of recommended ATF to all parts. Apply petroleum jelly to protect O-rings
and seals, or hold bearings and washers in place during assembly. Do not use grease.
● Extreme care should be taken to avoid damage to O-rings, seals and gaskets when assembling.
● Clean or replace ATF cooler if excessive foreign material is found in oil pan or clogging strainer. Refer to
AT-11, "ATF COOLER SERVICE" .
● After overhaul, refill the transmission with new ATF.
● When the A/T drain plug is removed, only some of the fluid is drained. Old A/T fluid will remain in torque
converter and ATF cooling system.
Always follow the procedures under “Changing A/T Fluid” in the AT section when changing A/T fluid. Refer
to AT-14, "Changing A/T Fluid" and AT-14, "Checking A/T Fluid" .

Revision: 2004 October AT-10 2004 M45

 PRECAUTIONS

Service Notice or Precautions ACS00192

ATF COOLER SERVICE A

If A/T fluid contains frictional material (clutches, bands, etc.), or if an A/T is repaired, overhauled, or replaced,
inspect and clean the A/T fluid cooler mounted in the radiator or replace the radiator. Flush cooler lines using
cleaning solvent and compressed air after repair. For A/T fluid cooler cleaning procedure, refer to AT-16, "A/T B
Fluid Cooler Cleaning" . For radiator replacement, refer to CO-12, "RADIATOR" .
OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSIS
● A/T self-diagnosis is performed by the TCM in combination with the ECM. The results can be read through AT
the blinking pattern of the A/T CHECK indicator or the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). Refer to the table
on AT-92, "Display Items List" for the indicator used to display each self-diagnostic result.
● The self-diagnostic results indicated by the MIL are automatically stored in both the ECM and TCM mem- D
ories.
Always perform the procedure on AT-40, "HOW TO ERASE DTC" to complete the repair and avoid
unnecessary blinking of the MIL. E
For details of OBD-II, refer to EC-49, "ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM" .
● Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use the new style slide-
locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG-53, "HAR- F
NESS CONNECTOR" .
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis ACS00193

G
When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following:
● GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams".
● PG-2, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" for power distribution circuit. H
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
● GI-10, "How to Follow Trouble Diagnoses".
● GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident". I

Revision: 2004 October AT-11 2004 M45

 PREPARATION

PREPARATION PFP:00002

Special Service Tools ACS004I4

The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.) Description
Tool name

ST2505S001 Measuring line pressure

(J-34301-C)
Oil pressure gauge set
1 ST25051001
( — )
Oil pressure gauge
2 ST25052000
( — )
Hose
3 ST25053000
( — )
Joint pipe
4 ST25054000 ZZA0600D

( — )
Adapter
5 ST25055000
( — )
Adapter
KV31103600 Measuring line pressure
(J-45674)
Joint pipe adapter
(With ST25054000)

ZZA1227D

ST33400001 Installing oil pump housing oil seal

(J-26082)
Drift
a: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia.
b: 47 mm (1.85 in) dia.

NT086

KV31102400 Installing reverse brake return spring retainer

(J-34285 and J-34285-87)
Clutch spring compressor
a: 320 mm (12.60 in)
b: 174 mm (6.85 in)

NT423

ST25850000 Remove oil pump assembly

(J-25721-A)
Sliding hammer
a: 179 mm (7.05 in)
b: 70 mm (2.76 in)
c: 40 mm (1.57 in)
d: M12 x 1.75P
NT422

Revision: 2004 October AT-12 2004 M45

 PREPARATION

Commercial Service Tools ACS004I5

A
Tool name Description

Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts

B

AT

PBIC0190E

Drift Installing manual shaft oil seals. D

a: 22 mm (0.87 in) dia.

NT083

Revision: 2004 October AT-13 2004 M45

 A/T FLUID

A/T FLUID PFP:KLE40

Changing A/T Fluid ACS00196

1. Warm up A/T fluid.

2. Stop engine.
3. Loosen the level gauge bolt.
4. Drain A/T fluid from drain plug and refill with new A/T fluid. Always refill same volume with drained fluid.
● To replace the A/T fluid, pour in new fluid at the charging pipe with the engine idling and at the same
time drain the old fluid from the radiator cooler hose return side.
● When the color of the fluid coming out is about the same as the color of the new fluid, the replacement
is complete. The amount of new transmission fluid to use should be 30 to 50% increase of the stipu-
lated amount.
A/T fluid: Genuine Nissan Matic J ATF
Fluid capacity: 10.3 (10-7/8 US qt, 9-1/8 lmp qt)
CAUTION:
● Use only Genuine Nissan Matic J ATF. Do not mix with other fluid.

● Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine Nissan Matic J ATF will cause deteriora-
tion in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic trans-
mission, which is not covered by the warranty.
● When filling A/T fluid, take care not to scatter heat generating parts such as exhaust.

● Do not reuse drain plug gasket.

Drain plug:
: 34 N·m (3.5 kg-m, 25 ft-lb)

5. Run engine at idle speed for 5 minutes.

6. Check fluid level and condition. Refer to AT-14, "Checking A/T Fluid" . If fluid is still dirty, repeat step 2
through 5.
7. Install the removed A/T fluid level gauge in the A/T fluid charging pipe.
8. Tighten the level gauge bolt.
Level gauge bolt:
: 5.1 N·m (0.52 kg-m, 45 in-lb)

Checking A/T Fluid ACS00197

1. Warm up engine.
2. Check for fluid leakage.
3. Loosen the level gauge bolt.
4. Before driving, fluid level can be checked at fluid temperatures
of 30 to 50°C (86 to 122°F) using “COLD” range on A/T fluid
level gauge as follows.
a. Park vehicle on level surface and set parking brake.
b. Start engine and move selector lever through each gear posi-
tion. Leave selector lever in “P” position.
c. Check fluid level with engine idling.
d. Remove A/T fluid level gauge and wipe clean with lint-free
paper.
CAUTION: SCIA4835E
When wiping away the fluid level gauge, always use lint-
free paper, not a cloth one.
e. Re-insert A/T fluid level gauge into charging pipe as far as it will go.

Revision: 2004 October AT-14 2004 M45

 A/T FLUID

CAUTION:
To check fluid level, insert the A/T fluid level gauge until the cap contacts the end of the charging A
pipe, with the gauge reversed from the normal attachment conditions.
f. Remove A/T fluid level gauge and note reading. If reading is at low side of range, add fluid to the charging
pipe. B
CAUTION:
Do not overfill.
5. Drive vehicle for approximately 5 minutes in urban areas. AT
6. Make the fluid temperature approximately 65°C (149°F).
NOTE:
Fluid level will be greatly affected by temperature as shown in the figure. Therefore, be certain to D
perform operation while checking data with CONSULT-II.

J
SLIA0016E

a. Connect CONSULT-II to data link connector.

b. Select “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. K
c. Read out the value of “ATF TEMP 1”.
7. Re-check fluid level at fluid temperatures of approximately 65°C (149°F) using “HOT” range on A/T fluid
level gauge. L
CAUTION:
● When wiping away the fluid level gauge, always use lint-free paper, not a cloth one.

● To check fluid level, insert the A/T fluid level gauge until M
the cap contacts the end of the charging pipe, with the
gauge reversed from the normal attachment conditions
as shown in the figure.
8. Check fluid condition.
● If fluid is very dark or smells burned, check operation of A/T.
Flush cooling system after repair of A/T.
● If A/T fluid contains frictional material (clutches, bands, etc.),
replace radiator and flush cooler line using cleaning solvent
and compressed air after repair of A/T. Refer to AT-16, "A/T
Fluid Cooler Cleaning" and CO-12, "RADIATOR" . SCIA2899E

9. Install the removed A/T fluid level gauge in the fluid charging pipe.
10. Tighten the level gauge bolt.
Level gauge bolt:
: 5.1 N·m (0.52 kg-m, 45 in-lb)

Revision: 2004 October AT-15 2004 M45

 A/T FLUID

A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning ACS0064L

Whenever an automatic transmission is replaced, the A/T fluid cooler mounted in the radiator must be
inspected and cleaned.
Metal debris and friction material, if present, can become trapped in the A/T fluid cooler. This debris can con-
taminate the newly serviced A/T or, in severe cases, can block or restrict the flow of A/T fluid. In either case,
malfunction of the newly serviced A/T may result.
Debris, if present, may build up as A/T fluid enters the cooler inlet. It will be necessary to back flush the cooler
through the cooler outlet in order to flush out any built up debris.
A/T FLUID COOLER CLEANING PROCEDURE
1. Position an oil pan under the automatic transmission's inlet and outlet cooler hoses.
2. Identify the inlet and outlet fluid cooler hoses.
3. Disconnect the fluid cooler inlet and outlet rubber hoses from the
steel cooler tubes or bypass valve.
NOTE:
Replace the cooler hoses if rubber material from the hose
remains on the tube fitting.
4. Allow any A/T fluid that remains in the cooler hoses to drain into
the oil pan.

SCIA3830E

5. Insert the extension adapter hose of a can of the Transmission

Cooler Cleaner (Nissan P/N 999MP-AM006) into the cooler out-
let hose.
CAUTION:
● Wear safety glasses and rubber gloves when spraying
the Transmission Cooler Cleaner.
● Spray the Transmission Cooler Cleaner only with ade-
quate ventilation.
● Avoid contact with eyes and skin.

● Do not breath vapors or spray mist.

SCIA3831E
6. Hold the hose and can as high as possible and spray the Trans-
mission Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream into the cooler outlet hose until fluid flows out of the cooler
inlet hose for 5 seconds.
7. Insert the tip of an air gun into the end of the cooler outlet hose.
8. Wrap a shop rag around the air gun tip and of the cooler outlet
hose.

SCIA3832E

9. Blow compressed air regulated to 5 - 9 kg/cm2 (70 - 130 psi) through the cooler outlet hose for 10 sec-
onds to force out any remaining fluid.
10. Repeat steps 5 through 9 three additional times.
11. Position an oil pan under the banjo bolts that connect the fluid cooler steel lines to the transmission.
12. Remove the banjo bolts.
13. Flush each steel line from the cooler side back toward the transmission by spraying the Transmission
Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream for 5 seconds.

Revision: 2004 October AT-16 2004 M45

 A/T FLUID

14. Blow compressed air regulated to 5 - 9 kg/cm2 (70 - 130 psi) through each steel line from the cooler side
back toward the transmission for 10 seconds to force out any remaining fluid. A
15. Ensure all debris is removed from the steel cooler lines.
16. Ensure all debris is removed from the banjo bolts and fittings.
B
17. Perform AT-17, "A/T FLUID COOLER DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE" .
A/T FLUID COOLER DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE
NOTE: AT
Insufficient cleaning of the cooler inlet hose exterior may lead to inaccurate debris identification.
1. Position an oil pan under the automatic transmission's inlet and outlet cooler hoses.
2. Clean the exterior and tip of the cooler inlet hose. D
3. Insert the extension adapter hose of a can of the Transmission
Cooler Cleaner (Nissan P/N 999MP-AM006) into the cooler out-
let hose. E
CAUTION:
● Wear safety glasses and rubber gloves when spraying
the Transmission Cooler Cleaner.
F
● Spray the Transmission Cooler Cleaner only with ade-
quate ventilation.
● Avoid contact with eyes and skin.
G
● Do not breath vapors or spray mist.
SCIA3831E
4. Hold the hose and can as high as possible and spray the Trans-
mission Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream into the cooler outlet hose until fluid flows out of the cooler H
inlet hose for 5 seconds.
5. Tie a common white, basket-type coffee filter to the end of the
cooler inlet hose.
I

SCIA3833E

L
6. Insert the tip of an air gun into the end of the cooler outlet hose.
7. Wrap a shop rag around the air gun tip and end of cooler outlet
hose.
M
8. Blow compressed air regulated to 5 - 9 kg/cm2 (70 - 130 psi)
through the cooler outlet hose to force any remaining A/T fluid
into the coffee filter.
9. Remove the coffee filter from the end of the cooler inlet hose.
10. Perform AT-18, "A/T FLUID COOLER INSPECTION PROCE-
DURE" .
SCIA3834E

Revision: 2004 October AT-17 2004 M45

 A/T FLUID

A/T FLUID COOLER INSPECTION PROCEDURE

1. Inspect the coffee filter for debris.
a. If small metal debris less than 1 mm (0.040 in) in size or metal
powder is found in the coffee filter, this is normal. If normal
debris is found, the A/T fluid cooler/radiator can be re-used and
the procedure is ended.

SCIA2967E

b. If one or more pieces of debris are found that are over 1 mm

(0.040 in) in size and/or peeled clutch facing material is found in
the coffee filter, the fluid cooler is not serviceable. The A/T fluid
cooler/radiator must be replaced and the inspection procedure is
ended. Refer to CO-12, "RADIATOR" and CO-15, "RADIATOR
(ALUMINUM TYPE)" .

SCIA5257E

A/T FLUID COOLER FINAL INSPECTION

After performing all procedures, ensure that all remaining oil is cleaned from all components.

Revision: 2004 October AT-18 2004 M45

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM PFP:31036

A
Cross-Sectional View ACS00198

AT

SCIA5504E

1. Front planetary gear 2. Mid planetary gear 3. Rear planetary gear J

4. Direct clutch 5. High and low reverse clutch 6. Reverse brake
7. Drum support 8. Forward brake 9. Low coast brake
10. Input shaft 11. Torque converter 12. Oil pump K
13. Front brake 14. 3rd one-way clutch 15. Input clutch
16. 1st one-way clutch 17. Control valve 18. Forward one-way clutch
19. Rear extension 20. Intermediate shaft 21. Output shaft L
22. Companion flange

Revision: 2004 October AT-19 2004 M45

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

Shift Mechanism ACS004PW

The automatic transmission uses compact triple planetary gear systems to improve power-transmission effi-
ciency, simplify construction and reduce weight.
It also employs an optimum shift control and super wide gear ratios. They improve starting performance and
acceleration during medium and high-speed operation.
CONSTRUCTION

SCIA3985J

1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. Direct clutch

4. High and low reverse clutch 5. Reverse brake 6. Forward brake
7. Low coast brake 8. 1st one-way clutch 9. Forward one-way clutch
10. 3rd one-way clutch 11. Front sun gear 12. Input shaft
13. Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 15. Rear carrier
16. Rear sun gear 17. Mid sun gear 18. Front carrier
19. Mid carrier 20. Rear internal gear 21. Intermediate shaft
22. Output shaft 23. Parking gear 24. Parking pawl

FUNCTION OF CLUTCH AND BRAKE

Name of the Part Abbreviation Function
Front brake (1) FR/B Fastens the front sun gear (11).
Connects the input shaft (12), the front internal gear (14) and the mid internal
Input clutch (2) I/C
gear (13).
Direct clutch (3) D/C Connects the rear carrier (15) and the rear sun gear (16).
High and low reverse clutch (4) HLR/C Connects the mid sun gear (17) and the rear sun gear (16).
Reverse brake (5) R/B Fastens the rear carrier (15).
Forward brake (6) F/B Fastens the mid sun gear (17).
Low coast brake (7) LC/B Fastens the mid sun gear (17).
Allows the rear sun gear (16) to turn freely forward relative to the mid sun gear
1st one-way clutch (8) 1st/OWC
(17) but fastens it for reverse rotation.
Allows the mid sun gear (17) to turn freely in the forward direction but fastens it
Forward one-way clutch (9) Fwd/OWC
for reverse rotation.
Allows the front sun gear (11) to turn freely in the forward direction but fastens
3rd one-way clutch (10) 3rd/OWC
it for reverse rotation.

Revision: 2004 October AT-20 2004 M45

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

CLUTCH AND BAND CHART

A

AT

SCIA1524E

Revision: 2004 October AT-21 2004 M45

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

POWER TRANSMISSION
“N” Position
Since both the forward brake and the reverse brake are released, torque from the input shaft drive is not trans-
mitted to the output shaft.
“P” Position
● The same as for the “N” position, both the forward brake and the reverse brake are released, so torque
from the input shaft drive is not transmitted to the output shaft.
● The parking pole linked with the select lever meshes with the parking gear and fastens the output shaft
mechanically.

SCIA3986J

1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. Direct clutch

4. High and low reverse clutch 5. Reverse brake 6. Forward brake
7. Low coast brake 8. 1st one-way clutch 9. Forward one-way clutch
10. 3rd one-way clutch 11. Front sun gear 12. Input shaft
13. Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 15. Rear carrier
16. Rear sun gear 17. Mid sun gear 18. Front carrier
19. Mid carrier 20. Rear internal gear 21. Intermediate shaft
22. Output shaft 23. Parking gear 24. Parking pawl

Revision: 2004 October AT-22 2004 M45

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

“D”, “M2”, “M3”, “M4” and “M5” Positions 1st Gear

● The forward brake and the forward one-way clutch regulate reverse rotation of the mid sun gear. A
● The 1st one-way clutch regulates reverse rotation of the rear sun gear.
● The 3rd one-way clutch regulates reverse rotation of the front sun gear.
B
● During deceleration, the mid sun gear turns forward, so the forward one-way clutch idles and the engine
brake is not activated.

AT

SCIA3987E
K
1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. Direct clutch
4. High and low reverse clutch 5. Reverse brake 6. Forward brake
7. Low coast brake 8. 1st one-way clutch 9. Forward one-way clutch L
10. 3rd one-way clutch 11. Front sun gear 12. Input shaft
13. Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 15. Rear carrier
16. Rear sun gear 17. Mid sun gear 18. Front carrier M
19. Mid carrier 20. Rear internal gear 21. Intermediate shaft
22. Output shaft 23. Parking gear 24. Parking pawl

Revision: 2004 October AT-23 2004 M45

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

“M1” Position 1st Gear

● The front brake fastens the front sun gear.
● The forward brake and the forward one-way clutch regulate reverse rotation of the mid sun gear.
● High and low reverse clutch connects the rear sun gear and the mid sun gear.
● The low coast brake fastens the mid sun gear.
● During deceleration, the low coast brake regulates forward rotation of the mid sun gear and the engine
brake functions.

SCIA3988E

1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. Direct clutch

4. High and low reverse clutch 5. Reverse brake 6. Forward brake
7. Low coast brake 8. 1st one-way clutch 9. Forward one-way clutch
10. 3rd one-way clutch 11. Front sun gear 12. Input shaft
13. Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 15. Rear carrier
16. Rear sun gear 17. Mid sun gear 18. Front carrier
19. Mid carrier 20. Rear internal gear 21. Intermediate shaft
22. Output shaft 23. Parking gear 24. Parking pawl

Revision: 2004 October AT-24 2004 M45

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

“D”, “M3”, “M4” and “M5” Positions 2nd Gear

● The forward brake and the forward one-way clutch regulate reverse rotation of the mid sun gear. A
● The 3rd one-way clutch regulates reverse rotation of the front sun gear.
● The direct clutch is coupled and the rear carrier and rear sun gear are connected.
B
● During deceleration, the mid sun gear turns forward, so the forward one-way clutch idles and engine
brake is not activated.

AT

SCIA3989E
K
1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. Direct clutch
4. High and low reverse clutch 5. Reverse brake 6. Forward brake
7. Low coast brake 8. 1st one-way clutch 9. Forward one-way clutch L
10. 3rd one-way clutch 11. Front sun gear 12. Input shaft
13. Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 15. Rear carrier
16. Rear sun gear 17. Mid sun gear 18. Front carrier M
19. Mid carrier 20. Rear internal gear 21. Intermediate shaft
22. Output shaft 23. Parking gear 24. Parking pawl

Revision: 2004 October AT-25 2004 M45

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

“M1” and “M2” Positions 2nd Gear

● The front brake fastens the front sun gear.
● The forward brake and the forward one-way clutch regulate reverse rotation of the mid sun gear.
● The direct clutch is coupled, and the rear carrier and rear sun gear are connected.
● The low coast brake fastens the mid sun gear.
● During deceleration, the low coast brake regulates forward rotation of the mid sun gear and the engine
brake functions.

SCIA3990E

1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. Direct clutch

4. High and low reverse clutch 5. Reverse brake 6. Forward brake
7. Low coast brake 8. 1st one-way clutch 9. Forward one-way clutch
10. 3rd one-way clutch 11. Front sun gear 12. Input shaft
13. Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 15. Rear carrier
16. Rear sun gear 17. Mid sun gear 18. Front carrier
19. Mid carrier 20. Rear internal gear 21. Intermediate shaft
22. Output shaft 23. Parking gear 24. Parking pawl

Revision: 2004 October AT-26 2004 M45

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

“D”, “M3”, “M4” and “M5” Positions 3rd Gear

● The front brake fastens the front sun gear. A
● The direct clutch is coupled, and the rear carrier and rear sun gear are connected.
● The high and low reverse clutch is coupled and the mid sun gear and rear sun gear are connected.
B

AT

J
SCIA3991E

1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. Direct clutch

4. High and low reverse clutch 5. Reverse brake 6. Forward brake K
7. Low coast brake 8. 1st one-way clutch 9. Forward one-way clutch
10. 3rd one-way clutch 11. Front sun gear 12. Input shaft
13. Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 15. Rear carrier L
16. Rear sun gear 17. Mid sun gear 18. Front carrier
19. Mid carrier 20. Rear internal gear 21. Intermediate shaft
22. Output shaft 23. Parking gear 24. Parking pawl M

Revision: 2004 October AT-27 2004 M45

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

“D”, “M4” and “M5” Positions 4th Gear

● The direct clutch is coupled, and the rear carrier and rear sun gear are connected.
● The high and low reverse clutch is coupled and the mid sun gear and rear sun gear are connected.
● The input clutch is coupled and the front internal gear and mid internal gear are connected.
● The drive power is conveyed to the front internal gear, mid internal gear, and rear carrier and the three
planetary gears rotate forward as one unit.

SCIA3992E

1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. Direct clutch

4. High and low reverse clutch 5. Reverse brake 6. Forward brake
7. Low coast brake 8. 1st one-way clutch 9. Forward one-way clutch
10. 3rd one-way clutch 11. Front sun gear 12. Input shaft
13. Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 15. Rear carrier
16. Rear sun gear 17. Mid sun gear 18. Front carrier
19. Mid carrier 20. Rear internal gear 21. Intermediate shaft
22. Output shaft 23. Parking gear 24. Parking pawl

Revision: 2004 October AT-28 2004 M45

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

“D” and “M5” Positions 5th Gear

● The front brake fastens the front sun gear. A
● The input clutch is coupled and the front internal gear and mid internal gear are connected.
● The high and low reverse clutch is coupled and the mid sun gear and rear sun gear are connected.
B

AT

J
SCIA3993E

1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. Direct clutch

4. High and low reverse clutch 5. Reverse brake 6. Forward brake K
7. Low coast brake 8. 1st one-way clutch 9. Forward one-way clutch
10. 3rd one-way clutch 11. Front sun gear 12. Input shaft
13. Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 15. Rear carrier L
16. Rear sun gear 17. Mid sun gear 18. Front carrier
19. Mid carrier 20. Rear internal gear 21. Intermediate shaft
22. Output shaft 23. Parking gear 24. Parking pawl M

Revision: 2004 October AT-29 2004 M45

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

“R” Position
● The front brake fastens the front sun gear.
● The high and low reverse clutch is coupled and the mid sun gear and rear sun gear are connected.
● The reverse brake fastens the rear carrier.

SCIA3994E

1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. Direct clutch

4. High and low reverse clutch 5. Reverse brake 6. Forward brake
7. Low coast brake 8. 1st one-way clutch 9. Forward one-way clutch
10. 3rd one-way clutch 11. Front sun gear 12. Input shaft
13. Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 15. Rear carrier
16. Rear sun gear 17. Mid sun gear 18. Front carrier
19. Mid carrier 20. Rear internal gear 21. Intermediate shaft
22. Output shaft 23. Parking gear 24. Parking pawl

Revision: 2004 October AT-30 2004 M45

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

TCM Function ACS004PX

A
The function of the TCM is to:
● Receive input signals sent from various switches and sensors.
● Determine required line pressure, shifting point, lock-up operation, and engine brake operation. B
● Send required output signals to the respective solenoids.
CONTROL SYSTEM OUTLINE
The automatic transmission senses vehicle operating conditions through various sensors or signals. It always AT
controls the optimum shift position and reduces shifting and lock-up shocks.
SENSORS (or SIGNAL) TCM ACTUATORS
D
PNP switch
Accelerator pedal position sensor Shift control Input clutch solenoid valve
Closed throttle position signal Line pressure control Direct clutch solenoid valve
Wide-open throttle position signal Lock-up control Front brake solenoid valve E
Engine speed signal Engine brake control High and low reverse clutch
A/T fluid temperature sensor Þ Timing control Þ solenoid valve
Revolution sensor Fail-safe control Low coast brake solenoid valve
Vehicle speed signal Self-diagnosis Torque converter clutch solenoid F
Manual mode switch signal CONSULT-II communication line valve
Stop lamp switch signal Duet-EA control Line pressure solenoid valve
Turbine revolution sensor CAN system A/T CHECK indicator lamp
ATF pressure switch G

CONTROL SYSTEM DIAGRAM

H

SCIA4450E

Revision: 2004 October AT-31 2004 M45

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

CAN Communication ACS004PY

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many elec-
tronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. Refer to LAN-21, "CAN
COMMUNICATION" .
Input/Output Signal of TCM ACS004PZ

Line Vehicle Engine Fail-safe Self-diag-

Shift Lock-up
Control item pressure speed brake function nostics
control control
control control control (*3) function

Accelerator pedal position signal (*5) X X X X X X X

Vehicle speed sensor A/T
X X X X X X
(revolution sensor)

Vehicle speed sensor MTR(*1) (*5) X X X X X

Closed throttle position signal(*5) (*2) X (*2) X X (*2) X (*4) X

Wide-open throttle position signal(*5) (*2) X (*2) X (*4) X

Turbine revolution sensor 1 X X X X
Turbine revolution sensor 2
X X X X
Input (for 4th speed only)

Engine speed signals(*5) X X

PNP switch X X X X X X (*4) X

Stop lamp switch signal(*5) X X (*4) X

A/T fluid temperature sensors 1, 2 X X X X X X

Operation signal(*5) X X X X
ASCD or ICC Overdrive cancel
X X X
signal(*5)
TCM power supply voltage signal X X X X X X X
Direct clutch solenoid (ATF pressure
X X X X
switch 5)
Input clutch solenoid (ATF pressure
X X X X
switch 3)
High and low reverse clutch sole-
X X X X
noid (ATF pressure switch 6)
Out- Front brake solenoid (ATF pressure
put X X X X
switch 1)
Low coast brake solenoid (ATF
X X X X X
pressure switch 2)
Line pressure solenoid X X X X X X X
TCC solenoid X X X
(*6) X
Self-diagnostics table
*1: Spare for vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor)
*2: Spare for accelerator pedal position signal
*3: If these input and output signals are different, the TCM triggers the fail-safe function.
*4: Used as a condition for starting self-diagnostics; if self-diagnostics are not started, it is judged that there is some kind of error.
*5: Input by CAN communications.
*6: Output by CAN communications.

Revision: 2004 October AT-32 2004 M45

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

Line Pressure Control ACS004Q0

A
● When an input torque signal equivalent to the engine drive force is sent from the ECM to the TCM, the
TCM controls the line pressure solenoid.
● This line pressure solenoid controls the pressure regulator valve as the signal pressure and adjusts the
pressure of the operating oil discharged from the oil pump to the line pressure most appropriate to the B
driving state.

AT

PCIA0007E
F
LINE PRESSURE CONTROL IS BASED ON THE TCM LINE PRESSURE CHARACTERISTIC
PATTERN
● The TCM has stored in memory a number of patterns for the optimum line pressure characteristic for the
G
driving state.
● In order to obtain the most appropriate line pressure characteristic to meet the current driving state, the
TCM controls the line pressure solenoid current value and thus controls the line pressure.
H
Normal Control
Each clutch is adjusted to the necessary pressure to match the
engine drive force. I

PCIA0008E

L
Back-Up Control (Engine Brake)
When the select operation is executed during driving and the trans-
mission is shifted down, the line pressure is set according to the
vehicle speed. M

PCIA0009E

Revision: 2004 October AT-33 2004 M45

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

During Shift Change

The necessary and adequate line pressure for shift change is set.
For this reason, line pressure pattern setting corresponds to input
torque and gearshift selection. Also, line pressure characteristic is
according to engine speed, during engine brake operation.

PCIA0010E

At Low Fluid Temperature

When the A/T fluid temperature drops below the prescribed tempera-
ture, in order to speed up the action of each friction element, the line
pressure is set higher than the normal line pressure characteristic.

PCIA0011E

Shift Control ACS004Q1

The clutch pressure control solenoid is controlled by the signals from the switches and sensors. Thus, the
clutch pressure is adjusted to be appropriate to the engine load state and vehicle driving state. It becomes
possible to finely control the clutch hydraulic pressure with high precision and a smoother shift change charac-
teristic is attained.

PCIA0012E

Revision: 2004 October AT-34 2004 M45

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

SHIFT CHANGE
The clutch is controlled with the optimum timing and oil pressure by the engine speed, engine torque informa- A
tion, etc.
Shift Change System Diagram
B

AT

PCIA0013E

H
*1: Full phase real-time feedback control monitors movement of gear ratio at gear change, and controls oil
pressure at real-time to achieve the best gear ratio.
I
Lock-Up Control ACS004Q2

The torque converter clutch piston in the torque converter is engaged to eliminate torque converter slip to
increase power transmission efficiency. J
The torque converter clutch control valve operation is controlled by the torque converter clutch solenoid valve,
which is controlled by a signal from TCM, and the torque converter clutch control valve engages or releases
the torque converter clutch piston.
K
Lock-Up Operation Condition Table
Select lever D position, M5 position M4 position
Gear position 5 4 3 4 L
Lock-up × – – ×
Slip lock-up × × × –
M
TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH CONTROL VALVE CONTROL
Lock-Up Control System Diagram

PCIA0014E

Revision: 2004 October AT-35 2004 M45

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

Lock-Up Released
● In the lock-up released state, the torque converter clutch control valve is set into the unlocked state by the
torque converter clutch solenoid and the lock-up apply pressure is drained.
In this way, the torque converter clutch piston is not coupled.
Lock-Up Applied
● In the lock-up applied state, the torque converter clutch control valve is set into the locked state by the
torque converter clutch solenoid and lock-up apply pressure is generated.
In this way, the torque converter clutch piston is pressed and coupled.
SMOOTH LOCK-UP CONTROL
When shifting from the lock-up released state to the lock-up applied state, the current output to the torque con-
verter clutch solenoid is controlled with the TCM. In this way, when shifting to the lock-up applied state, the
torque converter clutch is temporarily set to the half-clutched state to reduce the shock.
Half-Clutched State
● The current output from the TCM to the torque converter clutch solenoid is varied to steadily increase the
torque converter clutch solenoid pressure.
In this way, the lock-up apply pressure gradually rises and while the torque converter clutch piston is put
into half-clutched status, the torque converter clutch piston operating pressure is increased and the cou-
pling is completed smoothly.
Slip Lock-Up Control
● In the slip region, the torque converter clutch solenoid current is controlled with the TCM to put it into the
half-clutched state. This absorbs the engine torque fluctuation and lock-up operates from low speed.
This raises the fuel efficiency for 3rd, 4th and 5th gears at both low speed and when the accelerator has a
low degree of opening.
Engine Brake Control ACS004Q3

● The forward one-way clutch transmits the drive force from the engine to the rear wheels. But the reverse
drive from the rear wheels is not transmitted to the engine because the one-way clutch is idling.
Therefore, the low coast brake solenoid is operated to prevent the forward one-way clutch from idling and
the engine brake is operated in the same manner as conventionally.

SCIA1520E

● The operation of the low coast brake solenoid switches the low coast brake switching valve and controls
the coupling and releasing of the low coast brake.
The low coast brake reducing valve controls the low coast brake coupling force.

Revision: 2004 October AT-36 2004 M45

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

Control Valve ACS004Q4

FUNCTION OF CONTROL VALVE A

Name Function
In order to prevent the pressure supplied to the torque converter from being excessive,
Torque converter regulator valve the line pressure is adjusted to the optimum pressure (torque converter operating pres- B
sure).
Pressure regulator valve
Adjusts the oil discharged from the oil pump to the optimum pressure (line pressure) for
Pressure regulator plug AT
the driving state.
Pressure regulator sleeve
When the front brake is coupled, adjusts the line pressure to the optimum pressure
Front brake control valve (front brake pressure) and supplies it to the front brake. (In 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 5th gears, D
adjusts the clutch pressure.)
Adjusts the pressure (accumulator control pressure) acting on the accumulator piston
Accumulator control valve
and low coast reducing valve to the pressure appropriate to the driving state.
E
Adjusts the line pressure and produces the constant pressure (pilot pressure) required
Pilot valve A
for line pressure control, shift change control, and lock-up control.
Adjusts the line pressure and produces the constant pressure (pilot pressure) required
Pilot valve B F
for shift change control.
Low coast brake switching valve During engine braking, supplies the line pressure to the low coast brake reducing valve.
When the low coast brake is coupled, adjusts the line pressure to the optimum pressure G
Low coast brake reducing valve
(low coast brake pressure) and supplies it to the low coast brake.
N-R accumulator Produces the stabilizing pressure for when N-R is selected.
Direct clutch piston switching valve Operates in 4th gear and switches the direct clutch coupling capacity. H
When the high and low reverse clutch is coupled, adjusts the line pressure to the opti-
High and low reverse clutch control valve mum pressure (high and low reverse clutch pressure) and supplies it to the high and low
reverse clutch. (In 1st, 3rd, 4th and 5th gears, adjusts the clutch pressure.) I
When the input clutch is coupled, adjusts the line pressure to the optimum pressure
Input clutch control valve (input clutch pressure) and supplies it to the input clutch. (In 4th and 5th gears, adjusts
the clutch pressure.)
J
When the direct clutch is coupled, adjusts the line pressure to the optimum pressure
Direct clutch control valve (direct clutch pressure) and supplies it to the direct clutch. (In 2nd, 3rd, and 4th gears,
adjusts the clutch pressure.)
K
TCC control valve
Switches the lock-up to operating or released. Also, by executing the lock-up operation
TCC control plug
transiently, lock-up smoothly.
TCC control sleeve
Operates during lock-up to switch the torque converter, cooling, and lubrication system L
Torque converter lubrication valve
oil path.
Cool bypass valve Allows excess oil to bypass cooler circuit without being fed into it.
Line pressure relief valve Discharges excess oil from line pressure circuit. M
N-D accumulator Produces the stabilizing pressure for when N-D is selected.
Sends line pressure to each circuit according to the select position. The circuits to which
Manual valve
the line pressure is not sent drain.

FUNCTION OF PRESSURE SWITCH

Name Function
Detects any malfunction in the front brake hydraulic pressure. When it detects any mal-
ATF pressure switch 1 (FR/B)
function, it puts the system into fail-safe mode.
Detects any malfunction in the low coast brake hydraulic pressure. When it detects any
ATF pressure switch 2 (LC/B)
malfunction, it puts the system into fail-safe mode.
Detects any malfunction in the input clutch hydraulic pressure. When it detects any mal-
ATF pressure switch 3 (I/C)
function, it puts the system into fail-safe mode.

Revision: 2004 October AT-37 2004 M45

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

Name Function
Detects any malfunction in the direct clutch hydraulic pressure. When it detects any mal-
ATF pressure switch 5 (D/C)
function, it puts the system into fail-safe mode.
Detects any malfunction in the high and low reverse clutch hydraulic pressure. When it
ATF pressure switch 6 (HLR/C)
detects any malfunction, it puts the system into fail-safe mode.

Revision: 2004 October AT-38 2004 M45

 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM PFP:00028

A
Introduction ACS0019I

The A/T system has two self-diagnostic systems.

The first is the emission-related on board diagnostic system (OBD-II) performed by the TCM in combination B
with the ECM. The malfunction is indicated by the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) and is stored as a DTC in
the ECM memory but not the TCM memory.
The second is the TCM original self-diagnosis indicated by the A/T CHECK indicator lamp. The malfunction is
stored in the TCM memory. The detected items are overlapped with OBD-II self-diagnostic items. For detail, AT
refer to AT-92, "Display Items List" .
OBD-II Function for A/T System ACS0019J
D
The ECM provides emission-related on board diagnostic (OBD-II) functions for the A/T system. One function
is to receive a signal from the TCM used with OBD-related parts of the A/T system. The signal is sent to the
ECM when a malfunction occurs in the corresponding OBD-related part. The other function is to indicate a E
diagnostic result by means of the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) on the instrument panel. Sensors, switches
and solenoid valves are used as sensing elements.
The MIL automatically illuminates in One or Two Trip Detection Logic when a malfunction is sensed in relation
to A/T system parts. F

One or Two Trip Detection Logic of OBD-II ACS0019K

ONE TRIP DETECTION LOGIC

G
If a malfunction is sensed during the first test drive, the MIL will illuminate and the malfunction will be stored in
the ECM memory as a DTC. The TCM is not provided with such a memory function.
TWO TRIP DETECTION LOGIC H
When a malfunction is sensed during the first test drive, it is stored in the ECM memory as a 1st trip DTC
(diagnostic trouble code) or 1st trip freeze frame data. At this point, the MIL will not illuminate. — 1st Trip
If the same malfunction as that experienced during the first test drive is sensed during the second test drive, I
the MIL will illuminate. — 2nd Trip
The “Trip” in the “One or Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed
during vehicle operation.
J
OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) ACS0019L

HOW TO READ DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC

DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods. K
( with CONSULT-II or GST) CONSULT-II or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0705, P0720 etc.
These DTC are prescribed by SAE J2012.
(CONSULT-II also displays the malfunctioning component or system.)
L
● 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
● Output of the diagnostic trouble code indicates that the indicated circuit has a malfunction. How-
ever, in case of the Mode II and GST, they do not indicate whether the malfunction is still occurring
M
or occurred in the past and returned to normal.
CONSULT-II can identify them as shown below, therefore, CONSULT-II (if available) is recom-
mended.
A sample of CONSULT-II display for DTC and 1st trip DTC is
shown on the next page. DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunction is
displayed in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS mode for “ENGINE”
with CONSULT-II. Time data indicates how many times the vehi-
cle was driven after the last detection of a DTC.

SAT014K

Revision: 2004 October AT-39 2004 M45

 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be “0”.

SAT015K

If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be “1t”.

SAT016K

Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data

The ECM has a memory function, which stores the driving condition such as fuel system status, calculated
load value, engine coolant temperature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed and vehicle
speed at the moment the ECM detects a malfunction.
Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data,
and the data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-II
or GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, not on the GST. For
detail, refer to EC-108, "CONSULT-II Function (ENGINE)" .
Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data of freeze frame data) can be stored in the
ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no priority
for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once
freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no
longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the fol-
lowing priorities to update the data.
Priority Items
Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0306
1
Freeze frame data Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175
2 Except the above items (Includes A/T related items)
3 1st trip freeze frame data

Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTC) are cleared when the ECM mem-
ory is erased.
HOW TO ERASE DTC
The diagnostic trouble code can be erased by CONSULT-II, GST or ECM DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE as
described following.
● If the battery cable is disconnected from the terminal, the diagnostic trouble code will be lost
within 24 hours.
● When you erase the DTC, using CONSULT-II or GST is easier and quicker than switching the mode
selector on the ECM.
The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared from the ECM memory when erasing DTC
related to OBD-II. For details, refer to EC-50, "Emission-Related Diagnostic Information" .
● Diagnostic trouble codes (DTC)
● 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes (1st trip DTC)

Revision: 2004 October AT-40 2004 M45

 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

● Freeze frame data

● 1st trip freeze frame data A
● System readiness test (SRT) codes
● Test values
B
HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH CONSULT-II)
● If a DTC is displayed for both ECM and TCM, it is necessary to be erased for both ECM and TCM.
1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10 AT
seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.
2. Turn CONSULT-II “ON” and touch “A/T”.
3. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. D
4. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the TCM will be erased.) Then touch “BACK” twice.
5. Touch “ENGINE”.
E
6. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
7. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.)
F

SCIA5671E

HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH GST)

1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10
seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.
2. Perform “TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools)”. Refer to AT-101, "TCM SELF-DIAGNOS-
TIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" . (The engine warm-up step can be skipped when performing the diag-
nosis only to erase the DTC.)
3. Select Mode 4 with Generic Scan Tool (GST). For details, refer to EC-121, "Generic Scan Tool (GST)
Function" .

Revision: 2004 October AT-41 2004 M45

 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

HOW TO ERASE DTC (NO TOOLS)

The A/T CHECK indicator lamp is located on the instrument panel.
1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10
seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.
2. Perform “TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools)”. Refer to AT-101, "TCM SELF-DIAGNOS-
TIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" . (The engine warm-up step can be skipped when performing the diag-
nosis only to erase the DTC.)
3. Perform “OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (No tools)”. Refer to EC-63, "NO Tools" .
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ACS0019M

DESCRIPTION
The MIL is located on the instrument panel.
1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON with-
out the engine running. This is a bulb check.
● If the MIL does not light up, refer to DI-25, "WARNING
LAMPS" or see EC-413, "DTC P0650 MIL" .
2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off.
If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has
detected an engine system malfunction.

SEF217U

Revision: 2004 October AT-42 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PFP:00004

A
DTC Inspection Priority Chart ACS004HL

If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority
chart. B
NOTE:
If DTC “U1000” is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for “DTC U1000 CAN
COMMUNICATION LINE”. Refer to AT-103 . AT
Priority Detected items (DTC)
1 U1000 CAN communication line
2 Except above D

Fail-Safe ACS004HM

The TCM has an electrical fail-safe mode. This mode makes it possible to operate even if there is a malfunc- E
tion in a main electronic control input/output signal circuit.
In fail-safe mode, even if the select lever is “D” or “M” mode, the transmission is fixed in 2nd, 4th or 5th
(depending on the breakdown position), so the customer should feel “slipping” or “poor acceleration”. When F
fail-safe mode is triggered, when the ignition switch is switched ON, the A/T CHECK indicator lamp flashes for
about 8 seconds. (Refer to AT-101, "TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" ).
Even when the electronic circuits are normal, under special conditions (for example, when slamming on the
brake with the wheels spinning drastically and stopping the tire rotation), the transmission can go into fail-safe G
mode. If this happens, switch OFF the ignition switch for 10 seconds, then switch it ON again to return to the
normal shift pattern. Also, the A/T CHECK indicator lamp flashes for about 8 seconds once, then is cleared.
Therefore, the customer's vehicle has returned to normal, so handle according to the “diagnostics flow” (Refer H
to AT-46 ).
FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION
If any malfunction occurs in a sensor or solenoid, this function controls the A/T to make driving possible. I

Vehicle Speed Sensor

● Signals are input from two systems - from vehicle speed sensor A/T (revolution sensor) installed on the J
transmission and from combination meter so normal driving is possible even if there is a malfunction in
one of the systems. And if vehicle speed sensor A/T (revolution sensor) has unusual cases, 5th gear and
manual mode are prohibited.
K
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor
● If there is a malfunction in one of the systems, the accelerator opening angle is controlled by ECM accord-
ing to a pre-determined accelerator angle to make driving possible. And if there are malfunctions in tow L
systems, the engine speed is fixed by ECM to a pre-determined engine speed to make driving possible.
Throttle Position Sensor
● If there is a malfunction in one of the systems, the accelerator opening angle is controlled by ECM accord- M
ing to a pre-determined accelerator angle to make driving possible. And if there are malfunctions in tow
systems, the accelerator opening angle is controlled by the idle signal sent from the ECM which is based
on input indicating either idle condition or off-idle condition (pre-determined accelerator opening) in order
to make driving possible.
PNP Switch
● In the unlikely event that a malfunction signal enters the TCM, the position indicator is switched OFF, the
starter relay is switched OFF (starter starting is disabled), and the position is fixed to “D” range to make
driving possible.
PNP Relay
● The PNP relay is switched OFF. (Starter starting is disabled.)

Revision: 2004 October AT-43 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

A/T Interlock
● If there is an A/T interlock judgment malfunction, the transmission is fixed in 2nd gear to make driving pos-
sible.
NOTE:
When the vehicle is driven fixed in 2nd gear a turbine revolution sensor malfunction is displayed,
but this is not a turbine revolution sensor malfunction.
● When the coupling pattern below is detected, the fail-safe action corresponding to the pattern is executed.
A/T INTERLOCK COUPLING PATTERN TABLE
●: NG X: OK
Clutch pressure output pattern after fail-safe func-
ATF pressure switch output
tion
Fail-safe
Gear position SW6
SW3 SW5 SW1 SW2 function
(HLR/ I/C HLR/C D/C FR/B LC/B L/U
(I/C) (D/C) (FR/B) (LC/B)
C)
Held in
3rd – X X – ● OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
2nd gear
A/T inter-
Held in
lock cou- 4th – X X – ● OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
2nd gear
pling pattern
Held in
5th X X – X ● OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
2nd gear

A/T 1st Engine Braking

● When there is an A/T first gear engine brake judgment malfunction, the low coast brake solenoid is
switched OFF to avoid the engine brake operation.
Line Pressure Solenoid
● The solenoid is switched OFF and the line pressure is set to the maximum hydraulic pressure to make
driving possible.
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid
● The solenoid is switched OFF to release the lock-up.
Low Coast Brake Solenoid
● If a malfunction (electrical or functional) occurs with the solenoid ON, the transmission is held in 2nd gear,
and the solenoid OFF, the transmission is held in 4th gear to make driving possible. (engine brake is not
applied in 1st and 2nd gear.)
Input Clutch Solenoid
● If a malfunction (electrical or functional) occurs with the solenoid either ON or OFF, the transmission is
held in 4th gear to make driving possible.
Direct Clutch Solenoid
● If a malfunction (electrical or functional) occurs with the solenoid either ON or OFF, the transmission is
held in 4th gear to make driving possible.
Front Brake Solenoid
● If a malfunction (electrical or functional) occurs with the solenoid ON, the transmission is held in 5th gear,
and the solenoid OFF, the transmission is held in 4th gear to make driving possible.
High and Low Reverse Clutch Solenoid
● If a malfunction (electrical or functional) occurs with the solenoid either ON or OFF, the transmission is
held in 4th gear to make driving possible.
Turbine Revolution Sensor 1 or 2
● The control is the same as if there were no turbine revolution sensors, 5th gear and manual mode are pro-
hibited.

Revision: 2004 October AT-44 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

How To Perform Trouble Diagnosis For Quick and Accurate Repair ACS004HN

INTRODUCTION A
The TCM receives a signal from the vehicle speed sensor, accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position
sensor) or PNP switch and provides shift control or lock-up control via A/T solenoid valves.
The TCM also communicates with the ECM by means of a signal B
sent from sensing elements used with the OBD-related parts of the
A/T system for malfunction-diagnostic purposes. The TCM is capa-
ble of diagnosing malfunctioning parts while the ECM can store mal-
AT
functions in its memory.
Input and output signals must always be correct and stable in the
operation of the A/T system. The A/T system must be in good oper-
ating condition and be free of valve seizure, solenoid valve malfunc- D
tion, etc.

SAT631IB E

It is much more difficult to diagnose an error that occurs intermit-

tently rather than continuously. Most intermittent errors are caused F
by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this case, careful
checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the replacement of
good parts.
G
A visual check only may not find the cause of the errors. A road test
with CONSULT-II (or GST) or a circuit tester connected should be
performed. Follow the AT-46, "WORK FLOW" .
H

SAT632I

I
Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with a
customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The cus-
tomer can supply good information about such errors, especially J
intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under
what conditions they occur. A “DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET” as
shown on the example (Refer to AT-47 ) should be used.
K
Start your diagnosis by looking for “conventional” errors first. This will
help troubleshoot driveability errors on an electronically controlled
engine vehicle.
Also check related Service bulletins. L
SEF234G

Revision: 2004 October AT-45 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

WORK FLOW
A good understanding of the malfunction conditions can make troubleshooting faster and more accurate.
In general, each customer feels differently about a malfunction. It is important to fully understand the symp-
toms or conditions for a customer's complaint.
Make good use of the two sheets provided, “Information From Customer” (Refer to AT-47 ) and “Diagnostic
Worksheet” (Refer to AT-47 ), to perform the best troubleshooting possible.
Work Flow Chart

SCIA0501E

*1. AT-47 *2. AT-47 *3. AT-43

*4. AT-52 *5. AT-52, AT-53 *6. AT-55
*7. AT-89 *8. AT-39 *9. AT-101
*10. AT-103 *11. AT-250 *12. AT-254
*13. AT-302 *14. AT-63 *15. AT-40
*16. AT-103 *17. AT-246 *18. EC-50

Revision: 2004 October AT-46 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET
Information From Customer A
KEY POINTS
● WHAT..... Vehicle & A/T model
B
● WHEN..... Date, Frequencies
● WHERE..... Road conditions
● HOW..... Operating conditions, Symptoms AT
Customer name MR/MS Model & Year VIN
Trans. Model Engine Mileage
D
Incident Date Manuf. Date In Service Date
Frequency ❏ Continuous ❏ Intermittent ( times a day)
Symptoms ❏ Vehicle does not move. (❏ Any position ❏ Particular position) E
❏ No up-shift (❏ 1st → 2nd ❏ 2nd → 3rd ❏ 3rd → 4th ❏ 4th → 5th)
❏ No down-shift (❏ 5th → 4th ❏ 4th → 3rd ❏ 3rd → 2nd ❏ 2nd → 1st)
❏ Lock-up malfunction F
❏ Shift point too high or too low.
❏ Shift shock or slip (❏ N → D ❏ Lock-up ❏ Any drive position)
G
❏ Noise or vibration
❏ No kick down
❏ No pattern select H
❏ Others
( )
A/T CHECK indicator lamp Blinks for about 8 seconds. I
❏ Continuously lit ❏ Not lit
Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) ❏ Continuously lit ❏ Not lit J
Diagnostic Worksheet Chart
1 ❏ Read the item on cautions concerning fail-safe and understand the customer's complaint. AT-43
K
❏ A/T fluid inspection

2 ❏ Leak (Repair leak location.) AT-52

❏ State
❏ Amount
L

❏ Stall test and line pressure test

❏ Stall test
M
❏ Torque converter one-way clutch ❏ 1st one-way clutch
❏ Front brake ❏ 3rd one-way clutch AT-52,
3 ❏ High and low reverse clutch ❏ Engine AT-53
❏ Low coast brake ❏ Line pressure low
❏ Forward brake ❏ Except for input clutch and direct
❏ Reverse brake clutch, clutches and brakes OK
❏ Forward one-way clutch
❏ Line pressure inspection - Suspected part:

Revision: 2004 October AT-47 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

❏ Perform all road tests and enter checks in required inspection items. AT-55
Check before engine is started
❏ A/T CHECK Indicator Lamp Does Come On. AT-256 . AT-56
❏ Perform self-diagnostics. Enter checks for detected items.
❏ Vehicle speed sensor·A/T. AT-116 .
❏ Vehicle speed sensor·MTR. AT-165 .
❏ Direct clutch solenoid valve. AT-199 .
❏ TCC solenoid valve. AT-123 .
❏ Line pressure solenoid valve. AT-134 .
❏ Input clutch solenoid valve. AT-179 .
❏ Front brake solenoid valve. AT-189 .
❏ Low coast brake solenoid valve. AT-220 .
4-1. ❏ High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve. AT-209 .
❏ PNP switch. AT-110 .
❏ A/T fluid temperature sensors 1, 2. AT-154 .
❏ Turbine revolution sensors 1, 2. AT-160 .
❏ A/T interlock. AT-167 .
❏ A/T 1st engine braking. AT-174 .
❏ Start signal. AT-106 .
❏ Accelerator pedal position signal. AT-152 .
❏ Engine speed signal. AT-121 .
❏ CAN communication. AT-103 .
4
❏ TCM power supply. AT-140 .
❏ Battery
❏ Other
Check at idle
❏ Engine Cannot Be Started in “P” and “N” Position. AT-258 .
❏ In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves When Pushed. AT-259 .
4-2. ❏ In “N” Position Vehicle Moves. AT-260 . AT-56
❏ Large Shock (“N” to “D” Position). AT-262 .
❏ Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position. AT-265 .
❏ Vehicle does Not Creep Forward In “D” Position. AT-268 .
Cruise test
Part 1
❏ Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1. AT-271 .
❏ A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2. AT-274 .
4-3. ❏ A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3. AT-277 .
AT-58
❏ A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4. AT-280 .
❏ A/T Does Not Shift: D4 → D5. AT-283 .
❏ A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up. AT-286
❏ A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition. AT-288 .
❏ Lock-up Is Not Released. AT-290 .
❏ Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle. AT-291 .

Revision: 2004 October AT-48 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Part 2
A
❏ Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1. AT-271 .
❏ A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2. AT-274 . AT-60
❏ A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3. AT-277 .
❏ A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4. AT-280 . B
Part 3
❏ Cannot Be Changed To Manual Mode. AT-293 .
❏ A/T Does Not Shift: 5th gear → 4th gear. AT-294 . AT
❏ A/T Does Not Shift: 4th gear → 3rd gear. AT-296 . AT-60
❏ A/T Does Not Shift: 3rd gear → 2nd gear. AT-298 .
❏ A/T Does Not Shift: 2nd gear → 1st gear. AT-300 .
❏ Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake. AT-302 . D
❏ Perform self-diagnostics. Enter checks for detected items.
❏ Vehicle speed sensor·A/T. AT-116 .
❏ Vehicle speed sensor·MTR. AT-165 . E
❏ Direct clutch solenoid valve. AT-199 .
4 4-3
❏ TCC solenoid valve. AT-123 .
❏ Line pressure solenoid valve. AT-134 .
❏ Input clutch solenoid valve. AT-179 . F
❏ Front brake solenoid valve. AT-189 .
❏ Low coast brake solenoid valve. AT-220 .
❏ High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve. AT-209 .
❏ PNP switch. AT-110 . G
❏ A/T fluid temperature sensors 1, 2. AT-154 .
❏ Turbine revolution sensors 1, 2. AT-160 .
❏ A/T interlock. AT-167 .
H
❏ A/T 1st engine braking. AT-174 .
❏ Start signal. AT-106 .
❏ Accelerator pedal position signal. AT-152 .
❏ Engine sped signal. AT-121 . I
❏ CAN communication. AT-103 .
❏ TCM power supply. AT-140 .
❏ Battery
❏ Other J
❏ Inspect each system for items found to be NG in the self-diagnostics and repair or replace the malfunction
5
parts.
6 ❏ Perform all road tests and enter the checks again for the required items. AT-55 K
❏ For any remaining NG items, execute the “diagnostics procedure” and repair or replace the malfunction parts.
7 See the chart for diagnostics by symptoms. (This chart also contains other symptoms and inspection proce- AT-63
dures.) L
AT-89, AT-
8 ❏ Erase the results of the self-diagnostics from the TCM.
101
M

Revision: 2004 October AT-49 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

A/T Electrical Parts Location ACS004HO

SCIA1486E

Revision: 2004 October AT-50 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Circuit Diagram ACS004HP

AT

TCWA0108E

Revision: 2004 October AT-51 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis ACS004HQ

A/T FLUID CHECK

Fluid Leakage and Fluid Level Check
● Inspect for fluid leakage and check the fluid level. Refer to AT-14, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
Fluid Condition Check
Inspect the fluid condition.
Fluid status Conceivable Cause Required Operation
Replace the A/T fluid and check the
Varnished (viscous Clutch, brake A/T main unit and the vehicle for
varnish state) scorched malfunctions (wire harnesses,
cooler pipes, etc.)
Milky white or Replace the A/T fluid and check for
Water in the fluid
cloudy places where water is getting in.
Large amount of Unusual wear of
Replace the A/T fluid and check for
metal powder mixed sliding parts within
improper operation of the A/T.
in A/T SAT638A

STALL TEST
Stall Test Procedure
1. Inspect the amount of engine oil. Replenish the engine oil if necessary.
2. Drive for about 10 minutes to warm up the vehicle so that the A/
T fluid temperature is 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F). Inspect the
amount of A/T fluid. Replenish if necessary.

SAT647B

3. Securely engage the parking brake so that the tires do not turn.

SCIA1224E

4. Engine start, apply foot brake, and place selector lever in “D”
position.
5. While holding down the foot brake, gradually press down the
accelerator pedal.
6. Quickly read off the stall speed, then quickly remove your foot
from the accelerator pedal.
CAUTION:
Do not hold down the accelerator pedal for more than 5 sec-
onds during this test.
7. Move the selector lever to “N” position. SAT514G
8. Cool down the A/T fluid.

Revision: 2004 October AT-52 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

CAUTION:
Run the engine at idle for at least one minute. A
Stall speed: 2,300 - 2,600 rpm
Judgement Stall Test B
Selector lever position
Expected problem location
“D”, “M” “R”
AT
● Forward brake
● Forward one-way clutch
H O
● 1st one-way clutch
D
Stall rotation ● 3rd one-way clutch
O H ● Reverse brake
L L ● Engine and torque converter one-way clutch E
H H ● Line pressure low
O: Stall speed within standard value position
H: Stall speed higher than standard value F
L: Stall speed lower than standard value

Stall test standard value position

G
Does not shift up “D”, “M” position 1 → 2 Slipping in 2nd, 3rd, 4th gears Direct clutch slippage
Does not shift up “D”, “M” position 2 → 3 Slipping in 3rd, 4th, 5th gears High and low reverse clutch slippage
Does not shift up “D”, “M” position 3 → 4 Slipping in 4th, 5th gears Input clutch slippage H
Does not shift up “D”, “M” position 4 → 5 Slipping in 5th gear Front brake slippage

LINE PRESSURE TEST I

Line Pressure Test Port

PCIA0017E

Revision: 2004 October AT-53 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Line Pressure Test Procedure

1. Inspect the amount of engine oil and replenish if necessary.
2. Drive the car for about 10 minutes to warm it up so that the A/T fluid reaches in range of 50 to 80°C (122
to 176°F), then inspect the amount of A/T fluid and replenish if necessary.
NOTE:
The automatic fluid temperature rises in range of 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F) during 10 minutes of
driving.
3. After warming up A/T, remove the oil pressure detection plug
and install the oil pressure gauge.
CAUTION:
When using the oil pressure gauge, be sure to use the O-
ring attached to the oil pressure detection plug.

SCIA5309E

4. Securely engage the parking brake so that the tires do not turn.

SCIA1224E

5. Start the engine, then measure the line pressure at both idle and
the stall speed.
CAUTION:
● Keep the brake pedal pressed all the way down during
measurement.
● When measuring the line pressure at the stall speed,
refer to AT-52, "STALL TEST" .
6. After the measurements are complete, install the oil pressure
detection plug and tighten to the regulation torque below.
: 7.3 N·m (0.74 kg-m, 65 in-lb) SAT493G

CAUTION:
● Do not reuse O-ring.
● Apply ATF to O-ring.

Line Pressure
Line pressure kPa (kg/cm2 , psi)
Engine speed
“R” position “D”,“ M” positions
At idle speed 392 - 441 (4.0 - 4.5, 57 - 64) 373 - 422 (3.8 - 4.3, 54 - 61)
At stall speed 1,700 - 1,890 (17.3 - 19.3, 247 - 274) 1,310 - 1,500 (13.3 - 15.3, 190 - 218)

Revision: 2004 October AT-54 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Judgement of Line Pressure Test

Judgement Possible cause
A

Possible causes include malfunctions in the pressure supply system and low oil pump output.
For example
● Oil pump wear
B
Low for all positions
(P, R, N, D, M) ● Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking or spring fatigue
● Oil strainer Þ oil pump Þ pressure regulator valve passage oil leak
AT
● Engine idle speed too low
Only low for a spe- Possible causes include an oil pressure leak in a passage or device related to the position after
Idle speed cific position the pressure is distributed by the manual valve.
D
Possible causes include a sensor malfunction or malfunction in the line pressure adjustment func-
tion.
For example
● Accelerator pedal position signal malfunction E
High
● ATF temperature sensor malfunction
● Line pressure solenoid malfunction (sticking in “OFF” state, filter clog, cut line)
● Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking
F

Possible causes include a sensor malfunction or malfunction in the line pressure adjustment func-
tion.
For example G
Oil pressure does
● Accelerator pedal position signal malfunction
not rise higher than
the oil pressure for ● TCM breakdown
idle. ● Line pressure solenoid malfunction (shorting, sticking in“ ON” state)
H
● Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking
● Pilot valve sticking or pilot filter clogged
I
Stall speed Possible causes include malfunctions in the pressure supply system and malfunction in the line
pressure adjustment function.
The pressure rises, For example
but does not enter ● Accelerator pedal position signal malfunction J
the standard posi-
● Line pressure solenoid malfunction (sticking, filter clog)
tion.
● Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking
● Pilot valve sticking or pilot filter clogged
K

Only low for a spe- Possible causes include an oil pressure leak in a passage or device related to the position after
cific position the pressure is distributed by the manual valve.
L
ROAD TEST
Description
● The road test inspects overall performance of the A/T and analyzes possible malfunction causes. M
● The road test is carried out in the following three stages.
1. Check before engine is started. Refer to AT-56 .
2. Check at idle. Refer to AT-56 .
3. Cruise test
● Inspect all the items from Part 1 to Part 3. Refer to AT-58 , AT-60 , AT-60 .

● Before beginning the road test, check the test procedure and inspection items.

● Test all inspection items until the symptom is uncovered. Diagnose NG items when all road tests are
complete.

Revision: 2004 October AT-55 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Check Before Engine is Started ACS004HR

1. CHECK A/T CHECK INDICATOR LAMP

1. Park vehicle on level surface.
2. Move selector lever to “P” position.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
Does A/T CHECK indicator lamp light up for about 2 seconds?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Stop the road test and go to AT-256, "A/T CHECK Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On" .

2. CHECK A/T CHECK INDICATOR LAMP

Does A/T CHECK indicator lamp flash for about 8 seconds?

YES >> For TCM fail-safe mode, carry out self-diagnostics and record all NG items on the diagnostics
worksheet. Refer to AT-92 , AT-101 .
NO >> 1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Perform self-diagnostics and record all NG items on the diagnostics worksheet. Refer to AT-92
, AT-101 .
3. Go to AT-56, "Check at Idle" .
Check at Idle ACS004HS

1. CHECK STARTING THE ENGINE

1. Park vehicle on level surface.
2. Move selector lever to “P” or “N” position.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF.
4. Start engine.
Does the engine start?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Stop the road test and go to AT-258, "Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” or “N” Position" .

2. CHECK STARTING THE ENGINE

1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Move selector lever in “D”, “M” or “R” position.
3. Start engine.
Does the engine start in any position?
YES >> Stop the road test and go to AT-258, "Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” or “N” Position" .
NO >> GO TO 3.

3. CHECK “P” POSITION FUNCTION

1. Move selector lever to “P” position.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Push the vehicle forward or backward.
5. Engage the parking brake.
Does vehicle move when it is pushed forward or backward?
YES >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle moves when pushed in “P” position” on the diagnostics worksheet,
then continue the road test.
NO >> GO TO 4.

Revision: 2004 October AT-56 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

4. CHECK “N” POSITION FUNCTIONS A

1. Start the engine.
2. Move selector lever to “N” position.
3. Release the parking brake. B
Does vehicle move forward or backward?
YES >> Enter a check mark at “In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves” on the diagnostics worksheet, then con-
tinue the road test. AT
NO >> GO TO 5.

5. CHECK SHIFT SHOCK D

1. Engage the brake.

2. Move selector lever to “D” position. E
When the transmission is shifted from “N” to “D”, is there an excessive shock?
YES >> Enter a check mark at “Large shock (“N” to “D” position)” on the diagnostics worksheet, then con-
tinue the road test. F
NO >> GO TO 6.

6. CHECK “R” POSITION FUNCTIONS

G
1. Engage the brake.
2. Move selector lever to “R” position.
3. Release the brake for 4 to 5 seconds. H
Does the vehicle creep backward?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle does not creep backward in “R” position” on the diagnostics work- I
sheet, then continue the road test.

7. CHECK “D” POSITION FUNCTIONS J

Check if whether the vehicle creeps forward when the transmission is at “D” position.
Does the vehicle creep forward in “D” position?
K
YES >> Go to AT-58, "Cruise Test - Part 1" , AT-60, "Cruise Test - Part 2" , and AT-60, "Cruise Test - Part
3" .
NO >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle does not creep forward in D positions” on the diagnostics work-
sheet, then continue the road test. L

Revision: 2004 October AT-57 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Cruise Test - Part 1 ACS004HT

1. CHECK STARTING OUT FROM D1

1. Drive the vehicle for about 10 minutes to warm up the engine oil and A/T fluid.
Appropriate temperature for the A/T fluid: 50 - 80°C (122 - 176°F)
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface.
3. Move selector lever to “P” position.
4. Start the engine.
5. Move selector lever to “D” position.
6. Press the accelerator pedal about half way down to accelerate the vehicle.
With CONSULT-II
Read the gear positions. Refer to AT-95, "DATA MONITOR MODE" .
Start from D1?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle cannot be started from D1” on the diagnostics worksheet, then
continue the road test.

2. CHECK SHIFT UP D1 → D2
Press down the accelerator pedal about half way and check if the vehicle shifts up (D1 → D2) at the appropri-
ate speed.
● Refer to AT-62, "Vehicle Speed When Shifting Gears" .
With CONSULT-II
Read the gear position, throttle degree of opening, and vehicle speed. Refer to AT-95, "DATA MONITOR
MODE" .
Does the A/T shift up D1 → D2 at the correct speed?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Enter a check mark at “A/T does not shift D1 → D2” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue
the road test.

3. CHECK SHIFT UP D2 → D3
Press down the accelerator pedal about half way and check if the vehicle shifts up (D2 → D3) at the appropri-
ate speed.
● Refer to AT-62, "Vehicle Speed When Shifting Gears" .
With CONSULT-II
Read the gear position, throttle degree of opening, and vehicle speed. Refer to AT-95, "DATA MONITOR
MODE" .
Does the A/T shift up D2 → D3 at the correct speed?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Enter a check mark at “A/T does not shift D2 → D3” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue
the road test.

4. CHECK SHIFT UP D3 → D4
Press down the accelerator pedal about half way and check if the vehicle shifts up (D3 → D4) at the appropri-
ate speed.
● Refer to AT-62, "Vehicle Speed When Shifting Gears" .
With CONSULT-II
Read the gear position, throttle degree of opening, and vehicle speed. Refer to AT-95, "DATA MONITOR
MODE" .
Does the A/T shift up D3 → D4 at the correct speed?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Enter a check mark at “A/T does not shift D3 → D4” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue
the road test.

Revision: 2004 October AT-58 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

5. CHECK SHIFT UP D4 → D5 A
Press down the accelerator pedal about half way and check if the vehicle shifts up (D4 → D5) at the appropri-
ate speed.
● Refer to AT-62, "Vehicle Speed When Shifting Gears" . B
With CONSULT-II
Read the gear position, throttle degree of opening, and vehicle speed. Refer to AT-95, "DATA MONITOR
MODE" . AT
Does the A/T shift up D4 → D5 at the correct speed?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Enter a check mark at “A/T does not shift D4 → D5” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue D
the road test.

6. CHECK LOCK-UP E

When releasing accelerator pedal from D5, check lock-up from D5 to L/U.
● Refer to AT-62, "Vehicle Speed When Shifting Gears" .
F
With CONSULT-II
Select “TCC SOLENOID” with the “MAIN SIGNAL” mode for A/T. Refer to AT-89, "CONSULT-II REFERENCE
VALUE" . G
Does it lock-up?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Enter a check mark at “A/T does not perform lock-up” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue H
the road test.

7. CHECK LOCK-UP HOLD I

Does it maintain lock-up status?

YES >> GO TO 8. J
NO >> Enter a check mark at “A/T hold does not lock-up condition” on the diagnostics worksheet, then
continue the road test.
K
8. CHECK LOCK-UP RELEASE
Check lock-up cancellation by depressing brake pedal lightly to decelerate.
L
With CONSULT-II
Select “TCC SOLENOID” with the “MAIN SIGNAL” mode for A/T. Refer to AT-89, "CONSULT-II REFERENCE
VALUE" .
Does lock-up cancel? M
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> Enter a check mark at “Lock-up is not released” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the
road test.

9. CHECK SHIFT DOWN D5 → D4

Decelerate by pressing lightly on the brake pedal.
With CONSULT-II
Read the gear position and engine speed. Refer to AT-95, "DATA MONITOR MODE" .
When the A/T shift down D5 → D4, does the engine speed drop smoothly back to idle?
YES >> 1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Go to Cruise test - Part 2 (Refer to AT-60 ).
NO >> Enter a check mark at “Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle” on the diagnostics worksheet,
then continue the road test. Go to Cruise test - Part 2 (Refer to AT-60 ).

Revision: 2004 October AT-59 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Cruise Test - Part 2 ACS004HU

1. CHECK STARTING FROM D1

1. Move selector lever to “D” position.
2. Accelerate at half throttle.
With CONSULT-II
Read the gear position. Refer to AT-95, "DATA MONITOR MODE" .
Does it start from D1?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle cannot be started from D1” on the diagnostics worksheet, then
continue the road test.

2. CHECK SHIFT UP D1 → D2
Press the accelerator pedal down all the way and check whether or not the transmission shifts up (D1 → D2)
at the correct speed.
● Refer to AT-62, "Vehicle Speed When Shifting Gears" .
With CONSULT-II
Read the gear position, throttle position and vehicle speed. Refer to AT-95, "DATA MONITOR MODE" .
Does the A/T shift up D1 → D2 at the correct speed?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle does not shift D1 → D2” on the diagnostics worksheet, then con-
tinue the road test.

3. CHECK SHIFT UP D2 → D3
Press the accelerator pedal down all the way and check whether or not the transmission shifts up (D2 → D3)
at the correct speed.
● Refer to AT-62, "Vehicle Speed When Shifting Gears" .
With CONSULT-II
Read the gear position, throttle position and vehicle speed. Refer to AT-95, "DATA MONITOR MODE" .
Does the A/T shift up D2 → D3 at the correct speed?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle does not shift D2 → D3” on the diagnostics worksheet, then con-
tinue the road test.

4. CHECK SHIFT UP D3 → D4 AND ENGINE BRAKE

When the transmission changes speed D3 → D4, return the accelerator pedal.
Does the A/T shift up D3 → D4 and apply the engine brake?
YES >> 1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Go to Cruise test - Part 3 (Refer to AT-60 ).
NO >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle does not shift D3 → D4” on the diagnostics worksheet, then con-
tinue the road test.
Cruise Test - Part 3 ACS004HV

1. CHECK MANUAL MODE FUNCTION

Move to manual mode from “D” position.
Does it switch to manual mode?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Continue road test and add check mark to “Cannot be changed to manual mode” on diagnostics
worksheet.

Revision: 2004 October AT-60 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

2. CHECK SHIFT DOWN A

During manual mode driving, is downshift from M5 →M4 → M3 → M2 → M1 performed?
With CONSULT-II
Read the gear position. Refer to AT-95, "DATA MONITOR MODE" . B
Is downshifting correctly performed?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle does not shift” at the corresponding position (M5 → M4 , M4 → AT
M3 , M3 → M2 , M2 → M1 ) on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test.

3. CHECK ENGINE BRAKE D

Does engine braking effectively reduce speed in M1 position?

E
YES >> 1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Perform self-diagnostics. Refer to AT-92, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" , AT-101,
"Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT-II" .
F
NO >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle does not decelerate by engine brake” on the diagnostics work-
sheet, then continue trouble diagnosis.
G

Revision: 2004 October AT-61 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Vehicle Speed When Shifting Gears ACS004HW

Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)

Throttle position
D1 →D2 D2 →D3 D3 →D4 D4 →D5 D5 →D4 D4 →D3 D3 →D2 D2 →D1
64 - 68 95 - 103 147 - 157 219 - 229 215 - 225 136 - 146 85 - 93 41 - 45
Full throttle
(40 - 42) (59 - 64) (91 - 98) (136 - 142) (134 - 140) (85 - 91) (53 - 58) (25 - 28)
22 - 26 59 - 67 100 - 110 153 - 163 102 - 112 55 - 65 38 - 46 11 - 15
Half throttle
(14 - 16) (37 - 42) (62 - 68) (95 - 101) (63 - 70) (34 - 40) (24 - 29) (7 - 9)
● At half throttle, the accelerator opening is 4/8 of the full opening.

Vehicle Speed When Performing and Releasing Complete Lock-Up ACS004HX

Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)

Throttle position
Lock-up ON Lock-up OFF
Closed throttle 71 - 79 (44 - 49) 53 - 61 (33 - 38)
Half throttle 191 - 199 (119 - 124) 136 - 144 (85 - 89)
● At closed throttle, the accelerator opening is less than 1/8. (Closed throttle position signal : OFF)
● At half throttle, the accelerator opening is 4/8 of the full opening.

Vehicle Speed When Performing and Releasing Slip Lock-Up ACS004HY

Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)

Throttle position Gear position
Slip lock-up ON Slip lock-up OFF
3rd 27 - 35 (17 - 22) 24 - 32 (15 - 20)
Closed throttle 4th 39 - 47 (24 - 29) 36 - 44 (22 - 27)
5th 48 - 56 (30 - 35) 45 - 53 (28 - 33)

● At closed throttle, the accelerator opening is less than 1/8. (Closed throttle position signal : OFF)

Revision: 2004 October AT-62 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Symptom Chart ACS004I6

A
The diagnostics item numbers show the sequence for inspection. Inspect in order from Item 1.
Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference page
1. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-116, AT-165 B
2. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-152
Shift point is high in
ON vehicle 3. CAN communication line AT-103
“D” position.
AT
4. ATF temperature sensor AT-154
5. Control valve assembly AT-312
1. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-116, AT-165 D
Shift point is low in 2. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-152
ON vehicle
“D” position. 3. CAN communication line AT-103
4. Control valve assembly AT-312 E
1. Engine idle speed EC-32
2. Engine speed signal AT-121
F
3. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-152
4. Control linkage adjustment AT-305
Large shock. (“N” 5. ATF temperature sensor AT-154 G
→ “D” position) ON vehicle
6. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve AT-234, AT-189
Refer to AT-262,
"Large Shock (“N” 7. CAN communication line AT-103
to “D” Position)" . H
8. Fluid level and state AT-52
9. Line pressure test AT-53
10. Control valve assembly AT-312 I
11. Forward brake* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Con-
OFF vehicle AT-19
dition Check" .)
1. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-152 J
2. Control linkage adjustment AT-305
3. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve AT-242, AT-199
K
4. CAN communication line AT-103
Shock is too large ON vehicle 5. Engine speed signal AT-121
when changing D1
→ D2 or M1 → M2 6. Turbine revolution sensor AT-160 L
. 7. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-116, AT-165
8. Fluid level and state AT-52
M
9. Control valve assembly AT-312
10. Direct clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condi-
OFF vehicle AT-374
tion Check" .)
1. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-152
2. Control linkage adjustment AT-305
3. ATF pressure switch 6 and high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve AT-246, AT-209
4. CAN communication line AT-103
Shock is too large ON vehicle 5. Engine speed signal AT-121
when changing D2
→ D3 or M2 → M3 6. Turbine revolution sensor AT-160
. 7. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-116, AT-165
8. Fluid level and state AT-52
9. Control valve assembly AT-312
10. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52,
OFF vehicle AT-372
"Fluid Condition Check" .)

Revision: 2004 October AT-63 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference page

1. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-152
2. Control linkage adjustment AT-305
3. ATF pressure switch 3 and input clutch solenoid valve AT-238, AT-179
4. CAN communication line AT-103

Shock is too large ON vehicle 5. Engine speed signal AT-121

when changing D3 6. Turbine revolution sensor AT-160
→ D4 or M3 → M4 .
7. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-116, AT-165
8. Fluid level and state AT-52
9. Control valve assembly AT-312
10. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condi-
OFF vehicle AT-362
tion Check" .)
1. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-152
2. Control linkage adjustment AT-305
3. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve AT-234, AT-189
4. CAN communication line AT-103
ON vehicle 5. Engine speed signal AT-121
Shock is too large 6. Turbine revolution sensor AT-160
when changing D4
7. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-116, AT-165
→ D5 or M4 → M5 .
8. Fluid level and state AT-52
9. Control valve assembly AT-312
10. Front brake [brake band (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52,
AT-342
"Fluid Condition Check" .)]
OFF vehicle
11. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
AT-362
Check" .)
1. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-152
2. Control linkage adjustment AT-305
3. CAN communication line AT-103
4. Engine speed signal AT-121
ON vehicle
5. Turbine revolution sensor AT-160
6. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-116, AT-165
Shock is too large 7. Fluid level and state AT-52
for downshift when
accelerator pedal is 8. Control valve assembly AT-312
pressed. 9. Front brake [brake band (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52,
AT-342
"Fluid Condition Check" .)]
10. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condi-
AT-362
tion Check" .)
OFF vehicle
11. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52,
AT-372
"Fluid Condition Check" .)
12. Direct clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condi-
AT-374
tion Check" .)

Revision: 2004 October AT-64 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference page

A
1. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-152
2. Control linkage adjustment AT-305
3. Engine speed signal AT-121 B
4. CAN communication line AT-103
ON vehicle
5. Turbine revolution sensor AT-160
6. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-116, AT-165 AT
Shock is too large 7. Fluid level and state AT-52
for upshift when
accelerator pedal is 8. Control valve assembly AT-312
D
released. 9. Front brake [brake band (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52,
AT-342
"Fluid Condition Check" .)]
10. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condi- E
AT-362
tion Check" .)
OFF vehicle
11. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52,
AT-372
"Fluid Condition Check" .)
F
12. Direct clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condi-
AT-374
tion Check" .)
1. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-152
G
2. Control linkage adjustment AT-305
3. Engine speed signal AT-121
4. CAN communication line AT-103 H
ON vehicle 5. Turbine revolution sensor AT-160
Shock is too large
for lock-up. 6. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-116, AT-165
I
7. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-123
8. Fluid level and state AT-52
9. Control valve assembly AT-312 J
10. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid
OFF vehicle AT-342
Condition Check" .)
1. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-152 K
2. Control linkage adjustment AT-305
ON vehicle 3. CAN communication line AT-103
L
4. Fluid level and state AT-52
5. Control valve assembly AT-312
Shock is too large
6. Front brake [brake band (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52,
AT-342
M
during engine
"Fluid Condition Check" .)]
brake.
7. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
AT-362
Check" .)
OFF vehicle
8. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52,
AT-372
"Fluid Condition Check" .)
9. Direct clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
AT-374
Check" .)

Revision: 2004 October AT-65 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference page

1. Fluid level and state AT-52
2. Engine speed signal AT-121
3. Turbine revolution sensor AT-160
4. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-116, AT-165
ON vehicle
Judder occurs dur- 5. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-152
ing lock-up.
6. CAN communication line AT-103
7. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-123
8. Control valve assembly AT-312
9. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Con-
OFF vehicle AT-342
dition Check" .)
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
2. Engine speed signal AT-121
ON vehicle
3. CAN communication line AT-103
4. Control valve assembly AT-312
5. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Con-
AT-342
dition Check" .)
Strange noise in “R”
6. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid
position. AT-357
Condition Check" .)
7. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condi-
OFF vehicle AT-334
tion Check" .)
8. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52,
AT-372
"Fluid Condition Check" .)
9. Reverse brake (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condi-
AT-342
tion Check" .)
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
2. Engine speed signal AT-121
ON vehicle
3. CAN communication line AT-103
4. Control valve assembly AT-312
Strange noise in “N”
5. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Con-
position. AT-342
dition Check" .)
6. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid
OFF vehicle AT-357
Condition Check" .)
7. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condi-
AT-334
tion Check" .)
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
2. Engine speed signal AT-121
ON vehicle
3. CAN communication line AT-103
4. Control valve assembly AT-312
5. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Con-
Strange noise in “D” AT-342
dition Check" .)
position.
6. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid
AT-357
Condition Check" .)
OFF vehicle
7. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condi-
AT-334
tion Check" .)
8. Forward brake* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condi-
AT-19
tion Check" .)

Revision: 2004 October AT-66 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference page

A
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-116, AT-165
3. Direct clutch solenoid valve AT-199 B
ON vehicle
4. Line pressure test AT-53
5. CAN communication line AT-103
6. Control valve assembly AT-312 AT
7. 3rd one-way clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid
AT-360
When “ D” or “M” Condition Check" .)
position, remains in D
8. 1st one-way clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid
1st gear. AT-367
Condition Check" .)
9. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condi-
AT-334 E
tion Check" .)
OFF vehicle
10. Reverse brake (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Con-
AT-342
dition Check" .)
11. Forward one-way clutch* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, F
AT-19
"Fluid Condition Check" .)
12. Forward brake* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Con-
AT-19
dition Check" .) G
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-116, AT-165
H
3. Low coast brake solenoid valve AT-220
ON vehicle
4. Line pressure test AT-53
5. CAN communication line AT-103 I
When “D” or “M” 6. Control valve assembly AT-312
position, remains in 7. 3rd one-way clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid
2nd gear. AT-360
Condition Check" .) J
8. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condi-
AT-334
tion Check" .)
OFF vehicle
9. Direct clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition K
AT-374
Check" .)
10. Forward brake* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Con-
AT-19
dition Check" .) L
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-116, AT-165
M
ON vehicle 3. Line pressure test AT-53
4. CAN communication line AT-103
5. Control valve assembly AT-312

When “D” or “M” 6. 3rd one-way clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid
AT-360
position, remains in Condition Check" .)
3rd gear. 7. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condi-
AT-334
tion Check" .)
8. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52,
OFF vehicle AT-372
"Fluid Condition Check" .)
9. Forward one-way clutch* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52,
AT-19
"Fluid Condition Check" .)
10. Forward brake* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Con-
AT-19
dition Check" .)

Revision: 2004 October AT-67 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference page

1. Fluid level and state AT-52
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-116, AT-165
3. ATF pressure switch 3 and input clutch solenoid valve AT-238, AT-179
4. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve AT-242, AT-199
5. ATF pressure switch 6 and high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve AT-246, AT-209
ON vehicle
6. Low coast brake solenoid valve AT-220
7. Front brake solenoid valve AT-189

When “D” or “M” 8. Line pressure test AT-53

position, remains in 9. CAN communication line AT-103
4th gear.
10. Control valve assembly AT-312
11. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
AT-362
Check" .)
12. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condi-
AT-334
tion Check" .)
OFF vehicle
13. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52,
AT-372
"Fluid Condition Check" .)
14. Direct clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condi-
AT-374
tion Check" .)
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-116, AT-165
3. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve AT-234, AT-189
ON vehicle
4. Line pressure test AT-53
5. CAN communication line AT-103

When “D” or “M” 6. Control valve assembly AT-312

position, remains in 7. Front brake [brake band (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52,
5th gear. AT-342
"Fluid Condition Check" .)]
8. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
AT-362
Check" .)
OFF vehicle
9. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condi-
AT-334
tion Check" .)
10. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52,
AT-372
"Fluid Condition Check" .)

Revision: 2004 October AT-68 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference page

A
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
2. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-152
ON vehicle 3. Line pressure test AT-53 B
4. CAN communication line AT-103
5. Control valve assembly AT-312
6. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Con- AT
AT-342
dition Check" .)
7. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid
AT-357
Vehicle cannot be Condition Check" .) D
started from D1 .
8. 3rd one-way clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid
Refer to AT-271, AT-360
Condition Check" .)
"Vehicle Cannot Be
Started From D1" . 9. 1st one-way clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid E
AT-367
Condition Check" .)
OFF vehicle
10. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condi-
AT-334
tion Check" .) F
11. Reverse brake (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Con-
AT-342
dition Check" .)
12. Forward one-way clutch* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, G
AT-19
"Fluid Condition Check" .)
13. Forward brake* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Con-
AT-19
dition Check" .) H
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-116,AT-165
Gear does not
change from D1 → 3. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve AT-242,AT-199 I
D2 or from M1 → ON vehicle
4. Line pressure test AT-53
M2 .
Refer to AT-274, "A/ 5. CAN communication line AT-103
J
T Does Not Shift:
6. Control valve assembly AT-312
D1 → D2 " .
7. Direct clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
OFF vehicle AT-374
Check" .) K
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-116, AT-165
Gear does not
change from D2 → 3. ATF pressure switch 6 and high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve. AT-246,AT-209
L
D3 or from M2 → ON vehicle
4. Line pressure test AT-53
M3 .
Refer to AT-277, "A/ 5. CAN communication line AT-103
M
T Does Not Shift:
6. Control valve assembly AT-312
D2 → D3 " .
7. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52,
OFF vehicle AT-372
"Fluid Condition Check" .)
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-116, AT-165
Gear does not 3. ATF pressure switch 3 and input clutch solenoid valve AT-238, AT-179
change from D3 →
D4 or from M3 → ON vehicle 4. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve AT-234, AT-189
M4 . 5. Line pressure test AT-53
Refer to AT-280, "A/
T Does Not Shift: 6. CAN communication line AT-103
D3 → D4 " . 7. Control valve assembly AT-312
8. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
OFF vehicle AT-362
Check" .)

Revision: 2004 October AT-69 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference page

1. Fluid level and state AT-52
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-116, AT-165
3. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve AT-234, AT-189

Gear does not 4. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve AT-242, AT-199
ON vehicle
change from D4 → 5. Turbine revolution sensor AT-160
D5 or from M4 →
M5 . 6. Line pressure test AT-53
Refer to AT-283, "A/ 7. CAN communication line AT-103
T Does Not Shift:
D4 → D5" . 8. Control valve assembly AT-312
9. Front brake [brake band (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52,
AT-342
"Fluid Condition Check" .)]
OFF vehicle
10. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condi-
AT-362
tion Check" .)
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-116, AT-165
3. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve AT-234, AT-189
In “D” or “M” range,
ON vehicle 4. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve AT-242, AT-199
does not downshift
to 4th gear. 5. CAN communication line AT-103
Refer toAT-294, "A/
6. Line pressure test AT-53
T Does Not Shift:
5th Gear → 4th 7. Control valve assembly AT-312
Gear" .
8. Front brake [brake band (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52,
AT-342
"Fluid Condition Check" .)]
OFF vehicle
9. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
AT-362
Check" .)
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-116, AT-165
In “D” or “M” range, 3. ATF pressure switch 3 and input clutch solenoid valve AT-238, AT-179
does not downshift
to 3rd gear. ON vehicle 4. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve AT-234, AT-189
Refer to AT-296, "A/ 5. CAN communication line AT-103
T Does Not Shift:
4th Gear → 3rd 6. Line pressure test AT-53
Gear" . 7. Control valve assembly AT-312
8. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
OFF vehicle AT-362
Check" .)
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-116, AT-165
In “D” or “M” range,
does not downshift 3. ATF pressure switch 6 and high & low reverse clutch solenoid valve AT-246, AT-209
to 2nd gear. ON vehicle
4. CAN communication line AT-103
Refer to AT-298, "A/
T Does Not Shift: 5. Line pressure test AT-53
3rd Gear → 2nd
6. Control valve assembly AT-312
Gear" .
7. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52,
OFF vehicle AT-372
"Fluid Condition Check" .)

Revision: 2004 October AT-70 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference page

A
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-116,AT-165
In “D” or “M” range,
does not downshift 3. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve AT-242,AT-199 B
to 1st gear. ON vehicle
4. CAN communication line AT-103
Refer to AT-300, "A/
T Does Not Shift: 5. Line pressure test AT-53
2nd Gear → 1st AT
6. Control valve assembly AT-312
Gear" .
7. Direct clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
OFF vehicle AT-374
Check" .)
D
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
2. Line pressure test AT-53
3. Engine speed signal AT-121 E
ON vehicle 4. Turbine revolution sensor AT-160
Does not lock-up.
5. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-123
Refer to AT-286, "A/
T Does Not Per- 6. CAN communication line AT-103 F
form Lock-up" .
7. Control valve assembly AT-312
8. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Con-
dition Check" .)
AT-342 G
OFF vehicle
9. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid
AT-357
Condition Check" .)
H
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
2. Line pressure test AT-53
3. Engine speed signal AT-121 I
Does not hold lock- ON vehicle 4. Turbine revolution sensor AT-160
up condition.
5. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-123
Refer to AT-288, "A/
J
T Does Not Hold 6. CAN communication line AT-103
Lock-up Condition"
7. Control valve assembly AT-312
.
8. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Con- K
AT-342
dition Check" .)
OFF vehicle
9. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid
AT-357
Condition Check" .)
L
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
2. Line pressure test AT-53
3. Engine speed signal AT-121 M
ON vehicle 4. Turbine revolution sensor AT-160
Lock-up is not
released. 5. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-123
Refer to AT-290,
6. CAN communication line AT-103
"Lock-up is Not
Released" . 7. Control valve assembly AT-312
8. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Con-
AT-342
dition Check" .)
OFF vehicle
9. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid
AT-357
Condition Check" .)

Revision: 2004 October AT-71 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference page

1. PNP switch AT-110
2. Fluid level and state AT-52
3. Control linkage adjustment AT-305
ON vehicle 4. Manual mode switch AT-230
Does not change
M5 → M4 . 5. ATF pressure switch 1 AT-234
6. CAN communication line AT-103
7. Control valve assembly AT-312
8. Front brake [brake band (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52,
OFF vehicle AT-342
"Fluid Condition Check" .)]
1. PNP switch AT-110
2. Fluid level and state AT-52
3. Control linkage adjustment AT-304
ON vehicle 4. Manual mode switch AT-230
5. ATF pressure switch 1 and ATF pressure switch 3 AT-234, AT-238
Does not change
M4 → M3 . 6. CAN communication line AT-103
7. Control valve assembly AT-312
8. Front brake [brake band (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52,
AT-340
"Fluid Condition Check" .)]
OFF vehicle
9. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
AT-362
Check" .)
1. PNP switch AT-110
2. Fluid level and state AT-52
3. Control linkage adjustment AT-305
ON vehicle 4. Manual mode switch AT-230
5. ATF pressure switch 6 AT-246

Does not change 6. CAN communication line AT-103

M3 → M2 . 7. Control valve assembly AT-312
8. Front brake [brake band (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52,
AT-342
"Fluid Condition Check" .)]
9. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
OFF vehicle AT-362
Check" .)
10. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52,
AT-372
"Fluid Condition Check" .)
1. PNP switch AT-110
2. Fluid level and state AT-52
3. Control linkage adjustment AT-305
ON vehicle 4. Manual mode switch AT-230
5. ATF pressure switch 5 AT-242

Does not change 6. CAN communication line AT-103

M2 → M1 . 7. Control valve assembly AT-312
8. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
AT-362
Check" .)
9. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52,
OFF vehicle AT-372
"Fluid Condition Check" .)
10. Direct clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condi-
AT-374
tion Check" .)

Revision: 2004 October AT-72 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference page

A
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-116, AT-165
3. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve AT-242, AT-199 B
ON vehicle
4. CAN communication line AT-103
5. Line pressure test AT-53
6. Control valve assembly AT-312 AT

No shock at all or 7. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Con-
AT-342
the clutch slips dition Check" .)
when vehicle D
8. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid
changes speed D1 AT-357
Condition Check" .)
→ D2 or M1 → M2 .
9. 3rd one-way clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid
AT-360 E
Condition Check" .)
OFF vehicle
10. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condi-
AT-334
tion Check" .)
11. Direct clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condi- F
AT-374
tion Check" .)
12. Forward brake* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Con-
AT-19
dition Check" .) G
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-116, AT-165
H
3. ATF pressure switch 6 and high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve AT-246,AT-209
ON vehicle
4. CAN communication line AT-103
5. Line pressure test AT-53 I
6. Control valve assembly AT-312
7. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Con-
AT-342
dition Check" .) J
No shock at all or
the clutch slips 8. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid
AT-357
when vehicle Condition Check" .)
changes speed D2 K
9. 3rd one-way clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid
→ D3 or M2 → M3 . AT-360
Condition Check" .)
10. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condi-
OFF vehicle AT-334
tion Check" .) L
11. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52,
AT-372
"Fluid Condition Check" .)
12. Forward one-way clutch* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, M
AT-19
"Fluid Condition Check" .)
13. Forward brake* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Con-
AT-19
dition Check" .)

Revision: 2004 October AT-73 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference page

1. Fluid level and state AT-52
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-116, AT-165
3. ATF pressure switch 3 and input clutch solenoid valve AT-238, AT-179
ON vehicle 4. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve AT-234, AT-189
5. CAN communication line AT-103
6. Line pressure test AT-53
7. Control valve assembly AT-312
No shock at all or
8. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Con-
the clutch slips AT-342
dition Check" .)
when vehicle
changes speed D3 9. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid
AT-357
→ D4 or M3 → M4 . Condition Check" .)
10. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condi-
AT-362
tion Check" .)
OFF vehicle
11. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condi-
AT-334
tion Check" .)
12. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52,
AT-372
"Fluid Condition Check" .)
13. Direct clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condi-
AT-374
tion Check" .)
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-116, AT-165
3. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve AT-234, AT-189
ON vehicle 4. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve AT-242, AT-199
5. CAN communication line AT-103
6. Line pressure test AT-53
7. Control valve assembly AT-312
No shock at all or
8. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Con-
the clutch slips AT-342
dition Check" .)
when vehicle
changes speed D4 9. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid
AT-357
→ D5 or M4 → M5 . Condition Check" .)
10. Front brake [brake band (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52,
AT-342
"Fluid Condition Check" .)]
OFF vehicle
11. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
AT-362
Check" .)
12. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condi-
AT-334
tion Check" .)
13. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52,
AT-372
"Fluid Condition Check" .)

Revision: 2004 October AT-74 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference page

A
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-116, AT-165
3. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve AT-234, AT-189 B
ON vehicle 4. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve AT-242, AT-199
5. CAN communication line AT-103
6. Line pressure test AT-53 AT
When you press 7. Control valve assembly AT-312
the accelerator
8. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Con-
pedal and shift AT-342 D
dition Check" .)
speed D5 → D4 or
M5 → M4 the 9. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid
AT-357
engine idles or the Condition Check" .)
transmission slips. E
10. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condi-
AT-362
tion Check" .)
OFF vehicle
11. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condi-
AT-334 F
tion Check" .)
12. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52,
AT-372
"Fluid Condition Check" .)
G
13. Direct clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condi-
AT-374
tion Check" .)
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
H
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-116, AT-165
3. ATF pressure switch 3 and input clutch solenoid valve AT-238, AT-179
ON vehicle 4. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve AT-234, AT-189 I
5. CAN communication line AT-103
6. Line pressure test AT-53
J
7. Control valve assembly AT-312
When you press 8. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Con-
the accelerator AT-342
dition Check" .)
pedal and shift K
speed D4 → D3 or 9. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid
AT-357
M4 → M3 the Condition Check" .)
engine idles or the 10. 3rd one-way clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid
transmission slips. Condition Check" .)
AT-360 L
11. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condi-
OFF vehicle AT-334
tion Check" .)
M
12. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52,
AT-372
"Fluid Condition Check" .)
13. Forward one-way clutch* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52,
AT-19
"Fluid Condition Check" .)
14. Forward brake* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Con-
AT-19
dition Check" .)

Revision: 2004 October AT-75 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference page

1. Fluid level and state AT-52
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-116, AT-165
3. ATF pressure switch 6 and high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve AT-246, AT-209
ON vehicle 4. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve AT-242, AT-199
5. CAN communication line AT-103
6. Line pressure test AT-53
When you press 7. Control valve assembly AT-312
the accelerator
8. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Con-
pedal and shift AT-342
dition Check" .)
speed D3 → D2 or
M3 → M2 the 9. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid
AT-357
engine idles or the Condition Check" .)
transmission slips.
10. 3rd one-way clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid
AT-360
Condition Check" .)
OFF vehicle
11. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condi-
AT-334
tion Check" .)
12. Direct clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condi-
AT-374
tion Check" .)
13. Forward brake* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Con-
AT-19
dition Check" .)
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-116, AT-165
3. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve AT-242, AT-199
ON vehicle
4. CAN communication line AT-103
5. Line pressure test AT-53
6. Control valve assembly AT-312
7. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Con-
AT-342
dition Check" .)
When you press
the accelerator 8. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid
AT-357
pedal and shift Condition Check" .)
speed D2 → D1 or 9. 3rd one-way clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid
M2 → M1 the AT-360
Condition Check" .)
engine idles or the
transmission slips. 10. 1st one-way clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid
AT-367
Condition Check" .)
OFF vehicle
11. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condi-
AT-334
tion Check" .)
12. Reverse brake (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Con-
AT-342
dition Check" .)
13. Forward one-way clutch* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52,
AT-19
"Fluid Condition Check" .)
14. Forward brake* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Con-
AT-19
dition Check" .)

Revision: 2004 October AT-76 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference page

A
1. PNP switch AT-110
2. Fluid level and state AT-52
3. Control linkage adjustment AT-305 B
ON vehicle 4. Manual mode switch AT-230
Vehicle dose not
decelerate by 5. ATF pressure switch 5 AT-242
engine brake. 6. CAN communication line AT-103 AT
Refer to AT-302,
"Vehicle Does Not 7. Control valve assembly AT-312
Decelerate by 8. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
Engine Brake" . AT-362 D
Check" .)
9. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52,
OFF vehicle AT-372
"Fluid Condition Check" .)
E
10. Direct clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condi-
AT-374
tion Check" .)
1. PNP switch AT-110
F
2. Fluid level and state AT-52
3. Control linkage adjustment AT-305

Engine brake does ON vehicle 4. Manual mode switch AT-230 G

not work M5 → M4 5. ATF pressure switch 1 AT-234
.
6. CAN communication line AT-103
H
7. Control valve assembly AT-312
8. Front brake [brake band (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52,
OFF vehicle AT-342
"Fluid Condition Check" .)]
I
1. PNP switch AT-110
2. Fluid level and state AT-52
3. Control linkage adjustment AT-305 J
ON vehicle 4. Manual mode switch AT-230
Engine brake does 5. ATF pressure switch 1 and ATF pressure switch 3 AT-234, AT-238
not work M4 → M3 K
6. CAN communication line AT-103
.
7. Control valve assembly AT-312
8. Front brake [brake band (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, L
AT-342
"Fluid Condition Check" .)]
OFF vehicle
9. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
AT-362
Check" .)
M
1. PNP switch AT-110
2. Fluid level and state AT-52
3. Control linkage adjustment AT-305
ON vehicle 4. Manual mode switch AT-230
5. ATF pressure switch 6 AT-246
Engine brake does 6. CAN communication line AT-103
not work M3 → M2
. 7. Control valve assembly AT-312
8. Front brake [brake band (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52,
AT-342
"Fluid Condition Check" .)]
9. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
OFF vehicle AT-362
Check" .)
10. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52,
AT-372
"Fluid Condition Check" .)

Revision: 2004 October AT-77 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference page

1. PNP switch AT-110
2. Fluid level and state AT-52
3. Control linkage adjustment AT-305
ON vehicle 4. Manual mode switch AT-230
5. ATF pressure switch 5 AT-242
Engine brake does 6. CAN communication line AT-103
not work M2 → M1
. 7. Control valve assembly AT-312
8. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
AT-362
Check" .)
9. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52,
OFF vehicle AT-372
"Fluid Condition Check" .)
10. Direct clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condi-
AT-374
tion Check" .)
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
2. Line pressure test AT-53
3. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-152
ON vehicle 4. CAN communication line AT-103
5. PNP switch AT-110
6. Control linkage adjustment AT-305
7. Control valve assembly AT-312
8. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Con-
AT-342
With selector lever dition Check" .)
in “D” position, 9. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid
acceleration is AT-357
Condition Check" .)
extremely poor.
10. 1st one-way clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid
AT-367
Condition Check" .)
11. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condi-
OFF vehicle AT-334
tion Check" .)
12. Reverse brake (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Con-
AT-342
dition Check" .)
13. Forward one-way clutch* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52,
AT-19
"Fluid Condition Check" .)
14. Forward brake* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Con-
AT-19
dition Check" .)
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
2. Line pressure test AT-53
3. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-152
4. ATF pressure switch 6 and high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve AT-246, AT-209
ON vehicle
5. CAN communication line AT-103
With selector lever 6. PNP switch AT-110
in “R” position,
7. Control linkage adjustment AT-305
acceleration is
extremely poor. 8. Control valve assembly AT-312
9. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condi-
AT-334
tion Check" .)
10. Output shaft (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condi-
OFF vehicle AT-342
tion Check" .)
11. Reverse brake (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Con-
AT-342
dition Check" .)

Revision: 2004 October AT-78 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference page

A
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
2. Line pressure test AT-53
ON vehicle 3. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-152 B
4. CAN communication line AT-103
5. Control valve assembly AT-312
6. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Con- AT
AT-342
dition Check" .)
7. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid
AT-357
Condition Check" .) D
While starting off by
accelerating in 1st, 8. 3rd one-way clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid
AT-360
engine races or Condition Check" .)
slippage occurs. E
9. 1st one-way clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid
AT-367
Condition Check" .)
OFF vehicle
10. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condi-
AT-334
tion Check" .) F
11. Reverse brake (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Con-
AT-342
dition Check" .)
12. Forward one-way clutch* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, G
AT-19
"Fluid Condition Check" .)
13. Forward brake* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Con-
AT-19
dition Check" .) H
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
2. Line pressure test AT-53
3. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-152 I
ON vehicle
4. CAN communication line AT-103
5. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve AT-242, AT-199
J
6. Control valve assembly AT-312
7. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Con-
While accelerating AT-342
dition Check" .) K
in 2nd, engine
races or slippage 8. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid
AT-357
occurs. Condition Check" .)
9. 3rd one-way clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid
AT-360
L
Condition Check" .)
OFF vehicle
10. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condi-
AT-334
tion Check" .)
M
11. Direct clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condi-
AT-374
tion Check" .)
12. Forward brake* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Con-
AT-19
dition Check" .)

Revision: 2004 October AT-79 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference page

1. Fluid level and state AT-52
2. Line pressure test AT-53
3. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-152
ON vehicle
4. CAN communication line AT-103
5. ATF pressure switch 6 and high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve AT-246, AT-209
6. Control valve assembly AT-312
7. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Con-
AT-342
dition Check" .)
While accelerating 8. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid
AT-357
in 3rd, engine races Condition Check" .)
or slippage occurs.
9. 3rd one-way clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid
AT-360
Condition Check" .)
10. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condi-
OFF vehicle AT-334
tion Check" .)
11. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52,
AT-372
"Fluid Condition Check" .)
12. Forward one-way clutch* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52,
AT-342
"Fluid Condition Check" .)
13. Forward brake* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Con-
AT-19
dition Check" .)
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
2. Line pressure test AT-53
3. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-152
ON vehicle
4. CAN communication line AT-103
5. ATF pressure switch 3 and input clutch solenoid valve AT-238, AT-179
6. Control valve assembly AT-312
7. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Con-
AT-342
While accelerating dition Check" .)
in 4th, engine races 8. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid
or slippage occurs. AT-357
Condition Check" .)
9. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
AT-362
Check" .)
OFF vehicle
10. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condi-
AT-334
tion Check" .)
11. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52,
AT-372
"Fluid Condition Check" .)
12. Direct clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condi-
AT-374
tion Check" .)

Revision: 2004 October AT-80 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference page

A
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
2. Line pressure test AT-53
3. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-152 B
ON vehicle
4. CAN communication line AT-103
5. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve AT-234, AT-189
6. Control valve assembly AT-312 AT
7. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Con-
AT-342
While accelerating dition Check" .)
in 5th, engine races D
8. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid
or slippage occurs. AT-357
Condition Check" .)
9. Front brake [brake band (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52,
AT-342 E
"Fluid Condition Check" .)]
OFF vehicle
10. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condi-
AT-362
tion Check" .)
11. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condi- F
AT-334
tion Check" .)
12. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52,
AT-372
"Fluid Condition Check" .) G
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
2. Line pressure test AT-53
H
3. Engine speed signal AT-121
ON vehicle 4. Turbine revolution sensor AT-160
5. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-123 I
Slips at lock-up.
6. CAN communication line AT-103
7. Control valve assembly AT-312
J
8. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Con-
AT-342
dition Check" .)
OFF vehicle
9. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid
AT-357 K
Condition Check" .)

Revision: 2004 October AT-81 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference page

1. Fluid level and state AT-52
2. Line pressure test AT-53
3. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-152
ON vehicle
4. CAN communication line AT-103
5. Direct clutch solenoid valve AT-199
6. Control valve assembly AT-312
7. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer toAT-52, "Fluid Con-
AT-342
dition Check" .)
8. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid
AT-357
Condition Check" .)
Maximum speed
low. 9. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
AT-362
Check" .)
10. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condi-
AT-334
tion Check" .)
OFF vehicle
11. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52,
AT-372
"Fluid Condition Check" .)
12. Direct clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condi-
AT-374
tion Check" .)
13. Forward one-way clutch* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52,
AT-19
"Fluid Condition Check" .)
14. Forward brake* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Con-
AT-19
dition Check" .)
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
2. Line pressure test AT-53
3. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-152
4. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve AT-242, AT-199
ON vehicle
5. PNP switch AT-110
6. CAN communication line AT-103
7. Control linkage adjustment AT-305
8. Control valve assembly AT-312
No creep at all. 9. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Con-
Refer to AT-265, AT-342
dition Check" .)
"Vehicle Does Not
Creep Backward in 10. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid
AT-357
“R” Position" , AT- Condition Check" .)
268, "Vehicle Does 11. 1st one-way clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid
Not Creep Forward AT-367
Condition Check" .)
in “D” Position"
12. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condi-
AT-334
tion Check" .)
OFF vehicle
13. Reverse brake (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Con-
AT-342
dition Check" .)
14. Direct clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condi-
AT-374
tion Check" .)
15. Forward one-way clutch* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52,
AT-19
"Fluid Condition Check" .)
16. Forward brake* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Con-
AT-19
dition Check" .)

Revision: 2004 October AT-82 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference page

A
1. Engine idle speed EC-32
ON vehicle 2. CAN communication line AT-103
Extremely large
creep. 3. ATF pressure switch 5 AT-242 B
4. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Con-
OFF vehicle AT-342
dition Check" .)
With selector lever 1. PNP switch AT-110 AT
in “P” position, vehi-
2. Control linkage adjustment AT-305
cle does not enter
parking condition
or, with selector D
lever in another
position, parking ON vehicle
condition is not 3. Parking pawl components (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52,
AT-325 E
cancelled. "Fluid Condition Check" .)
Refer to AT-259, "In
“P” Position, Vehi-
cle Moves When
Pushed" .
F

1. PNP switch AT-110

2. Fluid level and state AT-52 G
3. Control linkage adjustment AT-305
Vehicle runs with ON vehicle
transmission in “P” 4. Control valve assembly AT-312
position. 5. Parking pawl components (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, H
AT-325
"Fluid Condition Check" .)
6. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condi-
OFF vehicle AT-334
tion Check" .) I
1. PNP switch AT-110
2. Fluid level and state AT-52
ON vehicle J
3. Control linkage adjustment AT-305
4. Control valve assembly AT-312
5. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition K
AT-362
Vehicle runs with Check" .)
transmission in “N” 6. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condi-
position. AT-334
tion Check" .)
Refer to AT-260, "In L
“N” Position, Vehi- 7. Direct clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
AT-374
cle Moves" . Check" .)
OFF vehicle
8. Reverse brake (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condi- M
AT-342
tion Check" .)
9. Forward one-way clutch* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52,
AT-19
"Fluid Condition Check" .)
10. Low coast brake* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid
AT-19
Condition Check" .)

Revision: 2004 October AT-83 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference page

1. Fluid level and state AT-52
2. Line pressure test AT-53
ON vehicle 3. PNP switch AT-110
4. Control linkage adjustment AT-305

Vehicle cannot run 5. Control valve assembly AT-312

in all positions. 6. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid
AT-357
Condition Check" .)
7. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condi-
OFF vehicle AT-334
tion Check" .)
8. Output shaft (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
AT-342
Check" .)
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
2. Line pressure test AT-53
ON vehicle 3. PNP switch AT-110
4. Control linkage adjustment AT-305
5. Control valve assembly AT-312
6. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Con-
AT-342
dition Check" .)
7. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid
With selector lever AT-357
Condition Check" .)
in “D” position, driv-
ing is not possible. 8. 1st one-way clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid
AT-367
Condition Check" .)
9. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condi-
OFF vehicle AT-334
tion Check" .)
10. Reverse brake (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Con-
AT-342
dition Check" .)
11. Forward one-way clutch* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52,
AT-19
"Fluid Condition Check" .)
12. Forward brake* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Con-
AT-19
dition Check" .)
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
2. Line pressure test AT-53
ON vehicle 3. PNP switch AT-110
4. Control linkage adjustment AT-305
With selector lever 5. Control valve assembly AT-312
in “R” position, driv-
ing is not possible. 6. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condi-
AT-334
tion Check" .)
7. Output shaft (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
OFF vehicle AT-342
Check" .)
8. Reverse brake (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condi-
AT-342
tion Check" .)
Can not be 1. Manual mode switch AT-230
changed to manual
2. Turbine revolution sensor AT-160
mode.
Refer to AT-293, ON vehicle
"Cannot Be
3. CAN communication line AT-103
Changed to Manual
Mode" .

Revision: 2004 October AT-84 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference page

A
Engine does not 1. Ignition switch and starter PG-2, SC-9
start in “N” or “P”
2. Control linkage adjustment AT-305
position.
Refer to AT-258, ON vehicle B
"Engine Cannot Be
3. PNP switch AT-110
Started In “P” or “N”
Position" .
1. Ignition switch and starter PG-2, SC-9
AT
Engine starts in
positions other than ON vehicle 2. Control linkage adjustment AT-305
“N” or “P”.
3. PNP switch AT-110 D
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
2. Engine speed signal AT-121
3. Turbine revolution sensor AT-160 E
ON vehicle
4. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-123
Engine stall.
5. CAN communication line AT-103
F
6. Control valve assembly AT-312
7. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Con-
OFF vehicle AT-342
dition Check" .)
G
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
2. Engine speed signal AT-121
3. Turbine revolution sensor AT-160 H
Engine stalls when ON vehicle
4. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-123
select lever shifted
“N” → “D”, “R”. 5. CAN communication line AT-103
I
6. Control valve assembly AT-312
7. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Con-
OFF vehicle AT-342
dition Check" .)
J
1. Fluid level and state AT-52
2. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve AT-242, AT-199
3. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve AT-234, AT-189 K
Engine speed does ON vehicle 4. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-152
not return to idle.
5. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-116, AT-165
Refer to AT-291, L
"Engine Speed 6. CAN communication line AT-103
Does Not Return to
7. Control valve assembly AT-312
Idle" .
8. Front brake [brake band (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, M
AT-342
"Fluid Condition Check" .)]
OFF vehicle
9. Direct clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
AT-374
Check" .)
*: Parts behind Drum Support is impossible to perform inspection by disassembly.

Revision: 2004 October AT-85 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values ACS004I0

TCM TERMINAL CONNECTOR LAYOUT

SCIA0495E

TCM INSPECTION TABLE

Data are reference value and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Terminal Wire
Item Condition Data (Approx.)
No. color
After warming up the engine, release your foot from the
2.0V
Line pressure accelerator pedal.
1 B/Y
solenoid valve After warming up the engine, press the accelerator pedal all
0.7V
the way down.

– Battery voltage
2 W Power supply
(A/T PV IGN
relay) Measure 3 seconds after switching OFF the ignition switch. 0V

– Battery voltage
Power supply (A/T
3 W
PV IGN relay)
Measure 3 seconds after switching OFF the ignition switch. 0V

SEL3 (ATF pres-

4 P/L – –
sure switch 3)
5 B Ground Always 0V
6 L CAN H – –
7 R CAN L – –
When ATF temperature 0°C (32°F) 3.2V
A/T fluid tempera-
8 B/R When ATF temperature 20°C (68°F) 2.5V
ture sensor 1
When ATF temperature 80°C (176°F) 0.8V
Power supply
9 W/B Always Battery voltage
(Memory back-up)
When the solenoid valve operating (in 1st gear, 2nd gear, or
More than 2.0V
Input clutch sole- 3rd gear)
10 R/W
noid valve When the solenoid valve is not operating (4th gear or 5th
When 0V
gear)
vehicle
cruises When the solenoid valve operating [6 km/h (4 MPH) or
High and low More than 2.0V
faster in 1st gear or 2nd gear]
11 R/L reverse clutch
solenoid valve When the solenoid valve is not operating [6 km/h (4 MPH) or
0V
slower in 1st gear or 3rd, 4th, or 5th gear]

Revision: 2004 October AT-86 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Terminal Wire
Item Condition Data (Approx.)
No. color A

– Battery voltage
Power supply B
12 Y/R
(out)
– 0V
AT
When the solenoid valve is operating (when running in M1-1
When Battery voltage
Low coast brake gear or M2-2 gear)
13 W/L vehicle D
solenoid valve When the solenoid valve is not operating (when running in
cruises 0V
“D”)
14 B Ground Always 0V
E
15 B/W SEL4 – –
SEL1 (ATF pres-
16 W/G – –
sure switch 2)
F
When ATF temperature about 0°C (32°F) 3.2V
A/T fluid tempera-
17 Y/B When ATF temperature about 20°C (68°F) 2.4V
ture sensor 2
When ATF temperature about 80°C (176°F) 0.65V G
Front brake sole- When the solenoid valve is operating (other than 4th gear) More than 2.0V
19 R
noid valve When the solenoid valve is not operating (4th gear) 0V
H
TCC solenoid When When lock-up More than 2.0V
20 Y
valve vehicle When not lock-up 0V
cruises
When the solenoid valve is operating (1st gear or 5th gear) More than 2.0V I
Direct clutch sole-
21 G When the solenoid valve is not operating (2nd gear, 3rd
noid valve 0V
gear, or 4th gear)
SEL2 (ATF pres- J
22 P/B – –
sure switch 5)
K-line (CONSULT-
23 PU/W The terminal is connected to the data link connector for CONSULT-II.
II signal)
K
24 B Ground Always 0V

PSC2 (ATF pres- When high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve ON. 0V
26 G/Y
sure switch 6) When When high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve OFF. Battery voltage L
vehicle
Vehicle speed
cruises When running at 20 km/h (12 MPH), use the CONSULT-II
27 Y/B sensor A/T (revo- 185 (Hz)
pulse frequency measuring function.
lution sensor) M
Selector lever in “P” position. Battery voltage
30 R/W PNP switch 1
Selector lever in “N” position. Less than 2.5V
Selector lever in “P” position. Battery voltage
31 OR PNP switch 2
Selector lever in “D” position. Less than 2.5V

– Battery voltage

33 G/R Power supply

– 0V

Revision: 2004 October AT-87 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Terminal Wire
Item Condition Data (Approx.)
No. color

PSB2 (ATF pres- When front brake solenoid valve OFF. Battery voltage
35 B/Y
sure switch 1) When When front brake solenoid valve ON. 0V
vehicle
When running at 50 km/h (31 MPH) in 4th gear with the
Turbine revolution cruises
36 L/Y closed throttle position signal OFF, use the CONSULT-II 1.3 (kHz)
sensor 1
pulse frequency measuring function.
Selector lever in “D” position. Battery voltage
38 SB PNP switch 3
Selector lever in “R” position. Less than 2.5V
Selector lever in “D” position. Less than 2.5V
39 BR PNP switch 4
Selector lever in “P” position. Battery voltage
40 Y/G DATA BIT1 – –
Selector lever in “R” position. 0V
Back-up lamp
41 R
relay Selector lever in other positions. Battery voltage

– Battery voltage

42 G/R Power supply

– 0V

When When running at 20 km/h (12 MPH) in 1st gear with the
Turbine revolution
45 PU vehicle closed throttle position signal OFF, use the CONSULT-II 1.3 (kHz)
sensor 2
cruises pulse frequency measuring function.
46 B Ground Always 0V

PNP switch 3 Selector lever in “D” position. Battery voltage

47 G/W
(monitor) Selector lever in “R” position. Less than 2.5V

PNP relay Selector lever in “N”, “ P” positions. Battery voltage

48 B/W
(Starter relay) Selector lever in other positions. 0V

Revision: 2004 October AT-88 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

CONSULT-II ACS004I1

A
After performing “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH CONSULT-II)” (Refer to AT-92 ), place check
marks for results on the AT-47, "DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET" . Reference pages are provided following the
items.
NOTICE: B
1. The CONSULT-II electrically displays shift timing and lock-up timing (that is operation timing of each sole-
noid).
Check for time difference between actual shift timing and the CONSULT-II display. If the difference is AT
noticeable, mechanical parts (except solenoids, sensors, etc.) may be malfunctioning. Check mechanical
parts using applicable diagnostic procedures.
2. Shift schedule (which implies gear position) displayed on CONSULT-II and that indicated in Service Man- D
ual may differ slightly. This occurs because of the following reasons:
– Actual shift schedule has more or less tolerance or allowance,
– Shift schedule indicated in Service Manual refers to the point where shifts start, and E
– Gear position displayed on CONSULT-II indicates the point where shifts are completed.
3. Display of solenoid valves on CONSULT-II changes at the start of shifting, while gear position is displayed
upon completion of shifting (which is computed by TCM). F
4. Additional CONSULT-II information can be found in the Operation Manual supplied with the CONSULT-II
unit.
FUNCTION G
Diagnostic test mode Function Reference page
Self-diagnostic results Self-diagnostic results can be read and erased quickly. AT-92 H
Data monitor Input/Output data in the ECM can be read. AT-95
CAN diagnostic support
The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. —
monitor I
Conducted by CONSULT-II instead of a technician to determine whether each system
Function test —
is “OK” or “NG”.
DTC work support Select the operating condition to confirm Diagnosis Trouble Codes. AT-98 J
ECM (ECU,TCM) part
ECM (ECU,TCM) part number can be read. —
number
K
CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE
Item name Condition Display value (Approx.)
VHCL/S SE·A/T Approximately matches the speedometer L
During driving
VHCL/S SE·MTR reading.

Released accelerator pedal. 0.0/8

ACCELE POSI M
Fully depressed accelerator pedal. 8/8
Released accelerator pedal. ON
CLSO THL POS
Fully depressed accelerator pedal. OFF
Fully depressed accelerator pedal. ON
W/O THL POS
Released accelerator pedal. OFF
Depressed brake pedal. ON
BRAKE SW
Released brake pedal. OFF
GEAR During driving 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
ENGINE SPEED Engine running Closely matches the tachometer reading.
TURBINE REV During driving (lock-up ON) Approximately matches the engine speed.
Approximately matches the output shaft
OUTPUT REV During driving
speed.
ATF TEMP SE 1 3.2 - 2.5 - 0.8 V
0°C (32° F) - 20°C (68°F) - 80°C (176°F)
ATF TEMP SE 2 3.2 - 2.4 - 0.65 V

Revision: 2004 October AT-89 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Item name Condition Display value (Approx.)

BATTERY VOLT (V) When turning ignition switch to ON. Battery voltage
Front brake solenoid valve operates. ON
ATF PRES SW 1
Other conditions OFF
Low coast brake solenoid valve operates. ON
ATF PRES SW 2
Other conditions OFF
Input clutch solenoid valve operates. OFF
ATF PRES SW 3
Other conditions ON
Direct clutch solenoid valve operates. OFF
ATF PRES SW 5
Other conditions ON
High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve
OFF
ATF PRES SW 6 operates.
Other conditions ON
When setting selector lever to “P” position. OFF
PNP SW 1
When setting selector lever to “N” position. ON
When setting selector lever to “P” position. OFF
PNP SW 2
When setting selector lever to “D” position. ON
When setting selector lever to “D” position. OFF
PNP SW 3
When setting selector lever to “R” position. ON
When setting selector lever to “P” position. OFF
PNP SW 4
When setting selector lever to “R” position. ON
When setting selector lever to “N” or “P” posi-
N·P
tion.
SLCT LVR POSI
When setting selector lever to “R” position. R
When setting selector lever to “D” position. D
Manual shift gate position (neutral) ON
MANU MODE SW
Other than the above OFF
Manual shift gate position OFF
NON M-MODE SW
Other than the above ON
Select lever: + side ON
UP SW LEVER
Other than the above OFF
Select lever: - side ON
DOWN SW LEVER
Other than the above OFF
When perform slip lock-up 0.2 - 0.4 A
TCC SOLENOID
When perform lock-up 0.4 - 0.6 A
LINE PRES SOL During driving 0.2 - 0.6 A
Front brake solenoid valve operates. 0.6 - 0.8 A
FR/B SOLENOID
Other conditions 0 - 0.05 A
Input clutch solenoid valve operates. 0.6 - 0.8 A
I/C SOLENOID
Other conditions 0 - 0.05 A
Direct clutch solenoid valve operates. 0.6 - 0.8 A
D/C SOLENOID
Other conditions 0 - 0.05 A
High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve
0.6 - 0.8 A
HLR/C SOL operates.
Other conditions 0 - 0.05 A

Revision: 2004 October AT-90 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Item name Condition Display value (Approx.)

A
Low coast brake solenoid valve operates. ON
ON OFF SOL
Other conditions OFF
Selector lever in “N”, “P” positions. ON B
STARTER RELAY
Selector lever in other positions. OFF
Approximately matches the speedometer
VEHICLE SPEED During driving
reading. AT
CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE
● For details, refer to the separate “CONSULT-II Operations Man-
ual”. D
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data
E
link connector, which is located in instrument lower panel on
driver side.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
F

PBIB0196E
G
4. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.

J
SAIA0450E

5. Touch “A/T”. K
If “A/T” is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link
Connector (DLC) Circuit" .
6. Perform each diagnostic test mode according to each service L
procedure.

SAT014K

Revision: 2004 October AT-91 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE

Operation Procedure
1. Perform “CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE”. Refer to AT-91, "CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE"
.
2. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
Display shows malfunction experienced since the last erasing
operation.

SCIA5304E

Display Items List

X: Applicable —: Not applicable
TCM self-diagnosis OBD-II (DTC)
MIL indicator
Items (CONSULT- A/T CHECK lamp*1,
Malfunction is detected when... “A/T” with
II screen terms) indicator “ENGINE” with
CONSULT-II
lamp CONSULT-II or
GST
CAN COMM CIR-
● When a malfunction is detected in CAN communications X U1000 U1000
CUIT
● If this signal is ON other than in “P” or “N” position, this is
STARTER RELAY/ judged to be a malfunction.
X P0615 —
CIRC (And if it is OFF in “P” or “N” position, this too is judged to
be a malfunction.)
● PNP switch 1-4 signals input with impossible pattern
● PNP switch 3 monitor terminal cut line
PNP SW/CIRC X P0705 P0705
● P position is detected from “ N” position without any other
position being detected in between.
● Signal from vehicle speed sensor A/T (Revolution sensor)
not input due to cut line or the like
VEH SPD SEN/
● Unexpected signal input during running
CIR AT (Revolution X P0720 P0720
sensor) ● After ignition switch is turned ON, unexpected signal input
from vehicle speed sensor MTR before the vehicle starts
moving
ENGINE SPEED ● TCM does not receive the CAN communication signal from
X P0725 —
SIG the ECM.
TCC SOLENOID/ ● Normal voltage not applied to solenoid due to cut line,
X P0740 P0740
CIRC short, or the like
● A/T cannot perform lock-up even if electrical circuit is good.
A/T TCC S/V
● TCM detects as irregular by comparing difference value X P0744 P0744*2
FNCTN
with slip rotation.
● Normal voltage not applied to solenoid due to cut line,
L/PRESS SOL/ short, or the like
X P0745 P0745
CIRC ● TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with
monitor value.

Revision: 2004 October AT-92 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

TCM self-diagnosis OBD-II (DTC)

A
MIL indicator
Items (CONSULT- A/T CHECK lamp*1,
Malfunction is detected when... “A/T” with
II screen terms) indicator “ENGINE” with
CONSULT-II
lamp CONSULT-II or B
GST
● When the power supply to the TCM is cut OFF, for example
because the battery is removed, and the self-diagnostics
AT
TCM-POWER memory function stops
— P1701 —
SUPPLY ● This is not a malfunction message (Whenever shutting
OFF a power supply to the TCM, this message appears on
the screen.) D
TCM·RAM ● TCM memory (RAM) is malfunctioning. — P1702 —
TCM·ROM ● TCM memory (ROM) is malfunctioning. — P1703 —
E
TCM·EEPROM ● TCM memory (EEP ROM) is malfunctioning. — P1704 —
● TCM does not receive the proper accelerator pedal position
TP SEN/CIRC A/T X P1705 —
signals (input by CAN communication) from ECM.
F
ATF TEMP SEN/ ● During running, the ATF temperature sensor signal voltage
X P1710 P0710
CIRC is excessively high or low
● TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the G
TURBINE REV S/ sensor.
X P1716 P1716
CIRC ● TCM detects an irregularity only at position of 4th gear for
turbine revolution sensor 2.
H
● Signal (CAN communication) from vehicle speed sensor
VEH SPD SE/ MTR not input due to cut line or the like — P1721 —
CIR·MTR
● Unexpected signal input during running
I
● Except during shift change, the gear position and ATF pres-
A/T INTERLOCK sure switch states are monitored and comparative judge- X P1730 P1730
ment made.
J
● Each ATF pressure switch and solenoid current is moni-
A/T 1ST E/BRAK- tored and if a pattern is detected having engine braking 1st
X P1731 —
ING gear other than in the M1 position, a malfunction is
detected. K
● Normal voltage not applied to solenoid due to functional
I/C SOLENOID/ malfunction, cut line, short, or the like
X P1752 P1752
CIRC ● TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with L
monitor value.
● TCM detects that actual gear ratio is irregular, and relation
between gear position and condition of ATF pressure M
switch 3 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal.
I/C SOLENOID (Other than during shift change) X P1754 P1754*2
FNCTN
● TCM detects that relation between gear position and condi-
tion of ATF pressure switch 3 is irregular during releasing
accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
● Normal voltage not applied to solenoid due to functional
FR/B SOLENOID/ malfunction, cut line, short, or the like
X P1757 P1757
CIRC ● TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with
monitor value.
● TCM detects that actual gear ratio is irregular, and relation
between gear position and condition of ATF pressure
switch 1 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal.
FR/B SOLENOID (Other than during shift change) X P1759 P1759*2
FNCTN
● TCM detects that relation between gear position and condi-
tion of ATF pressure switch 1 is irregular during releasing
accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)

Revision: 2004 October AT-93 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

TCM self-diagnosis OBD-II (DTC)

MIL indicator
Items (CONSULT- A/T CHECK lamp*1,
Malfunction is detected when... “A/T” with
II screen terms) indicator “ENGINE” with
CONSULT-II
lamp CONSULT-II or
GST
● Normal voltage not applied to solenoid due to cut line,
D/C SOLENOID/ short, or the like
X P1762 P1762
CIRC ● TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with
monitor value.
● TCM detects that actual gear ratio is irregular, and relation
between gear position and condition of ATF pressure
switch 5 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal.
D/C SOLENOID (Other than during shift change) X P1764 P1764*2
FNCTN
● TCM detects that relation between gear position and condi-
tion of ATF pressure switch 5 is irregular during releasing
accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
● Normal voltage not applied to solenoid due to functional
malfunction, cut line, short, or the like
HLR/C SOL/CIRC X P1767 P1767
● TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with
monitor value.
● TCM detects that actual gear ratio is irregular, and relation
between gear position and condition of ATF pressure
switch 6 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal.
HLR/C SOL (Other than during shift change) X P1769 P1769*2
FNCTN
● TCM detects that relation between gear position and condi-
tion of ATF pressure switch 6 is irregular during releasing
accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
LC/B SOLENOID/ ● Normal voltage not applied to solenoid due to functional
X P1772 P1772
CIRC malfunction, cut line, short, or the like
● TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to oper-
ate the solenoid valve.
LC/B SOLENOID
● Condition of ATF pressure switch 2 is different from monitor X P1774 P1774*2
FNCTN
value, and relation between gear position and actual gear
ratio is irregular.
MANU MODE SW/ ● When an impossible pattern of switch signals is detected, a
— P1815 —
CIRC malfunction is detected.
● TCM detects that actual gear ratio is normal, and relation
ATF PRES SW 1/ between gear position and condition of ATF pressure
— P1841 —
CIRC switch 1 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal.
(Other than during shift change)
● TCM detects that actual gear ratio is normal, and relation
ATF PRES SW 3/ between gear position and condition of ATF pressure
— P1843 —
CIRC switch 3 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal.
(Other than during shift change)
● TCM detects that actual gear ratio is normal, and relation
ATF PRES SW 5/ between gear position and condition of ATF pressure
— P1845 —
CIRC switch 5 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal.
(Other than during shift change)

Revision: 2004 October AT-94 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

TCM self-diagnosis OBD-II (DTC)

A
MIL indicator
Items (CONSULT- A/T CHECK lamp*1,
Malfunction is detected when... “A/T” with
II screen terms) indicator “ENGINE” with
CONSULT-II
lamp CONSULT-II or B
GST
● TCM detects that actual gear ratio is normal, and relation
ATF PRES SW 6/ between gear position and condition of ATF pressure
— P1846 — AT
CIRC switch 6 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal.
(Other than during shift change)
NO DTC IS
DETECTED FUR- D
THER TESTING ● No NG item has been detected. — X X
MAY BE
REQUIRED
E
*1: Refer to AT-42, "Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)" .
*2: These malfunctions cannot be displayed MIL if another malfunction is assigned to MIL.

DATA MONITOR MODE F

Operation Procedure
1. Perform “CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE”. Refer to AT-91, "CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE"
. G

2. Touch “DATA MONITOR”.

NOTE: H
When malfunction is detected, CONSULT-II performs
“REAL-TIME DIAGNOSIS”. Also, any malfunction detected
while in this mode will be displayed at real time.
I

SCIA5304E

Display Items List K

X: Standard —: Not applicable
Monitor Item Selection
SELEC-
L
Monitored item (Unit) ECU INPUT MAIN SIG- Remarks
TION FROM
SIGNALS NALS
MENU
VHCL/S SE·A/T (km/h) X X X Revolution sensor M
VHCL/S SE·MTR (km/h) X — X
ACCELE POSI (0.0/8) X — X Accelerator pedal position signal
Degree of opening for accelerator recog-
nized by the TCM
THROTTLE POSI (0.0/8) X X X
For fail-safe operation, the specific value
used for control is displayed.
CLSO THL POS (ON-OFF display) X — X Signal input with CAN communications
W/O THL POS (ON-OFF display) X — X Signal input with CAN communications
BRAKE SW (ON-OFF display) X — X Stop lamp switch
Gear position recognized by the TCM
GEAR — X X
updated after gear-shifting
ENGINE SPEED (rpm) X X X
TURBINE REV (rpm) X X X
OUTPUT REV (rpm) X X X

Revision: 2004 October AT-95 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Monitor Item Selection

Monitored item (Unit) SELEC- Remarks

ECU INPUT MAIN SIG-
TION FROM
SIGNALS NALS
MENU
GEAR RATIO — X X
Difference between engine speed and
TC SLIP SPEED (rpm) — X X
torque converter input shaft speed
F SUN GR REV (rpm) — — X
F CARR GR REV (rpm) — — X
ATF TEMP SE 1 (V) X — X
ATF TEMP SE 2 (V) X — X
ATF TEMP 1 (°C) — X X
ATF TEMP 2 (°C) — X X
BATTERY VOLT (V) X — X
ATF PRES SW 1 (ON-OFF display) X X X (for FR/B solenoid)
ATF PRES SW 2 (ON-OFF display) X X X (for LC/B solenoid)
ATF PRES SW 3 (ON-OFF display) X X X (for I/C solenoid)
ATF PRES SW 5 (ON-OFF display) X X X (for D/C solenoid)
ATF PRES SW 6 (ON-OFF display) X X X (for HLR/C solenoid)
PNP SW 1 (ON-OFF display) X — X
PNP SW 2 (ON-OFF display) X — X
PNP SW 3 (ON-OFF display) X — X
PNP SW 4 (ON-OFF display) X — X
1 POSITION SW (ON-OFF display) X — X
Selector lever position is recognized by
the TCM.
SLCT LVR POSI — X X
For fail safe operation, the specific value
used for control is displayed.
OD CONT SW (ON-OFF display) X — X
POWERSHIFT SW (ON-OFF display) X — X Not mounted but displayed.
HOLD SW (ON-OFF display) X — X
MANU MODE SW (ON-OFF display) X — X
NON M-MODE SW (ON-OFF display) X — X
UP SW LEVER (ON-OFF display) X — X
DOWN SW LEVER (ON-OFF display) X — X
SFT UP ST SW (ON-OFF display) — — X
Not mounted but displayed.
SFT DWN ST SW (ON-OFF display) — — X
ASCD-CRUISE (ON-OFF display) — — X
ASCD-OD CUT (ON-OFF display) — — X
ABS SIGNAL (ON-OFF display) — — X
ACC OD CUT (ON-OFF display) — — X
ACC SIGNAL (ON-OFF display) — — X
TCS SIGNAL 2 (ON-OFF display) — — X
TCS GR/P KEEP (ON-OFF display) — — X
TCS SIGNAL 1 (ON-OFF display) — — X
TCC SOLENOID (A) — X X
LINE PRES SOL (A) — X X

Revision: 2004 October AT-96 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Monitor Item Selection

A
Monitored item (Unit) SELEC- Remarks
ECU INPUT MAIN SIG-
TION FROM
SIGNALS NALS
MENU
I/C SOLENOID (A) — X X B
FR/B SOLENOID (A) — X X
D/C SOLENOID (A) — X X
AT
HLR/C SOL (A) — X X
ON OFF SOL (ON-OFF display) — — X LC/B solenoid
TCC SOL MON (A) — — X D
L/P SOL MON (A) — — X
I/C SOL MON (A) — — X
E
FR/B SOL MON (A) — — X
D/C SOL MON (A) — — X
HLR/C SOL MON (A) — — X F
ON OFF SOL MON (ON-OFF display) — — X LC/B solenoid
P POSI IND (ON-OFF display) — — X
R POSI IND (ON-OFF display) — — X
G

N POSI IND (ON-OFF display) — — X

D POSI IND (ON-OFF display) — — X H
4TH POSI IND (ON-OFF display) — — X
3RD POSI IND (ON-OFF display) — — X
2ND POSI IND (ON-OFF display) — — X I
1ST POSI IND (ON-OFF display) — — X
MANU MODE IND (ON-OFF display) — — X
J
POWER M LAMP (ON-OFF display) — — X
F-SAFE IND/L (ON-OFF display) — — X
ATF WARN LAMP (ON-OFF display) — — X K
BACK-UP LAMP (ON-OFF display) — — X
STARTER RELAY (ON-OFF display) — — X PNP relay
L
PNP SW3 MON (ON-OFF display) — — X
C/V CLB ID1 — — X
C/V CLB ID2 — — X M
C/V CLB ID3 — — X
UNIT CLB ID1 — — X
UNIT CLB ID2 — — X
UNIT CLB ID3 — — X
TRGT GR RATIO — — X
TRGT PRES TCC (kPa) — — X
TRGT PRES L/P (kPa) — — X
TRGT PRE FR/B (kPa) — — X
TRGT PRES I/C (kPa) — — X
TRGT PRES D/C (kPa) — — X
TRG PRE HLR/C (kPa) — — X
SHIFT PATTERN — — X
DRV CST JUDGE — — X

Revision: 2004 October AT-97 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Monitor Item Selection

Monitored item (Unit) SELEC- Remarks

ECU INPUT MAIN SIG-
TION FROM
SIGNALS NALS
MENU
START RLY MON (ON-OFF display) — — X PNP relay
NEXT GR POSI — — X
SHIFT MODE — — X
MANU GR POSI — — X
VEHICLE SPEED (km/h) — X X Vehicle speed recognized by the TCM.
Displays the value measured by the volt-
Voltage (V) — — X
age probe.
Frequency (Hz) — — X
DUTY·HI (%) — — X
The value measured by the pulse probe
DUTY·LOW (%) — — X
is displayed.
PLS WIDTH·HI (ms) — — X
PLS WIDTH·LOW (ms) — — X

DTC WORK SUPPORT MODE

Operation Procedure
1. Perform “CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE”. Refer to AT-91, "CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE"
.
2. Touch “DTC WORK SUPPORT”.

SCIA5304E

3. Touch select item menu.

SCIA0512E

4. Touch “START”.

SCIA5159E

Revision: 2004 October AT-98 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

5. Perform driving test according to “DTC CONFIRMATION PRO-

CEDURE” in “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”. A

AT

SCIA5160E
D
● When testing conditions are satisfied, CONSULT-II screen
changes from “OUT OF CONDITION” to “TESTING”.
E

G
SCIA5161E

6. Stop vehicle. H

SCIA5164E
K

● If “NG” appears on the screen, malfunction may exist. Go to

“Diagnostic Procedure”. L

SCIA5162E

7. Perform test drive to check gear shift feeling in accordance with

instructions displayed.
8. Touch “YES” or “NO”.
9. CONSULT-II procedure ended.

SCIA5163E

Revision: 2004 October AT-99 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

● If “NG” appears on the screen, malfunction may exist. Go to

“Diagnostic Procedure”.

SCIA5162E

Display Items List

DTC work support item Description Check item
I/C SOL FUNCTN CHECK* — —
FR/B SOL FUNCTN CHECK* — —
D/C SOL FUNCTN CHECK* — —
HLR/C SOL FUNCTN CHECK* — —
LC/B SOL FUNCTN CHECK* — —
Following items for “TCC solenoid function (lock-up) ” can be con-
firmed.
● TCC solenoid valve
TCC SOL FUNCTN CHECK ● Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being conducted
or not) ● Hydraulic control circuit

● Self-diagnosis result (OK or NG)

*: Do not use, but displayed.

HOW TO ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS (WITH CONSULT-II)

1. Perform “CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE”. Refer to AT-91, "CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE"
.
2. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.

SCIA5304E

3. Touch “ERASE”. (The self-diagnostic results will be erased.)

PCIA0061E

Revision: 2004 October AT-100 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT-II ACS004I2

OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH GST) A

Refer to EC-121, "Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function" .
OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS) B
Refer to EC-64, "Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)" .
TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)
AT
Description
In the unlikely event of a malfunction in the electrical system, when the ignition switch ON, the A/T CHECK
indicator lamp lights up for 2 seconds, then flashes for 8 seconds. If there is no malfunction, when the ignition
D
switch ON, the indicator lamp lights up for 2 seconds. As a method for locating the suspect circuit, when the
self-diagnostics start signal is input, the memory for the malfunction location is output and the A/T CHECK
indicator lamp flashes to display the corresponding DTC.
E
Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK A/T CHECK INDICATOR LAMP
F
1. Start the engine with selector lever in “P” position. Warm engine to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch ON and OFF at least twice, then leave it in OFF position.
3. Wait 10 seconds. G
4. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
Does A/T CHECK indicator lamp come on for about 2 seconds?
YES >> GO TO 2. H
NO >> GO TO AT-256, "A/T CHECK Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On" .

2. JUDGEMENT PROCEDURE STEP 1 I

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Push shift lock release button.
J
3. Move selector lever from “P” to “D” position.
4. Release accelerator pedal. (Set the closed throttle position signal ON.)
5. Depress brake pedal. (Brake switch signal ON.) K
6. Turn ignition switch ON.
7. Wait 3 seconds.
8. Move the selector lever to the Manual shift gate side. (Manual mode switch ON.) L
9. Release brake pedal. (Brake switch signal OFF.)
10. Move the selector lever to “D” position. (Manual mode switch OFF.)
11. Depress brake pedal. (Brake switch signal ON.) M
12. Release brake pedal. (Brake switch signal OFF.)
13. Depress accelerator pedal fully and release it.

>> GO TO 3.

3. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE

Check A/T CHECK indicator lamp.
Refer to AT-102, "Judgement Self-Diagnosis Code" .
If the system does not go into self-diagnostics. Refer to AT-250, "PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION, MANUAL
MODE, BRAKE AND THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT" .

>> DIAGNOSIS END

Revision: 2004 October AT-101 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Judgement Self-Diagnosis Code

If there is a malfunction, the lamp lights up for the time corresponding to the suspect circuit.

SCIA4758E

Erase Self-Diagnosis
● In order to make it easier to find the cause of hard-to-duplicate malfunctions, malfunction information is
stored into the control unit as necessary during use by the user. This memory is not erased no matter how
many times the ignition switch is turned ON and OFF.
● However, this information is erased by turning ignition switch OFF after executing self-diagnostics or by
erasing the memory using the CONSULT-II.

Revision: 2004 October AT-102 2004 M45

 DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE

DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE PFP:23710

A
Description ACS001A5

CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent malfunction detection ability. B
Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links
with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are con-
nected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission
with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. AT

On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS001A6

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. D

● Diagnostic trouble code “CAN COMM CIRCUIT” with CONSULT-II or U1000 without CONSULT-II is
detected when TCM cannot communicate to other control units.
E
Possible Cause ACS001A7

Harness or connectors
(CAN communication line is open or shorted.) F
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS001A8

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and G
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
H
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II.
I
3. Start engine and wait at least 6 seconds.
4. If DTC is detected, go to AT-105, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
J

SAT014K

WITH GST L
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”.

Revision: 2004 October AT-103 2004 M45

 DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE

Wiring Diagram — AT — CAN ACS001A9

TCWA0109E

Revision: 2004 October AT-104 2004 M45

 DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE

TCM terminals and data are reference value.

Terminal Wire A
Item Condition Data (Approx.)
No. color
6 L CAN H – –
7 R CAN L – – B

Diagnostic Procedure ACS001AA

1. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT AT

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and start engine. D
2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-
II.
Is any malfunction of the “CAN COMM CIRCUIT” indicated? E
YES >> Print out CONSULT-II screen, GO TO LAN section.
Refer to LAN-21, "CAN Communication Unit" .
NO >> INSPECTION END
F

G
PCIA0061E

Revision: 2004 October AT-105 2004 M45

 DTC P0615 START SIGNAL CIRCUIT

DTC P0615 START SIGNAL CIRCUIT PFP:25230

Description ACS001AB

Prohibits cranking other at “P” or “N” position.

CONSULT-II Reference Value ACS004P0

Item name Condition Display value

Selector lever in “N”, “P” positions. ON
STARTER RELAY
Selector lever in other positions. OFF

On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS001AC

● This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “STARTER RELAY/CIRC” with CONSULT-II or 14th judgement flicker without
CONSULT-II is detected when starter relay is switched ON other than at “P” or “N” position, or when
switched OFF at “P” or “N” position.
Possible Cause ACS001AD

● Harness or connectors
[The park/neutral position (PNP) relay and TCM circuit is open or shorted.]
● Park/neutral position (PNP) relay
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS001AE

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine.
4. Vehicle start for at least 2 consecutive seconds.
5. If DTC is detected, go to AT-108, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SAT014K

Revision: 2004 October AT-106 2004 M45

 DTC P0615 START SIGNAL CIRCUIT

Wiring Diagram — AT — STSIG ACS001AF

AT

TCWA0110E

Revision: 2004 October AT-107 2004 M45

 DTC P0615 START SIGNAL CIRCUIT

TCM terminal and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Terminal Wire
Item Condition Data (Approx.)
No. color

PNP relay Selector lever in “N”, “ P” positions. Battery voltage

48 B/W IGN ON
(Starter relay) Selector lever in other positions. 0V

Diagnostic Procedure ACS001AG

1. CHECK PNP RELAY

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “SELECTION FROM MENU” in “DATA MONITOR” mode
for “A/T” with CONSULT-II and check monitor “STARTER
RELAY” (PNP relay) ON/OFF.
Item name Condition Display value (Approx.)
Selector lever in “N”, “P”
ON
positions.
STARTER RELAY
Selector lever in other
OFF
positions.
PCIA0056E

Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch to ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Check the voltage between the TCM connector and ground.
Connector Terminal No. Voltage
Item Shift position
No. (Wire color) (Approx.)

PNP relay 48 N and P Battery voltage

F104 Ground
(Starter relay) (B/W) R and D 0V
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2. PCIA0060E

2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

Check the following items:
● PNP relay. Refer to PG-60, "STANDARDIZED RELAY" .
● Disconnections or short-circuits in the harness between TCM and the PNP relay
● Ground circuit for the PNP relay
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

3. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-106, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 4.

Revision: 2004 October AT-108 2004 M45

 DTC P0615 START SIGNAL CIRCUIT

4. CHECK TCM A
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-86, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG B
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
AT

Revision: 2004 October AT-109 2004 M45

 DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH

DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH PFP:32006

Description ACS00477

● The park/neutral position (PNP) switch includes a transmission position switch.

● The transmission range switch detects the selector lever position and sends a signal to the TCM.
CONSULT-II Reference Value ACS004P1

Item name Condition Display value

When setting selector lever to “P” position. OFF
PNP SW 1
When setting selector lever to“ N” position. ON
When setting selector lever to “P” position. OFF
PNP SW 2
When setting selector lever to “D” position. ON
When setting selector lever to “D” position. OFF
PNP SW 3
When setting selector lever to “R” position. ON
When setting selector lever to “P” position. OFF
PNP SW 4
When setting selector lever to “R” position. ON
When setting selector lever to “N” or “P” position. N·P
SLCT LVR POSI When setting selector lever to “R” position. R
When setting selector lever to “D” position. D

On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS004P5

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “PNP SW/CIRC” with CONSULT-II or P0705 without CONSULT-II is detected
under the following conditions.
– When TCM does not receive the correct voltage signal from the PNP switch 1, 2, 3, 4 based on the gear
position.
– When monitor terminal of PNP switch 3 is disconnected.
– When no other position but “P” position is detected from “N” position.
Possible Cause ACS004P6

● Harness or connectors
[The park/neutral position (PNP) switch 1, 2, 3, 4 and TCM circuit is open or shorted.]
● Park/neutral position (PNP) switch 1, 2, 3, 4
● Park/neutral position (PNP) switch 3 monitor terminal disconnected
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS004P7

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.

Revision: 2004 October AT-110 2004 M45

 DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH

WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) A
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine.
B
4. Maintain the following conditions for at least 2 consecutive sec-
onds.
THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.2V
5. If DTC is detected, go to AT-113, "Diagnostic Procedure" . AT

SAT014K
D

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. E

Revision: 2004 October AT-111 2004 M45

 DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH

Wiring Diagram — AT — PNP/SW ACS004P8

TCWA0111E

Revision: 2004 October AT-112 2004 M45

 DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH

TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Terminal No. Wire color Item Condition Data (Approx.) A
Selector lever in “P” position. Battery voltage
30 R/W PNP switch 1
Selector lever in “N” position. Less than 2.5V
B
Selector lever in “P” position. Battery voltage
31 OR PNP switch 2
Selector lever in “D” position. Less than 2.5V
Selector lever in “D” position. Battery voltage AT
38 SB PNP switch 3 IGN ON
Selector lever in “R” position. Less than 2.5V
Selector lever in “D” position. Less than 2.5V
39 BR PNP switch 4
Selector lever in “P” position. Battery voltage D

PNP switch 3 Selector lever in “D” position. Battery voltage

47 G/W
(monitor) Selector lever in “R” position. Less than 2.5V
E
Diagnostic Procedure ACS004P9

1. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT F

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” G
with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out “N·P”, “R” and “D” position switches moving selector
lever to each position. H

Item name Condition Display value (Approx.)

When setting selector I
lever to “N” or “P” posi- N·P
tion.
PCIA0034E
SLCT LVR POSI When setting selector
R J
lever to “R” position.
When setting selector
D
lever to “D” position.
K

Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) L
2. Selector lever to “P“, “R”, “N”, or “D” position to check the volt-
age between the TCM connector terminals and ground.
Connector No. F104
M
Shift Terminal No. (Wire color)
position
30 (R/W) - 31 (OR) - 38 (SB) - 39 (BR) -
Ground Ground Ground Ground
P Battery voltage Battery voltage – Battery voltage
R – – Less than 2.5V – PCIA0035E

N Less than 2.5V – – –

D – Less than 2.5V Battery voltage Less than 2.5V
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.

Revision: 2004 October AT-113 2004 M45

 DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH

2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

Check the following items.
● Disconnection or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and A/T unit harness connector.
● PNP switch. Refer to AT-115, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector
and control valve assembly harness connector.
Terminal No.
Item Connector No. Continuity
(Wire color)
A/T unit assembly har-
F28
ness connector
1 (G/B) Yes
Control valve assembly
F302
harness connector
A/T unit assembly har-
F28
ness connector SCIA3063E
2 (G/W) Yes
Control valve assembly
F302
harness connector
A/T unit assembly har-
F28
ness connector
3 (G/R) Yes
Control valve assembly
F302
harness connector
A/T unit assembly har-
F28
ness connector
4 (Y/R) Yes
Control valve assembly
F302
harness connector
A/T unit assembly har-
F28
ness connector
5 (L/Y) Yes
Control valve assembly
F302
harness connector
4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
5. Reinstall any part removed.
OK or NG
OK >> Replace control valve assembly. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-110, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 5.

Revision: 2004 October AT-114 2004 M45

 DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH

5. CHECK TCM A
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-86, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG B
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
AT
Component Inspection ACS004PA

PNP SWITCH
1. Selector lever to various positions to check the continuity D
between terminals on the PNP switch and ground.
Terminal No.
PNP SW Shift position Connector No. Continuity
(Wire color) E
SW 1 1 (G/W) - Ground
P
SW 2 2 (W/L) - Ground No
SW 3 F302 3 (W/Y) - Ground F
D
SW 4 4 (GY) - Ground
Yes
SW 3 Monitor P, R, N, D 3 (W/Y) - 5 (W/R) SCIA3062E
G
2. If NG, check the continuity with the control linkage disconnected. (Refer to Step 1 above.)
3. If OK with the control linkage disconnected, adjust the control linkage. Refer to AT-305, "Adjustment of A/
T Position" . H
4. If NG even when the control linkage is disconnected, replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-312,
"Control Valve Assembly" .
I

Revision: 2004 October AT-115 2004 M45

 DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)

DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) PFP:32702

Description ACS0047E

The revolution sensor detects the revolution of the idler gear parking pawl lock gear and emits a pulse signal.
The pulse signal is sent to the TCM which converts it into vehicle speed.
CONSULT-II Reference Value ACS004P4

Item name Condition Display value

Approximately matches the speedometer
VHCL/S SE·A/T During driving
reading.

On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS0047F

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT” with CONSULT-II or P0720 without CONSULT-II is
detected under the following conditions.
– When TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the sensor.
– After ignition switch ON, irregular signal input from vehicle speed sensor MTR before the vehicle starts
moving.
Possible Cause ACS0047G

● Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
● Revolution sensor
● Vehicle speed sensor MTR
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS0047H

CAUTION:
● Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
● Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Check for an increase of “VHCL/S SE·A/T” value in response to
“VHCL/S SE·MTR” value.
If the check result is NG, go to AT-118, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If the check result is OK, go to following step.
4. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II.
5. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 5
consecutive seconds.
VHCL SPEED SE: 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more SAT014K
THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.0/8
Selector lever: “D” position
If the check result is NG, go to AT-118, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If the check result is OK, go to following step.
6. Maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds.
ENGINE SPEED: 3,500 rpm or more
THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.0/8
Selector lever: “D” position
If the check result is NG, go to AT-118, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.

Revision: 2004 October AT-116 2004 M45

 DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)

Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSA/T ACS0047I

AT

TCWA0112E

Revision: 2004 October AT-117 2004 M45

 DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)

TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Terminal Wire
Item Condition Data (Approx.)
No. color

Power supply IGN ON – Battery voltage

12 Y/R
(out) IGN OFF – 0V
Vehicle speed When
When running at 20 km/h (12MPH), use the CONSULT-II
27 Y/B sensor A/T (revo- vehicle 185 (Hz)
pulse frequency measuring function.
lution sensor) cruises

Diagnostic Procedure ACS0047J

1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Start the engine.
4. Read out the value of “VHCL/S SE·A/T” while driving.
Check the value changes according to driving speed.
Item name Condition Display value
Approximately matches
VHCL/S SE·A/T During driving
the speedometer reading.
PCIA0033E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK REVOLUTION SENSOR

With CONSULT-II
1. Start the engine.
2. Check the pulse when vehicle cruises.
Connector Terminal No. Data
Condition
No. (Wire color) (Approx.)
When running at 20 km/h (12 MPH), use
the CONSULT-II pulse frequency mea-
suring function. F104 27 (Y/B) 185 (Hz)
CAUTION:
Connect the data link connector to the
vehicle-side diagnosis connector.
PCIA0018E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 3.

Revision: 2004 October AT-118 2004 M45

 DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)

3. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND A/T UNIT ASSEMBLY HARNESS CONNECTOR A
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect TCM connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector B
and TCM connector.
Terminal No.
Item Connector No. Continuity AT
(Wire color)
TCM F103 12 (Y/R)
A/T unit assembly harness Yes
F26 1 (Y/R) D
connector
TCM F104 27 (Y/B)
A/T unit assembly harness Yes E
F26 10 (Y/B)
connector
4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
5. Reinstall any part removed. F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power G
in harness or connectors.

SCIA3339E

I
4. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY
1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector. J
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector
and control valve assembly harness connector.
K
Terminal No.
Item Connector No. Continuity
(Wire color)
A/T unit assembly har- L
F26 1 (B)
ness connector
Yes
Control valve assem-
F302 8 (B)
bly harness connector
M
A/T unit assembly har-
F26 10 (R/Y)
ness connector SCIA3064E
Yes
Control valve assem-
F302 9 (R/Y)
bly harness connector

4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.

5. Reinstall any part removed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

Revision: 2004 October AT-119 2004 M45

 DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)

5. DETECT MALFUNCTION ITEMS

1. Check control valve assembly. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-342, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check revolution sensor. Refer to AT-342, "DISASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

6. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-116, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 7.

7. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-86, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2004 October AT-120 2004 M45

 DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL

DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL PFP:24825

A
Description ACS001AU

The engine speed signal is sent from the ECM to the TCM.
B
CONSULT-II Reference Value ACS004P2

Item name Condition Display value

ENGINE SPEED Engine running Closely matches the tachometer reading. AT

On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS001AV

● This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. D

● Diagnostic trouble code “ENGINE SPEED SIG” with CONSULT-II or 16th judgement flicker without CON-
SULT-II is detected when TCM does not receive the ignition signal from ECM during engine cranking or
running. E
Possible Cause ACS001AW

Harness or connectors
F
(The ECM to the TCM circuit is open or shorted.)
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS001AX

CAUTION: G
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and H
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II I
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“A/T” with CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 10 J
consecutive seconds.
VHCL SPEED SE: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more
ACCELE POSI: More than 1/8 K
Selector lever: “D” position
3. If DTC is detected, go to AT-122, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
L
SAT014K

Revision: 2004 October AT-121 2004 M45

 DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL

Diagnostic Procedure ACS001AY

1. CHECK DTC WITH ECM

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch to ON position. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “ENGINE” with CON-
SULT-II. Refer to EC-108, "CONSULT-II Function (ENGINE)" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Check the DTC detected item, go to EC-108, "CON-
SULT-II Function (ENGINE)" .
● If CAN communication line is detected, go to AT-103,
"DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
SAT014K

2. CHECK DTC WITH TCM

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T”
with CONSULT-II.
3. While monitoring engine speed, check for engine speed change
corresponding to wide-open throttle position signal.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Check the ignition signal circuit.
● Refer to EC-649, "IGNITION SIGNAL" .
PCIA0041E

3. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-121, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 4.

4. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-86, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2004 October AT-122 2004 M45

 DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE PFP:31940

A
Description ACS0047K

● The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is activated, with the gear in D3 , D4 , D5 , M4 and M5 by the
TCM in response to signals sent from the vehicle speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor B
(throttle position sensor). Torque converter clutch piston operation will then be controlled.
● Lock-up operation, however, is prohibited when A/T fluid temperature is too low.
● When the accelerator pedal is depressed (less than 1/8) in lock-up condition, the engine speed should not AT
change abruptly. If there is a big jump in engine speed, there is no lock-up.
CONSULT-II Reference Value ACS0047L

D
Item name Condition Display value (Approx.)
When perform slip lock-up 0.2 - 0.4A
TCC SOLENOID
When perform lock-up 0.4 - 0.6A E

On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS0047M

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. F

● Diagnostic trouble code “TCC SOLENOID/CIRC” with CONSULT-II or P0740 without CONSULT-II is
detected under the following conditions.
– When TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve. G
– When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value.
Possible Cause ACS0047N
H
● Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
● Harness or connectors
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.) I
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS0047O

CAUTION: J
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. K
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II L
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 M
consecutive seconds.
VHCL SPEED SE: 80 km/h (50 MPH) or more
ACCELE POS: 0.5/8 - 1.0/8
SELECTOR LEVER: “D” position
4. If DTC is detected go to AT-125, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SAT014K

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.

Revision: 2004 October AT-123 2004 M45

 DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

Wiring Diagram — AT — TCV ACS0047P

TCWA0113E

Revision: 2004 October AT-124 2004 M45

 DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

TCM terminal and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Terminal Wire A
Item Condition Data (Approx.)
No. color
When When lock-up More than 2V
TCC solenoid
20 Y vehicle
valve When not lock-up 0V B
cruises

Diagnostic Procedure ACS0047Q

1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS AT

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine. D
2. Select “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out the value of “TCC SOLENOID” while driving.
E
Check the value changes according to driving speed.
Item name Condition Display value (Approx.)
When perform slip lock- F
0.2 - 0.4A
TCC SOLENOID up
When perform lock-up 0.4 - 0.6A
G

H
SCIA4462E

Without CONSULT-II
I
1. Start engine.
2. Check voltage between TCM connector and ground.
Connec- Terminal Data
J
Item Condition
tor No. No. (Approx.)
More than
TCC sole- 20 (Y) - When lock-up
F103 2V K
noid valve Ground
When not lock-up 0V

OK or NG
L
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 2.
SCIA4464E

M
2. CHECK TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector at the trans-
mission right side.
3. Check the resistance between terminal and ground.

Solenoid valve Connector No. Terminal No. Resistance (Approx.)

Torque converter clutch
F27 8 - Ground 3-9Ω
solenoid valve
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 3. SCIA1830E

Revision: 2004 October AT-125 2004 M45

 DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector
and control valve assembly harness connector.
Item Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) Continuity
A/T unit assembly
F27 8 (R/B)
harness connector
Control valve assem- Yes
bly harness connec- F301 11 (R/B)
tor
4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
5. Reinstall any part removed. SCIA3060E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE

Check valve resistance
● Refer to AT-127, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .

5. CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect TCM connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector
and TCM connector.
Item Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) Continuity
TCM F103 20 (Y)
A/T unit assembly Yes
F27 8 (Y)
harness connector

4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. SCIA1831E

5. Reinstall any part removed.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

6. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-123, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 7.

Revision: 2004 October AT-126 2004 M45

 DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

7. CHECK TCM A
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-86, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG B
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
AT
Component Inspection ACS0047R

TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

Resistance Check D
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .
3. Disconnect control valve assembly harness connector. E
4. Check resistance between terminal and ground.
Terminal No. Resistance
Solenoid Valve Connector No. F
(Wire color) (Approx.)
Torque converter clutch
F301 11 (BR) - Ground 3-9Ω
solenoid valve
G
5. If NG, replace control valve assembly. Refer to AT-312, "Control
Valve Assembly" .
H
SCIA3061E

Operation Check
I
● Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while
applying battery voltage to the terminal 11 and ground.
J

L
SCIA3105E

Revision: 2004 October AT-127 2004 M45

 DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP)

DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP) PFP:31940

Description ACS0047S

This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into 5th gear position or the torque converter clutch
does not lock-up as instructed by the TCM. This is not only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or
shorted) but also by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation,
etc.
CONSULT-II Reference Value ACS004P3

Item name Condition Display value (Approx.)

When perform slip lock-up 0.2 - 0.4A
TCC SOLENOID
When perform lock-up 0.4 - 0.6A

On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS0047T

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “A/T TCC S/V FNCTN” with CONSULT-II or P0744 without CONSULT-II is
detected under the following conditions.
– When A/T cannot perform lock-up even if electrical circuit is good.
– When TCM detects as irregular by comparing difference value with slip rotation.
Possible Cause ACS0047U

● Harness or connectors
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
● Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
● Hydraulic control circuit
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS0047V

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and select “TCC S/V FNCTN CHECK” of “DTC
WORK SUPPORT” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II and touch
“START”.
2. Accelerate vehicle to more than 80 km/h (50 MPH) and maintain
the following condition continuously until “TESTING” has turned
to “COMPLETE”. (It will take approximately 30 seconds after
“TESTING” shows.)
ACCELE POSI: More than 1.0/8 (at all times during step 4)
TCC SOLENOID: 0.4 - 0.6 A
Selector lever: “D” position
[Reference speed: Constant speed of more than 80 km/h (50 SAT014K
MPH)]
– Check that “GEAR” shows “5”.
– For shift schedule, refer to AT-62, "Vehicle Speed When Performing and Releasing Complete Lock-
Up" .
– If “TESTING” does not appear on CONSULT-II for a long time, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. In
case a 1st trip DTC other than P0744 is shown, refer to applicable “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
DTC”.
3. Make sure that “OK” is displayed. (If “NG” is displayed, refer to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”.)
Refer to AT-131, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Refer to shift schedule, AT-62, "Vehicle Speed When Performing and Releasing Complete Lock-Up" .

Revision: 2004 October AT-128 2004 M45

 DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP)

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. A

AT

Revision: 2004 October AT-129 2004 M45

 DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP)

Wiring Diagram — AT — TCCSIG ACS0047W

TCWA0114E

Revision: 2004 October AT-130 2004 M45

 DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP)

TCM terminal and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Terminal Wire A
Item Condition Data (Approx.)
No. color
When When lock-up More than 2V
TCC solenoid
20 Y vehicle
valve When not lock-up 0V B
cruises

Diagnostic Procedure ACS0047X

1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS AT

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine. D
2. Select “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out the value of “TCC SOLENOID” while driving.
E
Check the value changes according to driving speed.
Item name Condition Display value (Approx.)
When perform slip lock- F
0.2 - 0.4A
TCC SOLENOID up
When perform lock-up 0.4 - 0.6A
G

H
SCIA4462E

Without CONSULT-II
I
1. Start engine.
2. Check voltage between TCM connector and ground.
Connec- Terminal Data
J
Item Condition
tor No. No. (Approx.)
More than
TCC sole- 20 (Y) - When lock-up
F103 2V K
noid valve Ground
When not lock-up 0V

OK or NG
L
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 2.
SCIA4464E

M
2. CHECK TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector at the trans-
mission right side.
3. Check the resistance between terminal and ground.

Solenoid valve Connector No. Terminal No. Resistance (Approx.)

Torque converter clutch
F27 8 - Ground 3-9Ω
solenoid valve
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 3. SCIA1830E

Revision: 2004 October AT-131 2004 M45

 DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP)

3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector
and control valve assembly harness connector.
Item Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) Continuity
A/T unit assembly har-
F27 8 (R/B)
ness connector
Yes
Control valve assem-
F301 11 (R/B)
bly harness connector
4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
5. Reinstall any part removed.
SCIA3060E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE

Check valve resistance
● Refer to AT-133, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .

5. CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect TCM connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector
and TCM connector.
Item Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) Continuity
TCM F103 20 (Y)
A/T unit assembly Yes
F27 8 (Y)
harness connector

4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. SCIA1831E

5. Reinstall any part removed.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

6. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-123, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 7.

Revision: 2004 October AT-132 2004 M45

 DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP)

7. CHECK TCM A
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-86, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG B
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
AT
Component Inspection ACS0047Y

TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

Resistance Check D
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .
3. Disconnect control valve assembly harness connector. E
4. Check resistance between terminal and ground.
Terminal No. Resistance
Solenoid Valve Connector No. F
(Wire color) (Approx.)
Torque converter clutch
F301 11 (BR) - Ground 3-9Ω
solenoid valve
G
5. If NG, replace control valve assembly. Refer to AT-312, "Control
Valve Assembly" .
H
SCIA3061E

Operation Check
I
● Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while
applying battery voltage to the terminal 11 and ground.
J

L
SCIA3105E

Revision: 2004 October AT-133 2004 M45

 DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE

DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE PFP:31940

Description ACS0047Z

The line pressure solenoid valve regulates the oil pump discharge pressure to suit the driving condition in
response to a signal sent from the TCM.
The line pressure duty cycle value is not consistent when the closed throttle position signal is ON. To
confirm the line pressure duty cycle at low pressure, the accelerator (throttle) should be open until the
closed throttle position signal is OFF.
CONSULT-II Reference Value ACS004PF

Item name Condition Display value (Approx.)

LINE PRES SOL During driving 0.2 - 0.6 A

On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS00480

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “L/PRESS SOL/CIRC” with CONSULT-II or P0745 without CONSULT-II is
detected under the following conditions.
– When TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve.
– When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value.
Possible Cause ACS00481

● Harness or connectors
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
● Line pressure solenoid valve
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS00482

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“ENGINE” with CONSULT-II.
2. Engine start and wait at least 5 second.
3. If DTC is detected, go to “AT-136, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SAT014K

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.

Revision: 2004 October AT-134 2004 M45

 DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE

Wiring Diagram — AT — LPSV ACS00483

AT

TCWA0115E

Revision: 2004 October AT-135 2004 M45

 DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE

TCM terminal and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Terminal Wire
Item Condition Data (Approx.)
No. color
After warming up the engine, release your foot from the
2.0V
Line pressure accelerator pedal.
1 B/Y IGN ON
solenoid valve After warming up the engine, press the accelerator pedal
0.7V
all the way down.

Diagnostic Procedure ACS00484

1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out the value of “LINE PRES SOL” while driving.
Item name Condition Display value (Approx.)
LINE PRES SOL During driving 0.2 - 0.6 A

SCIA4462E

Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Check voltage between TCM connector and ground.
Con-
Terminal Data
Item nector Condition
No. (Approx.)
No.
After warming up the
engine, release your
2.0V
Line foot from the accelera-
pressure 1 (B/Y) - IGN tor pedal.
F103
solenoid Ground ON After warming up the
valve engine, press the
0.7V SCIA3462E
accelerator pedal all
the way down.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 2.

Revision: 2004 October AT-136 2004 M45

 DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE

2. CHECK LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT A

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector at the trans-
mission right side. B
3. Check the resistance between terminal and ground.

Resistance AT
Solenoid valve Connector No. Terminal No.
(Approx.)
Line pressure solenoid
F27 7 - Ground 3-9Ω
valve
D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. SCIA1833E
NG >> GO TO 3. E

3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" . F
2. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector
and control valve assembly harness connector. G

Item Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) Continuity

A/T unit assembly
F27 7 (R/G)
H
harness connector
Control valve assem- Yes
bly harness connec- F301 10 (R/G)
I
tor
4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
5. Reinstall any part removed. SCIA3065E
J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. K

4. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE

Check valve resistance L
● Refer to AT-138, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
M
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .

Revision: 2004 October AT-137 2004 M45

 DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE

5. CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect TCM connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector
and TCM connector.
Terminal No.
Item Connector No. Continuity
(Wire color)
TCM F103 1 (B/Y)
A/T unit assembly harness Yes
F27 7 (B/Y)
connector
SCIA1834E
4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
5. Reinstall any part removed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

6. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-134, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 7.

7. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-86, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Component Inspection ACS00485

LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE

Resistance Check
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .
3. Disconnect control valve assembly harness connector.
4. Check resistance between terminal and ground.
Terminal No. Resistance
Solenoid Valve Connector No.
(Wire color) (Approx.)
Line pressure solenoid 10 (OR) -
F301 3-9Ω
valve Ground
5. If NG, replace control valve assembly. Refer to AT-312, "Control
Valve Assembly" .

SCIA3066E

Revision: 2004 October AT-138 2004 M45

 DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE

Operation Check
● Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while A
applying battery voltage to the terminal 10 and ground.

AT

SCIA3067E
D

Revision: 2004 October AT-139 2004 M45

 DTC P1701 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (POWER SUPPLY)

DTC P1701 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (POWER SUPPLY) PFP:31036

Description ACS001BH

When the power supply to the TCM is cut OFF, for example because the battery is removed, and the self-diag-
nostics memory function stops, malfunction is detected.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS001BI

● This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “TCM-POWER SUPPLY” with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM does not
receive the voltage signal from the battery power supply.
● This is not a malfunction message. (Whenever shutting OFF a power supply to the TCM, this message
appears on the screen.)
Possible Cause ACS001BJ

Harness or connectors
(Battery or ignition switch and TCM circuit is open or shorted.)
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS001BK

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Wait at least 2 consecutive seconds.
4. If DTC is detected, go to AT-144, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SAT014K

Revision: 2004 October AT-140 2004 M45

 DTC P1701 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (POWER SUPPLY)

Wiring Diagram — AT — POWER ACS001BL

AT

TCWA0116E

Revision: 2004 October AT-141 2004 M45

 DTC P1701 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (POWER SUPPLY)

TCWA0117E

Revision: 2004 October AT-142 2004 M45

 DTC P1701 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (POWER SUPPLY)

AT

TCWA0118E

Revision: 2004 October AT-143 2004 M45

 DTC P1701 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (POWER SUPPLY)

TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Terminal Wire
Item Condition Data (Approx.)
No. color

Power supply (A/T IGN ON – Battery voltage

2 W
PV IGN relay) IGN OFF Measure 3 seconds after switching OFF the ignition switch. 0V

Power supply (A/T IGN ON – Battery voltage

3 W
PV IGN relay) IGN OFF Measure 3 seconds after switching OFF the ignition switch. 0V
5 B Ground Always 0V
Power supply
9 W/B Always Battery voltage
(Memory back-up)

Power supply IGN ON – Battery voltage

12 Y/R
(out) IGN OFF – 0V
14 B Ground Always 0V
24 B Ground Always 0V
IGN ON – Battery voltage
33 G/R Power supply
IGN OFF – 0V
IGN ON – Battery voltage
42 G/R Power supply
IGN OFF – 0V
46 B Ground Always 0V

Diagnostic Procedure ACS001BM

1. CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE, STEP 1

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check voltage between TCM terminal and ground.
Terminal No.
Item Connector No. Voltage
(Wire color)
TCM F103 9 (W/B) - Ground Battery voltage

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 3.
SCIA1163E

2. CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE, STEP 2

1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between TCM terminal and ground.
Terminal No.
Item Connector No. Voltage
(Wire color)
2 (W) - Ground
3 (W) - Ground
F103
9 (W/B) - Ground
TCM Battery voltage
12 (Y/R) - Ground
33 (G/R) - Ground PCIA0063E
F104
42 (G/R) - Ground

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.

Revision: 2004 October AT-144 2004 M45

 DTC P1701 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (POWER SUPPLY)

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM A

Check the following items:
● Harness for short or open between battery and TCM terminal 9
● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and TCM terminals 2, 3, 33 and 42 B
● 10A fuse [No. 32 or 35, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
● Ignition switch. Refer to PG-2, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" .
AT
● A/T PV IGN relay. Refer to AT-145, "Component Inspection" .
● ECM relay. Refer to PG-2, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" .
OK or NG D
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
E
4. CHECK TCM GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect TCM harness connector. F
3. Check continuity between TCM terminals 5 (B), 14 (B), 24 (B),
46 (B) and ground.
Continuity should exist. G

If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG H
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors. I
SCIA1161E

5. CHECK DTC J

Check again. Refer to AT-140, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .

OK or NG K
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 6.
L
6. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-86, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. M
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Component Inspection ACS002L0

A/T PV IGN RELAY

1. Apply 12V direct current between A/T PV IGN relay terminals 1
and 2.
2. Check continuity between relay terminals 3 and 5.
Condition Continuity
12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 Yes
OFF No
3. If NG, replace A/T PV IGN relay.

SCIA1245E

Revision: 2004 October AT-145 2004 M45

 DTC P1702 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (RAM)

DTC P1702 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (RAM) PFP:31036

Description ACS001BO

The TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal

input and output and for power supply. The TCM controls the A/T.

SCIA1287E

On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS001BP

● This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “TCM·RAM” with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM memory RAM is malfunc-
tioning.
Possible Cause ACS001BQ

TCM
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS001BR

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for A/T with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine.
4. Run engine for at least 2 consecutive seconds at idle speed.
5. If DTC is detected, go to AT-147, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SAT014K

Revision: 2004 October AT-146 2004 M45

 DTC P1702 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (RAM)

Diagnostic Procedure ACS001BS

1. CHECK DTC A

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) B
2. Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-
II.
3. Touch “ERASE”. AT
4. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
5. Perform DTC confirmation procedure, AT-146, "DTC Confirma-
D
tion Procedure" .
Is the “TCM·RAM” displayed again?
YES >> Replace TCM. E
NO >> INSPECTION END SCIA5304E

Revision: 2004 October AT-147 2004 M45

 DTC P1703 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (ROM)

DTC P1703 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (ROM) PFP:31036

Description ACS001BT

The TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal

input and output and for power supply. The TCM controls the A/T.

SCIA1287E

On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS001BU

● This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “TCM·ROM” with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM memory ROM is malfunc-
tioning.
Possible Cause ACS001BV

TCM
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS001BW

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for A/T with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine.
4. Run engine for at least 2 consecutive seconds at idle speed.
5. If DTC is detected, go to AT-149, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SAT014K

Revision: 2004 October AT-148 2004 M45

 DTC P1703 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (ROM)

Diagnostic Procedure ACS001BX

1. CHECK DTC A

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) B
2. Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-
II.
3. Touch “ERASE”. AT
4. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
5. Perform DTC confirmation procedure, AT-148, "DTC Confirma-
D
tion Procedure" .
Is the “TCM·ROM” displayed again?
YES >> Replace TCM. E
NO >> INSPECTION END SCIA5304E

Revision: 2004 October AT-149 2004 M45

 DTC P1704 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (EEPROM)

DTC P1704 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (EEPROM) PFP:31036

Description ACS001BY

The TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal

input and output and for power supply. The TCM controls the A/T.

SCIA1287E

On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS001BZ

● This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “TCM·EEPROM” with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM memory EEPROM is
malfunctioning.
Possible Cause ACS001C0

TCM
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS001C1

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for A/T with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine.
4. Run engine for at least 2 consecutive seconds at idle speed.
5. If DTC is detected, go to AT-151, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SAT014K

Revision: 2004 October AT-150 2004 M45

 DTC P1704 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (EEPROM)

Diagnostic Procedure ACS001C2

1. CHECK DTC A

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF DIAGNOSIS” mode B
for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
2. Move selector lever to “R” position.
3. Depress accelerator pedal (Full throttle position). AT
4. Touch “ERASE”.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
D
6. Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-150, "DTC
Confirmation Procedure" .
Is the “TCM·EEPROM” displayed again? E
YES >> Replace TCM. SCIA5304E

NO >> INSPECTION END

F

Revision: 2004 October AT-151 2004 M45

 DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR PFP:22620

Description ACS001C3

Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, accelerator pedal position sensor, throttle
position sensor, etc. The actuator sends a signal to the ECM, and ECM sends signals to TCM with CAN com-
munication.
CONSULT-II Reference Value ACS004PC

Item name Condition Display value (Approx.)

Released accelerator pedal. 0.0/8
ACCELE POSI
Fully depressed accelerator pedal. 8/8

On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS001C4

● This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “TP SEN/CIRC A/T” with CONSULT-II or 15th judgement flicker without CON-
SULT-II is detected when TCM does not receive the proper accelerator pedal position signals (input by
CAN communication) from ECM.
Possible Cause ACS001C5

Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS001C6

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
4. If DTC is detected, go to “AT-153, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SAT014K

Revision: 2004 October AT-152 2004 M45

 DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

Diagnostic Procedure ACS001C7

1. CHECK DTC WITH ECM A

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) B
2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “ENGINE” with CON-
SULT-II. Refer to EC-108, "CONSULT-II Function (ENGINE)" .
OK or NG AT
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Check the DTC detected [Link] to EC-108, "CON-
SULT-II Function (ENGINE)" . D
● If CAN communication line is detected, go to AT-103,
"DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
E
SAT014K

2. CHECK DTC WITH TCM

F
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for G
“A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Depress accelerator pedal and read out the value of “ACCLE
POS”. H
Check engine speed changes according to throttle position.
4. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-
II. Refer to AT-92, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" . I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. PCIA0070E
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. J
3. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-152, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . K
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 4. L

4. CHECK TCM
M
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-86, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2004 October AT-153 2004 M45

 DTC P1710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT

DTC P1710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT PFP:31940

Description ACS00486

The A/T fluid temperature sensor detects the A/T fluid temperature and sends a signal to the TCM.
CONSULT-II Reference Value ACS00487

Item name Condition Display value (Approx.)

ATF TEMP SE 1 3.2 - 2.5 - 0.8V
0°C (32°F) - 20°C (68°F) - 80°C (176°F)
ATF TEMP SE 2 3.2 - 2.4 - 0.65V

On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS00488

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC” with CONSULT-II or P1710 (A/T), P0710 (ENGINE) with-
out CONSULT-II is detected when TCM receives an excessively low or high voltage from the sensor.
Possible Cause ACS00489

● Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
● A/T fluid temperature sensors 1, 2
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS0048A

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 10
minutes (Total). (It is not necessary to maintain continuously.)
VHCL SPEED SE: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more
THROTTLE POSI: More than 1.0/8
Selector lever: “D” position
4. If DTC is detected, go to AT-156, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SAT014K

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.

Revision: 2004 October AT-154 2004 M45

 DTC P1710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT

Wiring Diagram — AT — FTS ACS0048B

AT

TCWA0119E

Revision: 2004 October AT-155 2004 M45

 DTC P1710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT

TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Terminal Wire
Item Condition Data (Approx.)
No. color
When ATF temperature 0°C (32°F) 3.2V
A/T fluid tempera-
8 B/R IGN ON When ATF temperature 20°C (68°F) 2.5V
ture sensor 1
When ATF temperature 80°C (176°F) 0.8V
15 B/W SEL4 – – –
When ATF temperature about 0°C (32°F) 3.2V
A/T fluid tempera-
17 Y/B IGN ON When ATF temperature about 20°C (68°F) 2.4V
ture sensor 2
When ATF temperature about 80°C (176°F) 0.65V

Diagnostic Procedure ACS0048C

1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out the value of “ATF TEMP SE 1” or “ATF TEMP SE 2”.
Item name Condition °C (°F) Display value (Approx.)
ATF TEMP SE 1 3.2 - 2.5 - 0.8V
0 (32) - 20 (68) - 80 (176)
ATF TEMP SE 2 3.2 - 2.4 - 0.65V

PCIA0039E

Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between TCM connector and ground while warming up A/T. Refer to AT-155, "Wiring Dia-
gram — AT — FTS" .
Connector Temperature Voltage (V)
Name Terminal No.
No. °C (°F) (Approx.)
0 (32) 3.2
A/T fluid tem- 8 (B/R) - 5 (B), 14
perature sen- (B), 24 (B) or 46 (B) 20 (68) 2.5
sor 1 (ground)
80 (176) 0.8
F103
0 (32) 3.2
A/T fluid tem- 17 (Y/B) - 5 (B), 14
perature sen- (B), 24 (B) or 46 (B) 20 (68) 2.4
sor 2 (ground)
80 (176) 0.65
SCIA1162E
3. Turn ignition switch OFF.
4. Disconnect the TCM connector.
5. Check if there is continuity between the connector terminal and ground.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 2.

Revision: 2004 October AT-156 2004 M45

 DTC P1710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT

2. CHECK A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT A

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector at the transmission right side.
3. Check the resistance between terminal and ground. B

Tempera- Resistance
Name Connector No. Terminal No.
ture °C (°F) (KΩ) (Approx.)
AT
0 (32) 15
A/T fluid
temperature F26 9 - Ground 20 (68) 6.5
sensor 1 D
80 (176) 0.9
0 (32) 10
A/T fluid
temperature F27 1 - Ground 20 (68) 4
sensor 2 E
SCIA1856E
80 (176) 0.5
4. Reinstall any part removed.
OK or NG F
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 3.
G
3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY
1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .
H
2. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector
and control valve assembly harness connector.
I
Item Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) Continuity
A/T unit assembly har-
F26 9 (B/Y)
ness connector J
Yes
Control valve assem-
F302 7 (B/Y)
bly harness connector
A/T unit assembly har- K
F27 1 (P)
ness connector
Yes
Control valve assem-
F301 3 (P)
bly harness connector L
4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
5. Reinstall any part removed.
OK or NG M
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.

SCIA3068E

Revision: 2004 October AT-157 2004 M45

 DTC P1710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT

4. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 AND CONTROL VALVE
ASSEMBLY
1. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness connector and control valve assembly harness con-
nector.
2. Check continuity between A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 har-
ness connector and control valve assembly harness connector.
Item Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) Continuity
A/T fluid tempera-
ture sensor 2 har- F305 1 (GY)
ness connector
Yes
Control valve assem-
bly harness connec- F301 3 (GY)
tor
OK or NG SCIA3069E

OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

5. CHECK A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2

Check A/T fluid temperature sensor 2.
● Refer to AT-159, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

Check the following items:
● Harness for short to ground or short to power or open between TCM and A/T unit assembly harness con-
nector.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

7. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-154, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 8.

8. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-86, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2004 October AT-158 2004 M45

 DTC P1710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT

Component Inspection ACS0048D

A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 A

1. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Check resistance between terminal 1 and 2.
B
Tempera- Resistance
Name Connector No. Terminal No.
ture °C (°F) (KΩ) (Approx.)
0 (32) 10 AT
A/T fluid
temperature F305 1-2 20 (68) 4
sensor 2
80 (176) 0.5
D

SCIA3070E
E

Revision: 2004 October AT-159 2004 M45

 DTC P1716 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR

DTC P1716 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR PFP:31935

Description ACS0048E

The turbine revolution sensor detects input shaft rpm (revolutions per minute). It is located on the input side of
the automatic transmission. Monitors revolution of sensor 1 and sensor 2 for non-standard conditions.
CONSULT-II Reference Value ACS004PD

Item name Condition Display value

TURBINE REV During driving (lock-up ON) Approximately matches the engine speed.

On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS0048F

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “TURBINE REV S/CIRC” with CONSULT-II or P1716 without CONSULT-II is
detected under the following conditions.
– When TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the sensor.
– When TCM detects an irregularity only at position of 4th gear for turbine revolution sensor 2.
Possible Cause ACS0048G

● Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
● Turbine revolution sensor 1, 2
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS0048H

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 5
consecutive seconds.
VHCL SPEED SE: 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more
ENGINE SPEED: 1,500 rpm or more
ACCELE POS: 0.5/8 or more
Selector lever: “D” position
Gear position (Turbine revolution sensor 1): 4th or 5th posi-
tion
Gear position (Turbine revolution sensor 2): All position SAT014K

4. If DTC is detected, go to AT-162, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.

Revision: 2004 October AT-160 2004 M45

 DTC P1716 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR

Wiring Diagram — AT — TRSA/T ACS0048I

AT

TCWA0120E

Revision: 2004 October AT-161 2004 M45

 DTC P1716 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR

TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Terminal Wire
Item Condition Data (Approx.)
No. color

Power supply IGN ON – Battery voltage

12 Y/R
(out) IGN OFF – 0V
When running at 50 km/h (31 MPH) in 4th gear with the
Turbine revolution
36 L/Y closed throttle position signal OFF, use the CONSULT-II
sensor 1 When pulse frequency measuring function.
vehicle 1.3 (kHz)
cruises When running at 20 km/h (12 MPH) in 1st gear with the
Turbine revolution
45 PU closed throttle position signal OFF, use the CONSULT-II
sensor 2
pulse frequency measuring function.

Diagnostic Procedure ACS0048J

1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Vehicle start and read out the value of “TURBINE REV”.
Item name Condition Display value
During driving (lock-up Approximately matches
TURBINE REV
ON) the engine speed.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. PCIA0041E
NG >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Check the pulse when vehicle cruises.
Name Condition
When running at 50 km/h (31 MPH) in 4th gear with the
closed throttle position signal OFF, use the CONSULT-II
Turbine revolution pulse frequency measuring function.
sensor 1 CAUTION:
Connect the data link connector to the vehicle-side diag-
nosis connector.
When running at 20 km/h (12 MPH) in 1st gear with the PCIA0042E

closed throttle position signal OFF, use the CONSULT-II

Turbine revolution pulse frequency measuring function.
sensor 2 CAUTION:
Connect the data link connector to the vehicle-side diag-
nosis connector.

Terminal No. Data

Item Connector No. Name
(Wire color) (Approx.)
36 (L/Y) Turbine revolution sensor 1
TCM F104 1.3 (kHz)
45 (PU) Turbine revolution sensor 2
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 3.

Revision: 2004 October AT-162 2004 M45

 DTC P1716 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR

3. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND A/T UNIT ASSEMBLY HARNESS CONNECTOR A
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect TCM connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector B
and TCM connector.
Terminal No.
Item Connector No. Continuity AT
(Wire color)
TCM F103 12 (Y/R)
A/T unit assembly harness Yes
F26 1 (Y/R) D
connector
TCM F104 36 (L/Y)
A/T unit assembly harness Yes E
F28 6 (L/Y)
connector
TCM F104 45 (PU)
A/T unit assembly harness Yes F
F28 7 (PU)
connector

4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.

5. Reinstall any part removed. G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power H
in harness or connectors.
SCIA3071E

I
4. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY
1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector. J
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector
and control valve assembly harness connector.
K
Item Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) Continuity
A/T unit assembly
F26 1 (B)
harness connector L
Yes
Control valve assem-
F302 8 (B)
bly harness connector
A/T unit assembly M
F28 6 (B/OR)
harness connector
Yes
Control valve assem-
F301 1 (B/OR)
bly harness connector
A/T unit assembly
F28 7 (OR)
harness connector
Yes
Control valve assem-
F301 2 (OR)
bly harness connector
4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
5. Reinstall any part removed.
OK or NG
OK >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-312,
"Control Valve Assembly" . SCIA3072E

NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2004 October AT-163 2004 M45

 DTC P1716 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR

5. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-123, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 6.

6. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-86, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2004 October AT-164 2004 M45

 DTC P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR

DTC P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR PFP:24814

A
Description ACS001CL

The vehicle speed sensor·MTR signal is transmitted from combination meter to TCM by CAN communication
line. The signal functions as an auxiliary device to the revolution sensor when it is malfunctioning. The TCM B
will then use the vehicle speed sensor·MTR signal.
CONSULT-II Reference Value ACS004PE

AT
Item name Condition Display value
Approximately matches the speedometer
VHCL/S SE·MTR During driving
reading.
D
On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS001CM

● This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

E
● Diagnostic trouble code “VHE SPD SE·MTR” with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM does not receive
the proper vehicle speed sensor MTR signal (input by CAN communication) from combination meter.
Possible Cause ACS001CN F
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
G
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS001CO

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. H
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
I
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) J
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 5
consecutive seconds. K
ACCELE POS: 1/8 or less
VHCL SPEED SE: 30 km/h (17 MPH) or more
4. If DTC is detected, go to AT-166, "Diagnostic Procedure" . L

SAT014K M

Revision: 2004 October AT-165 2004 M45

 DTC P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR

Diagnostic Procedure ACS001CP

1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Drive vehicle and read out the value of “VHCL/S SE·MTR”.
Item name Condition Display value
Approximately matches
VHCL/S SE·MTR During driving
the speedometer reading.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. PCIA0033E
NG >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK DTC, STEP 1

Check following items.
1. Refer to AT-103, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
2. Refer to BRC-26, "CONSULT-II Functions" .
3. Refer to DI-6, "COMBINATION METERS" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> If NG, recheck pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.

3. CHECK DTC, STEP 2

Perform DTC confirmation procedure. AT-165, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> If the system returns a malfunction, recheck pin terminals for damage or loose connection with
harness connector.

Revision: 2004 October AT-166 2004 M45

 DTC P1730 A/T INTERLOCK

DTC P1730 A/T INTERLOCK PFP:00000

A
Description ACS001CQ

● Fail-safe function to detect interlock conditions.

● Fail-safe function to the transmission range switch detects the selector position and sends a signal to the B
TCM.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS001CR
AT
● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
● Diagnostic trouble code “A/T INTERLOCK” with CONSULT-II or P1730 without CONSULT-II is detected
when TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the sensor and switch. D
● TCM monitors and compares gear position and conditions of each pressure switch when gear is steady.
Possible Cause ACS001CS
E
● Harness or connectors
(The solenoid and switch circuit is open or shorted.)
● Low coast brake solenoid valve
F
● ATF pressure switch 2
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS001CT

NOTE: G
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. H
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
I
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine.
4. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 2 J
consecutive seconds.
Selector lever: “D” position
5. If DTC is detected, go to AT-172, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
K

SAT014K
L
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
M

Revision: 2004 October AT-167 2004 M45

 DTC P1730 A/T INTERLOCK

Wiring Diagram — AT — I/LOCK ACS001CU

TCWA0121E

Revision: 2004 October AT-168 2004 M45

 DTC P1730 A/T INTERLOCK

AT

TCWA0122E

Revision: 2004 October AT-169 2004 M45

 DTC P1730 A/T INTERLOCK

TCWA0123E
TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.

Revision: 2004 October AT-170 2004 M45

 DTC P1730 A/T INTERLOCK

Terminal Wire
Item Condition Data (Approx.)
No. color A
SEL3 (ATF pres-
4 P/L – – –
sure switch 3)
When the solenoid valve operating (in 1st gear, 2nd gear, B
More than 2.0V
Input clutch sole- or 3rd gear)
10 R/W
noid valve When the solenoid valve is not operating (4th gear or 5th
0V
gear) AT
When the solenoid valve operating [6 km/h (4MPH) or
High and low When More than 2.0V
faster in 1st gear or 2nd gear]
11 R/L reverse clutch vehicle
solenoid valve cruises When the solenoid valve is not operating [6 km/h (4MPH) D
0V
or slower in 1st gear or 3rd, 4th, or 5th gear]
When the solenoid valve is operating (when running in
Battery voltage
Low coast brake M1-1 gear or M2-2 gear) E
13 W/L
solenoid valve When the solenoid valve is not operating (when running in
0V
“D”)
SEL1 (ATF pres- F
16 W/G – – –
sure switch 2)
When the solenoid valve is operating (other than 4th
Front brake sole- More than 2.0V
19 R gear)
noid valve G
When When the solenoid valve is not operating (4th gear) 0V
vehicle When the solenoid valve is operating (1st gear or 5th
cruises More than 2.0V
Direct clutch sole- gear) H
21 G
noid valve When the solenoid valve is not operating (2nd gear, 3rd
0V
gear, or 4th gear)

22 P/B
SEL2 (ATF pres-
– – –
I
sure switch 5)

PSC2 (ATF pres- When high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve ON. 0V
26 G/Y
sure switch 6) When When high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve OFF. Battery voltage J
vehicle
PSB2 (ATF pres- cruises When front brake solenoid valve OFF. Battery voltage
35 B/Y
sure switch 1) When front brake solenoid valve ON. 0V
K
40 Y/G DATA BIT1 – – –

Revision: 2004 October AT-171 2004 M45

 DTC P1730 A/T INTERLOCK

Judgement of A/T Interlock ACS001CV

When A/T Interlock is judged to be malfunctioning, the vehicle should be fixed in 2nd gear and should be set in
a condition in which it can travel.
When one of the following fastening patterns is detected, the fail-safe function in correspondence with the indi-
vidual pattern should be executed.
A/T INTERLOCK COUPLING PATTERN TABLE
●: NG, X: OK
Clutch pressure output pattern after fail-safe func-
ATF pressure switch output
tion
Fail-safe
Gear position SW6
SW3 SW5 SW1 SW2 function
(HLR/ I/C HLR/C D/C FR/B LC/B L/U
(I/C) (D/C) (FR/B) (LC/B)
C)
Held in
3rd – X X – ● OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
2nd gear
A/T interlock
Held in
coupling pat- 4th – X X – ● OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
2nd gear
tern
Held in
5th X X – X ● OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
2nd gear

Diagnostic Procedure ACS001CW

1. SELF-DIAGNOSIS
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Drive vehicle.

SAT014K

Without CONSULT-II
1. Drive vehicle.
2. Stop vehicle and turn ignition switch OFF.
3. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
4. Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-101, "TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Check low coast brake solenoid valve circuit and [Link] to AT-220, "DTC P1772 LOW
COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-226, "DTC P1774 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID
VALVE FUNCTION" .

2. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-167, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 3.

Revision: 2004 October AT-172 2004 M45

 DTC P1730 A/T INTERLOCK

3. CHECK TCM A
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-86, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG B
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
AT

Revision: 2004 October AT-173 2004 M45

 DTC P1731 A/T 1ST ENGINE BRAKING

DTC P1731 A/T 1ST ENGINE BRAKING PFP:00000

Description ACS0048K

Fail-safe function to prevent sudden decrease in speed by engine brake other than at M1 position.
CONSULT-II Reference Value ACS004PG

Item name Condition Display value

Low coast brake solenoid valve operates. ON
ON OFF SOL
Other conditions OFF
Low coast brake solenoid valve operates. ON
ATF PRES SW 2
Other conditions OFF

On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS0048L

● This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “A/T 1ST E/BRAKING” with CONSULT-II or 13th judgement flicker without CON-
SULT-II is detected under the following condition.
– When TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the sensor.
– When TCM monitors each pressure switch and solenoid monitor value, and detects as irregular when
engine brake of 1st gear acts other than at M1 position.
Possible Cause ACS0048M

● Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
● Low coast brake solenoid valve
● ATF pressure switch 2
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS0048N

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine.
4. Maintain the following conditions for at least 2 consecutive sec-
onds.
ENGINE SPEED: 1,200 rpm
Selector lever: “D” position
Gear position: 1st gear
5. If DTC is detected, go to AT-176, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SAT014K

Revision: 2004 October AT-174 2004 M45

 DTC P1731 A/T 1ST ENGINE BRAKING

Wiring Diagram — AT — E/BRE ACS0048O

AT

TCWA0124E

Revision: 2004 October AT-175 2004 M45

 DTC P1731 A/T 1ST ENGINE BRAKING

TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Terminal Wire
Item Condition Data (Approx.)
No. color

When When the solenoid valve is operating (when running in M1-1

Low coast brake Battery voltage
13 W/L vehicle gear or M2-2 gear)
solenoid valve
cruises When the solenoid valve is not operating (when running in “D”) 0V
SEL1 (ATF pres-
16 W/G – –
sure switch 2)
40 Y/G DATA BIT1 – –

Diagnostic Procedure ACS0048P

1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “SELECTION FROM MENU” in “DATA MONITOR” mode
for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Accelerate vehicle in “D” position (1st gear), and confirm the
ON/OFF actuation of the “ATF PRES SW 2” and “ON OFF SOL”.
Item name Condition Display value
Low coast brake solenoid
ON
ON OFF SOL valve operates.
Other conditions OFF
SCIA4670E
Low coast brake solenoid
ON
ATF PRES SW 2 valve operates.
Other conditions OFF

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.

Revision: 2004 October AT-176 2004 M45

 DTC P1731 A/T 1ST ENGINE BRAKING

2. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND A/T UNIT ASSEMBLY HARNESS CONNECTOR A
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect TCM connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector B
and TCM connector.
Terminal No.
Item Connector No. Continuity AT
(Wire color)
TCM F103 16 (W/G)
A/T unit assembly harness Yes
F26 5 (W/G) D
connector
TCM F104 40 (Y/G)
A/T unit assembly harness Yes E
F26 2 (Y/G)
connector
TCM F103 13 (W/L)
A/T unit assembly harness Yes F
F27 2 (W/L)
connector

4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.

5. Reinstall any part removed. G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power H
in harness or connectors.
SCIA3095E

I
3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY
1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector. J
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector
and control valve assembly harness connector.
K
Item Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) Continuity
A/T unit assembly
F26 2 (R)
harness connector L
Yes
Control valve assem-
F302 10 (R)
bly harness connector
A/T unit assembly M
F26 5 (L)
harness connector
Yes
Control valve assem-
F302 13 (L)
bly harness connector
A/T unit assembly
F27 2 (B/R)
harness connector
Yes
Control valve assem-
F301 4 (B/R)
bly harness connector
4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
5. Reinstall any part removed.
OK or NG
OK >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-312,
"Control Valve Assembly" . SCIA3107E

NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power

in harness or connectors.

Revision: 2004 October AT-177 2004 M45

 DTC P1731 A/T 1ST ENGINE BRAKING

4. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-174, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 5.

5. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-86, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2004 October AT-178 2004 M45

 DTC P1752 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

DTC P1752 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE PFP:31940

A
Description ACS0048Q

Input clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals sent from the PNP switch, vehicle
speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears will then be shifted to the B
optimum position.
CONSULT-II Reference Value ACS004PH

AT
Item name Condition Display value (Approx.)
Input clutch solenoid valve operates. 0.6 - 0.8 A
I/C SOLENOID
Other conditions 0 - 0.05 A D

On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS0048R

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. E

● Diagnostic trouble code “I/C SOLENOID/CIRC” with CONSULT-II or P1752 without CONSULT-II is
detected under the following conditions.
– When TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve. F
– When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value.
Possible Cause ACS0048S
G
● Harness or connectors
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
● Input clutch solenoid valve H
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS0048T

CAUTION:
I
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. J
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
K
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine. L
4. Maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive sec-
onds.
ACCELE POS: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8
M
Selector lever: “D” position
Gear position: 3rd Þ 4th Gear (I/C ON/OFF)
5. If DTC is detected go to “AT-181, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SAT014K

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.

Revision: 2004 October AT-179 2004 M45

 DTC P1752 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

Wiring Diagram — AT — I/C ACS0048U

TCWA0125E

Revision: 2004 October AT-180 2004 M45

 DTC P1752 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

TCM terminal and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Terminal Wire A
Item Condition Data (Approx.)
No. color
When the solenoid valve operating (in 1st gear, 2nd gear,
When More than 2.0V
Input clutch sole- or 3rd gear)
10 R/W vehicle B
noid valve When the solenoid valve is not operating (4th gear or 5th
cruises 0V
gear)

Diagnostic Procedure ACS0048V

AT
1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS
With CONSULT-II D
1. Start engine.
2. Select “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
E
3. Read out the value of “I/C SOLENOID” while driving.
Item name Condition Display value (Approx.)
Input clutch solenoid F
0.6 - 0.8 A
I/C SOLENOID valve operates.
Other conditions 0 - 0.05 A
G

H
SCIA4462E

Without CONSULT-II I
1. Start engine.
2. Check voltage between TCM connector and ground.
J
Con-
Terminal Data
Item nector Condition
No. (Approx.)
No.
When the solenoid
K
valve operating (in 1st More than
Input gear, 2nd gear, or 3rd 2V
10 (R/ When
clutch gear)
solenoid
F103 W) - vehicle L
Ground cruises When the solenoid
valve
valve is not operating 0V
SCIA4573E
(4th gear or 5th gear)
M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 2.

Revision: 2004 October AT-181 2004 M45

 DTC P1752 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

2. CHECK INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector at the trans-
mission right side.
3. Check the resistance between terminal and ground.

Connector
Solenoid valve Terminal No. Resistance (Approx.)
No.
Input clutch solenoid
F27 6 - Ground 3-9Ω
valve

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. SCIA1837E
NG >> GO TO 3.

3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector
and control valve assembly harness connector.
Item Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) Continuity
A/T unit assembly
F27 6 (R/W)
harness connector
Control valve assem- Yes
bly harness connec- F301 9 (R/W)
tor
4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG SCIA3073E

OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE

Check valve resistance
● Refer to AT-183, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .

Revision: 2004 October AT-182 2004 M45

 DTC P1752 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

5. CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT A

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect TCM connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector B
and TCM connector.
Terminal No.
Item Connector No. Continuity AT
(Wire color)
TCM F103 10 (R/W)
A/T unit assembly harness Yes
F27 6 (R/W) D
connector
SCIA1838E
4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
5. Reinstall any part removed. E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. F

6. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-179, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . G
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
H
NG >> GO TO 7.

7. CHECK TCM
I
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-86, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG J
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Component Inspection ACS0048W
K
INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
Resistance Check
L
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .
3. Disconnect control valve assembly harness connector.
M
4. Check resistance between terminal and ground.
Terminal No. Resistance
Solenoid Valve Connector No.
(Wire color) (Approx.)
Input clutch solenoid
F301 9 (G) - Ground 3-9Ω
valve
5. If NG, replace control valve assembly. Refer to AT-312, "Control
Valve Assembly" .

SCIA3074E

Revision: 2004 October AT-183 2004 M45

 DTC P1752 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

Operation Check
● Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while
applying battery voltage to the terminal 9 and ground.

SCIA3108E

Revision: 2004 October AT-184 2004 M45

 DTC P1754 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION

DTC P1754 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION PFP:31940

A
Description ACS0048X

● Input clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals sent from the PNP switch, vehi-
cle speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears will then be B
shifted to the optimum position.
● This is not only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but also by mechanical mal-
function such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation. AT
CONSULT-II Reference Value ACS004PI

Item name Condition Display value

D
Input clutch solenoid valve operates. OFF
ATF PRES SW 3
Other conditions ON
E
On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS0048Y

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “I/C SOLENOID FNCTN” with CONSULT-II or P1754 without CONSULT-II is F
detected under the following conditions.
– When TCM detects that actual gear ratio is irregular, and relation between gear position and condition of
ATF pressure switch 3 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change) G
– When TCM detects that relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 3 is irregular
during releasing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
Possible Cause ACS0048Z
H

● Harness or connectors
(The solenoid and switch circuits are open or shorted.)
I
● Input clutch solenoid valve
● ATF pressure switch 3
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS00490 J
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE: K
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. L
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
M
2. Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following condition.
ACCELE POSI: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8
Selector lever: “D” position
Gear position: 3rd Þ 4th Gear (I/C ON/OFF)
3. Perform step “2” again.
4. Turn ignition switch to OFF, then perform step “1” to “3” again.
5. Check “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-
II. If DTC (P1754) is detected, refer to AT-187, "Diagnostic Pro-
cedure" . SAT014K
If DTC (P1752) is detected, go to AT-181, "Diagnostic Proce-
dure" .
If DTC (P1843) is detected, go to AT-240, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.

Revision: 2004 October AT-185 2004 M45

 DTC P1754 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION

Wiring Diagram — AT — I/CF ACS00491

TCWA0126E

Revision: 2004 October AT-186 2004 M45

 DTC P1754 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION

TCM terminal and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Terminal Wire A
Item Condition Data (Approx.)
No. color
SEL3 (ATF pressure
4 P/L – –
switch 3)
B
When the solenoid valve operating (in 1st gear, 2nd gear
When More than 2V
Input clutch sole- or 3rd gear)
10 R/W vehicle
noid valve When the solenoid valve is not operating (4th gear or 5th
cruises 0V AT
gear)
40 Y/G DATA BIT1 – –

Diagnostic Procedure ACS00492

D

1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS

With CONSULT-II E
1. Start engine.
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” or “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA
MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. F
3. Accelerate vehicle in “D” position (3rd Þ 4th gear), and confirm
the ON/OFF actuation of the “ATF PRES SW 3”.
G
Item name Condition Display value
Input clutch solenoid
OFF
ATF PRES SW 3 valve operates. H
Other conditions ON
PCIA0067E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. I
NG >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND A/T UNIT ASSEMBLY HARNESS CONNECTOR J

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect TCM connector. K
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector
and TCM connector.
Terminal No. L
Item Connector No. Continuity
(Wire color)
TCM F103 4 (P/L)
A/T unit assembly harness Yes M
F26 7 (P/L)
connector
TCM F103 10 (R/W)
A/T unit assembly harness Yes
F27 6 (R/W)
connector
TCM F104 40 (Y/G)
A/T unit assembly harness Yes
F26 2 (Y/G)
connector

4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.

5. Reinstall any part removed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.
SCIA3109E

Revision: 2004 October AT-187 2004 M45

 DTC P1754 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION

3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector
and control valve assembly harness connector.
Item Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) Continuity
A/T unit assembly
F26 2 (R)
harness connector
Control valve assem- Yes
bly harness connec- F302 10 (R)
tor
A/T unit assembly
F26 7 (W)
harness connector
Control valve assem- Yes
bly harness connec- F302 15 (W)
tor
A/T unit assembly
F27 6 (R/W)
harness connector
Control valve assem- Yes
bly harness connec- F301 9 (R/W)
tor

4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.

5. Reinstall any part removed.
SCIA3075E
OK or NG
OK >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-185, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 5.

5. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-86, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2004 October AT-188 2004 M45

 DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE

DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE PFP:31940

A
Description ACS00493

Front brake solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals sent from the PNP switch, vehicle
speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears will then be shifted to the B
optimum position.
CONSULT-II Reference Value ACS004PJ

AT
Item name Condition Display value (Approx.)
Front brake solenoid valve operates. 0.6 - 0.8 A
FR/B SOLENOID
Other conditions 0 - 0.05 A D

On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS00494

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. E

● Diagnostic trouble code “FR/B SOLENOID/CIRC” with CONSULT-II or P1757 without CONSULT-II is
detected under the following conditions.
– When TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve. F
– When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value.
Possible Cause ACS00495
G
● Harness or connectors
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
● Front brake solenoid valve H
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS00496

CAUTION:
I
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. J
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
K
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine. L
4. Maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive sec-
onds.
ACCELE POS: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8
M
Selector lever: “D” position
Gear position: 3rd Þ 4th Gear (FR/B ON/OFF)
5. If DTC is detected go to AT-191, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SAT014K

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.

Revision: 2004 October AT-189 2004 M45

 DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE

Wiring Diagram — AT — FR/B ACS00497

TCWA0127E

Revision: 2004 October AT-190 2004 M45

 DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE

TCM terminal and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Terminal Wire A
Item Condition Data (Approx.)
No. color
When When the solenoid valve is operating (other than 4th gear) More than 2.0V
Front brake sole-
19 R vehicle
noid valve When the solenoid valve is not operating (4th gear) 0V B
starts

Diagnostic Procedure ACS00498

1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS AT

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine. D
2. Select “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out the value of “FR/B SOLENOID” while driving.
E
Item name Condition Display value (Approx.)
Front brake solenoid
0.6 - 0.8 A
FR/B SOLENOID valve operates. F
Other conditions 0 - 0.05 A

SCIA4462E
H

Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine. I
2. Check voltage between TCM connector and ground.
Con-
Terminal Data J
Item nector Condition
No. (Approx.)
No.
When the solenoid
More than
Front valve is operating
2.0V
K
When (other than 4th gear)
brake 19 (R) -
F103 vehicle
solenoid Ground When the solenoid
cruises
valve valve is not operating 0V L
(4th gear)
SCIA4574E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. M
NG >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector at the trans-
mission right side.
3. Check the resistance between terminal and ground.

Solenoid valve Connector No. Terminal No. Resistance (Approx.)

Front brake solenoid
F27 5 - Ground 3-9Ω
valve
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 3. SCIA1839E

Revision: 2004 October AT-191 2004 M45

 DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE

3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector
and control valve assembly harness connector.
Item Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) Continuity
A/T unit assembly
F27 5 (W/R)
harness connector
Control valve assem- Yes
bly harness connec- F301 8 (W/R)
tor
4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG SCIA3076E

OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE

Check valve resistance
● Refer to AT-193, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .

5. CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect TCM connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector
and TCM connector.
Terminal No.
Item Connector No. Continuity
(Wire color)
TCM F103 19 (R)
A/T unit assembly harness Yes
F27 5 (R)
connector
SCIA1840E
4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
5. Reinstall any part removed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

6. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-189, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 7.

Revision: 2004 October AT-192 2004 M45

 DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE

7. CHECK TCM A
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-86, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG B
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
AT
Component Inspection ACS00499

FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE

Resistance Check D
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .
3. Disconnect control valve assembly harness connector. E
4. Check resistance between terminal and ground.
Terminal No. Resistance
Solenoid Valve Connector No. F
(Wire color) (Approx.)
Front brake solenoid
F301 8 (Y) - Ground 3-9Ω
valve
G
5. If NG, replace control valve assembly. Refer to AT-312, "Control
Valve Assembly" .
H
SCIA3077E

Operation Check
I
● Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while
applying battery voltage to the terminal 8 and ground.
J

L
SCIA3079E

Revision: 2004 October AT-193 2004 M45

 DTC P1759 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION

DTC P1759 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION PFP:31940

Description ACS0049A

● Front brake solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals sent from the PNP switch, vehi-
cle speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears will then be
shifted to the optimum position.
● This is not only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but also by mechanical mal-
function such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation.
CONSULT-II Reference Value ACS004PK

Item name Condition Display value

Front brake solenoid valve operates. ON
ATF PRES SW 1
Other conditions OFF

On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS0049B

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “FR/B SOLENOID FNCT” with CONSULT-II or P1759 without CONSULT-II is
detected under the following conditions.
– When TCM detects that actual gear ratio is irregular, and relation between gear position and condition of
ATF pressure switch 1 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
– When TCM detects that relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 1 is irregular
during releasing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
Possible Cause ACS0049C

● Harness or connectors
(The solenoid and switch circuits are open or shorted.)
● Front brake solenoid valve
● ATF pressure switch 1
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS0049D

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following condition.
ACCELE POS: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8
Selector lever: “D” position
Gear position: 3rd Þ 4th Gear (FR/B ON/OFF)
3. Perform step “2” again.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF, then perform step “1” to “3” again.
5. Check “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-
II. If DTC (P1759) is detected, refer to AT-196, "Diagnostic Pro-
cedure" . SAT014K
If DTC (P1757) is detected, go to AT-191, "Diagnostic Proce-
dure" .
If DTC (P1841) is detected, go to AT-236, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.

Revision: 2004 October AT-194 2004 M45

 DTC P1759 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION

Wiring Diagram — AT — FR/BF ACS0049E

AT

TCWA0128E

Revision: 2004 October AT-195 2004 M45

 DTC P1759 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION

TCM terminal and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Terminal Wire
Item Condition Data (Approx.)
No. color

Front brake sole- When the solenoid valve is operating (other than 4th gear) More than 2.0V
19 R
noid valve When When the solenoid valve is not operating (4th gear) 0V
vehicle
PSB2 (ATF pres- cruises When front brake solenoid valve OFF. Battery voltage
35 B/Y
sure switch 1) When front brake solenoid valve ON. 0V

Diagnostic Procedure ACS0049F

1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” or “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA
MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Accelerate vehicle in “D” position (3rd Þ 4th gear), and confirm
the ON/OFF actuation of the “ATF PRES SW 1”.
Item name Condition Display value
Front brake solenoid
ON
ATF PRES SW 1 valve operates.
Other conditions OFF
PCIA0067E

Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Accelerate vehicle in the “D” position (3rd Þ 4th gear).
Connector Terminal No.
Solenoid valve Voltage
No. (Wire color)

Front brake solenoid OFF Battery voltage

F104 35 (B/Y) - Ground
valve ON Approx. 0 V

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. PCIA0066E

NG >> GO TO 2.

Revision: 2004 October AT-196 2004 M45

 DTC P1759 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION

2. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND A/T UNIT ASSEMBLY HARNESS CONNECTOR A
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect TCM connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector B
and TCM connector.
Terminal No.
Item Connector No. Continuity AT
(Wire color)
TCM F104 35 (B/Y)
A/T unit assembly harness Yes
F26 3 (B/Y) D
connector
TCM F103 19 (R)
A/T unit assembly harness Yes E
F27 5 (R)
connector
4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
5. Reinstall any part removed. F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power G
in harness or connectors.

SCIA3080E

I
3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY
1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector. J
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector
and control valve assembly harness connector.
K
Item Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) Continuity
A/T unit assembly
F26 3 (G)
harness connector L
Yes
Control valve assem-
F302 12 (G)
bly harness connector
A/T unit assembly M
F27 5 (W/R)
harness connector
Yes
Control valve assem-
F301 8 (W/R)
bly harness connector
4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
5. Reinstall any part removed.
OK or NG
OK >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-312,
"Control Valve Assembly" .
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.

SCIA3081E

Revision: 2004 October AT-197 2004 M45

 DTC P1759 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION

4. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-194, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 5.

5. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-86, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2004 October AT-198 2004 M45

 DTC P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

DTC P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE PFP:31940

A
Description ACS0049G

Direct clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals sent from the PNP switch, vehicle
speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears will then be shifted to the B
optimum position.
CONSULT-II Reference Value ACS004PL

AT
Item name Condition Display value (Approx.)
Direct clutch solenoid valve operates. 0.6 - 0.8 A
D/C SOLENOID
Other conditions 0 - 0.05 A D

On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS0049H

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. E

● Diagnostic trouble code “D/C SOLENOID/CIRC” with CONSULT-II or P1762 without CONSULT-II is
detected under the following conditions.
– When TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve. F
– When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value.
Possible Cause ACS0049I
G
● Harness or connectors
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
● Direct clutch solenoid valve H
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS0049J

NOTE:
I
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
J
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. K
3. Start engine.
4. Maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive sec-
onds. L
ACCELE POS: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8
Selector lever: “D” position
Gear position: 1st Þ 2nd Gear (D/C ON/OFF)
M
5. If DTC is detected, go to AT-201, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SAT014K

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.

Revision: 2004 October AT-199 2004 M45

 DTC P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

Wiring Diagram — AT — D/C ACS0049K

TCWA0129E

Revision: 2004 October AT-200 2004 M45

 DTC P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

TCM terminal and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Terminal Wire A
Item Condition Data (Approx.)
No. color
When the solenoid valve is operating (1st gear or 5th
When More than 2.0V
Direct clutch sole- gear)
21 G vehicle B
noid valve When the solenoid valve is not operating (2nd gear, 3rd
cruises 0V
gear or 4th gear)

Diagnostic Procedure ACS0049L

AT
1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS
With CONSULT-II D
1. Start engine.
2. Select “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
E
3. Read out the value of “D/C SOLENOID” while driving.
Item name Condition Display value (Approx.)
Direct clutch solenoid F
0.6 - 0.8 A
D/C SOLENOID valve operates.
Other conditions 0 - 0.05 A
G

H
SCIA4575E

Without CONSULT-II I
1. Start engine.
2. Check voltage between TCM connector and ground.
J
Con-
Terminal Data
Item nector Condition
No. (Approx.)
No.
When the solenoid
K
More than
valve is operating (1st
Direct 2.0V
When gear or 5th gear)
clutch 21 (G) -
solenoid
F103
Ground
vehicle When the solenoid L
cruises valve is not operating
valve 0V
(2nd gear, 3rd gear or
SCIA4576E
4th gear)
M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 2.

Revision: 2004 October AT-201 2004 M45

 DTC P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

2. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector at the trans-
mission right side.
3. Check the resistance between terminal and ground.

Solenoid valve Connector No. Terminal No. Resistance (Approx.)

Direct clutch solenoid
F27 4 - Ground 3-9Ω
valve
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 3. SCIA1841E

3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector
and control valve assembly harness connector.
Item Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) Continuity
A/T unit assembly har-
F27 4 (W/B)
ness connector
Yes
Control valve assem-
F301 7 (W/B)
bly harness connector
4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
SCIA3082E
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE

Check valve resistance
● Refer to AT-203, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .

Revision: 2004 October AT-202 2004 M45

 DTC P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

5. CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT A

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect TCM connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector B
and TCM connector.
Terminal No.
Item Connector No. Continuity AT
(Wire color)
TCM F103 21 (G)
A/T unit assembly harness Yes
F27 4 (G) D
connector
SCIA1842E
4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
5. Reinstall any part removed. E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. F

6. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-199, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . G
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
H
NG >> GO TO 7.

7. CHECK TCM
I
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-86, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG J
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Component Inspection ACS0049M
K
DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
Resistance Check
L
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .
3. Disconnect control valve assembly harness connector.
M
4. Check resistance between terminal and ground.
Terminal No. Resistance
Solenoid Valve Connector No.
(Wire color) (Approx.)
Direct clutch solenoid
F301 7 (L) - Ground 3-9Ω
valve
5. If NG, replace control valve assembly. Refer to AT-312, "Control
Valve Assembly" .

SCIA3083E

Revision: 2004 October AT-203 2004 M45

 DTC P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

Operation Check
● Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while
applying battery voltage to the terminal 7 and ground.

SCIA3084E

Revision: 2004 October AT-204 2004 M45

 DTC P1764 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION

DTC P1764 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION PFP:31940

A
Description ACS0049N

● Direct clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals sent from the PNP switch,
vehicle speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears will then be B
shifted to the optimum position.
● This is not only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but also by mechanical mal-
function such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation. AT
CONSULT-II Reference Value ACS004PM

Item name Condition Display value

D
Direct clutch solenoid valve operates. OFF
ATF PRES SW 5
Other conditions ON
E
On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS0049O

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “D/C SOLENOID FNCTN” with CONSULT-II or P1764 without CONSULT-II is F
detected under the following conditions.
– When TCM detects that actual gear ratio is irregular, and relation between gear position and condition of
ATF pressure switch 5 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change) G
– When TCM detects that relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 5 is irregular
during releasing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
Possible Cause ACS0049P
H

● Harness or connectors
(The solenoid and switch circuits are open or shorted.)
I
● Direct clutch solenoid valve
● ATF pressure switch 5
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS0049Q J
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. K
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
L
1. Start engine.
2. Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following condition.
ACCELE POS: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8
Selector lever: “D” position M
Gear position: 1st Þ 2nd Gear (D/C ON/OFF)
3. Perform step “2” again.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF, then perform step “1” to “3” again.
5. Check “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-
II. If DTC (P1764) is detected, refer to AT-207, "Diagnostic Pro-
cedure" . SAT014K
If DTC (P1762) is detected, go to AT-201, "Diagnostic Proce-
dure" .
If DTC (P1845) is detected, go to AT-244, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.

Revision: 2004 October AT-205 2004 M45

 DTC P1764 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION

Wiring Diagram — AT — D/CF ACS0049R

TCWA0130E

Revision: 2004 October AT-206 2004 M45

 DTC P1764 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION

TCM terminal and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Terminal Wire A
Item Condition Data (Approx.)
No. color

When When the solenoid valve is operating (1st gear or 5th gear) More than 2.0V
Direct clutch sole-
21 G vehicle When the solenoid valve is not operating (2nd gear, 3rd B
noid valve 0V
cruises gear or 4th gear)
SEL2 (ATF pressure
22 P/B – –
switch 5) AT
40 Y/G DATA BIT1 – –

Diagnostic Procedure ACS0049S

D
1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS
With CONSULT-II
E
1. Start engine.
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” or “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA
MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
F
3. Accelerate vehicle in “D” position (1st Þ 2nd gear), and confirm
the ON/OFF actuation of the “ATF PRES SW 5”.
Item name Condition Display value G
Direct clutch solenoid
OFF
ATF PRES SW 5 valve operates.
Other conditions ON H
PCIA0067E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
I
NG >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND A/T UNIT ASSEMBLY HARNESS CONNECTOR
J
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect TCM connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector K
and TCM connector.
Terminal No.
Item Connector No. Continuity L
(Wire color)
TCM F103 22 (P/B)
A/T unit assembly harness Yes
F26 6 (P/B) M
connector
TCM F104 40 (Y/G)
A/T unit assembly harness Yes
F26 2 (Y/G)
connector
TCM F103 21 (G)
A/T unit assembly harness Yes
F27 4 (G)
connector

4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.

5. Reinstall any part removed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.
SCIA3086E

Revision: 2004 October AT-207 2004 M45

 DTC P1764 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION

3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector
and control valve assembly harness connector.
Item Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) Continuity
A/T unit assembly
F26 2 (R)
harness connector
Control valve assem- Yes
bly harness connec- F302 10 (R)
tor
A/T unit assembly
F26 6 (GY)
harness connector
Control valve assem- Yes
bly harness connec- F302 14 (GY)
tor
A/T unit assembly
F27 4 (W/B)
harness connector
Control valve assem- Yes
bly harness connec- F301 7 (W/B)
tor

4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.

5. Reinstall any part removed.
SCIA3085E
OK or NG
OK >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-205, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 5.

5. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-86, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2004 October AT-208 2004 M45

 DTC P1767 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

DTC P1767 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE PFP:31940
A
Description ACS0049T

High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals sent from the PNP
switch, vehicle speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears will then B
be shifted to the optimum position.
CONSULT-II Reference Value ACS004PN

AT
Item name Condition Display value (Approx.)
High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve
0.6 - 0.8 A
HLR/C SOL operates.
D
Other conditions 0 - 0.05 A

On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS0049U

E
● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
● Diagnostic trouble code “HLR/C SOL/CIRC” with CONSULT-II or P1767 without CONSULT-II is detected
under the following conditions.
F
– When TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve.
– When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value.
Possible Cause ACS0049V
G

● Harness or connectors
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
H
● High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS0049W

CAUTION: I
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and J
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II K
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
L
3. Start engine.
4. Maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive sec-
onds.
ACCELE POS: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8 M
Selector lever: “D” position
Gear position: 2nd Þ 3rd Gear (HLR/C ON/OFF)
5. If DTC is detected, go to AT-211, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SAT014K

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.

Revision: 2004 October AT-209 2004 M45

 DTC P1767 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

Wiring Diagram — AT — HLR/C ACS0049X

TCWA0131E

Revision: 2004 October AT-210 2004 M45

 DTC P1767 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

TCM terminal and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Terminal Wire A
Item Condition Data (Approx.)
No. color
When the solenoid valve operating [6 km/h (4 MPH) or
High and low When More than 2.0V
faster in 1st gear or 2nd gear]
11 R/L reverse clutch vehicle B
solenoid valve cruises When the solenoid valve is not operating [6 km/h (4 MPH)
0V
or slower in 1st gear or 3rd, 4th, or 5th gear]

Diagnostic Procedure ACS0049Y

AT
1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS
With CONSULT-II D
1. Start engine.
2. Select “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
E
3. Read out the value of “HLR/C SOL” while driving.
Item name Condition Display value (Approx.)
High and low reverse
F
clutch solenoid valve 0.6 - 0.8 A
HLR/C SOL operates.
Other conditions 0 - 0.05 A G

H
SCIA4575E

Without CONSULT-II I
1. Start engine.
2. Check voltage between TCM connector and ground.
J
Con-
Terminal Data
Item nector Condition
No. (Approx.)
No.
When the solenoid
K
valve operating [6 km/h More than
High and (4 MPH) or faster in 1st 2.0V
low gear or 2nd gear]
reverse 11 (R/L)
When L
F103 vehicle When the solenoid
clutch - Ground
cruises valve is not operating
solenoid SCIA4577E
valve [6 km/h (4 MPH) or 0V
slower in 1st gear or M
3rd, 4th, or 5th gear]

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 2.

Revision: 2004 October AT-211 2004 M45

 DTC P1767 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

2. CHECK HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector at the trans-
mission right side.
3. Check the resistance between terminal and ground.

Connector
Solenoid valve Terminal No. Resistance (Approx.)
No.
High and low reverse
F27 3 - Ground 3-9Ω
clutch solenoid valve

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. SCIA1843E
NG >> GO TO 3.

3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector
and control valve assembly harness connector.
Item Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) Continuity
A/T unit assembly
F27 3 (B/W)
harness connector
Yes
Control valve assem-
F301 5 (B/W)
bly harness connector

4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG
SCIA3087E
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE

Check valve resistance
● Refer to AT-213, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .

Revision: 2004 October AT-212 2004 M45

 DTC P1767 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

5. CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT A

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect TCM connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector B
and TCM connector.
Terminal No.
Item Connector No. Continuity AT
(Wire color)
TCM F103 11 (R/L)
A/T unit assembly harness Yes
F27 3 (R/L) D
connector
SCIA1844E
4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
5. Reinstall any part removed. E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. F

6. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-209, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . G
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
H
NG >> GO TO 7.

7. CHECK TCM
I
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-86, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG J
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Component Inspection ACS0049Z
K
HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
Resistance Check
L
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .
3. Disconnect control valve assembly harness connector.
M
4. Check resistance between terminal and ground.
Terminal No. Resistance
Solenoid Valve Connector No.
(Wire color) (Approx.)
High and low reverse
F301 5 (R) - Ground 3-9Ω
clutch solenoid valve
5. If NG, replace control valve assembly. Refer to AT-312, "Control
Valve Assembly" .

SCIA3088E

Revision: 2004 October AT-213 2004 M45

 DTC P1767 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

Operation Check
● Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while
applying battery voltage to the terminal 5 and ground.

SCIA3089E

Revision: 2004 October AT-214 2004 M45

 DTC P1769 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION

DTC P1769 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION
PFP:31940 A
Description ACS004A0

● High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals sent from the B
PNP switch, vehicle speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears
will then be shifted to the optimum position.
● This is not only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but also by mechanical mal-
function such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation. AT

CONSULT-II Reference Value ACS004PO

Item name Condition Display value D

High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve operates. OFF
ATF PRES SW 6
Other conditions ON
E
On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS004A1

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

F
● Diagnostic trouble code “HLR/C SOL FNCTN” with CONSULT-II or P1769 without CONSULT-II is
detected under the following conditions.
– When TCM detects that actual gear ratio is irregular, and relation between gear position and condition of
G
ATF pressure switch 6 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
– When TCM detects that relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 6 is irregular
during releasing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
H
Possible Cause ACS004A2

● Harness or connectors
(The solenoid and switch circuits are open or shorted.) I
● High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve
● ATF pressure switch 6
J
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS004A3

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. K
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. L
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine. M
2. Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following condition.
ACCELE POS: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8
Selector lever: “D” position
Gear position: 2nd Þ 3rd Gear (HLR/C ON/OFF)
3. Perform step “2” again.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF, then perform step “1” to “3” again.
5. Check “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-
II. If DTC (P1769) is detected, refer to AT-217, "Diagnostic Pro-
cedure" . SAT014K
If DTC (P1767) is detected, go to AT-211, "Diagnostic Proce-
dure" .
If DTC (P1846) is detected, go to AT-248, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.

Revision: 2004 October AT-215 2004 M45

 DTC P1769 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION

Wiring Diagram — AT — HLR/CF ACS004A4

TCWA0132E

Revision: 2004 October AT-216 2004 M45

 DTC P1769 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION

TCM terminal and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Terminal Wire A
Item Condition Data (Approx.)
No. color
When the solenoid valve operating [6 km/h (4 MPH) or
High and low More than 2.0V
faster in 1st gear or 2nd gear]
11 R/L reverse clutch sole- B
When When the solenoid valve is not operating [6 km/h (4 MPH)
noid valve 0V
vehicle or slower in 1st gear or 3rd, 4th, or 5th gear]
cruises
PSC2 (ATF pres- When high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve ON. 0V AT
26 G/Y
sure switch 6) When high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve OFF. Battery voltage

Diagnostic Procedure ACS004A5

D
1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS
With CONSULT-II
E
1. Start engine.
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” or “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA
MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
F
3. Accelerate vehicle in “D” position (2nd Þ 3rd gear), and confirm
the ON/OFF actuation of the “ATF PRES SW 6”.
Item name Condition Display value G
High and low reverse
clutch solenoid valve OFF
ATF PRES SW 6 operates. H
PCIA0067E
Other conditions ON

Without CONSULT-II I
1. Start engine.
2. Accelerate vehicle in “D” position (2nd Þ 3rd gear).
J
Connector Terminal No.
Solenoid valve Voltage
No. (Wire color)

High and low reverse OFF Battery voltage K

F104 26 (G/Y) - Ground
clutch solenoid valve ON Approx. 0 V
OK or NG
PCIA0068E L
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.
M

Revision: 2004 October AT-217 2004 M45

 DTC P1769 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION

2. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND A/T UNIT ASSEMBLY HARNESS CONNECTOR
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect TCM connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector
and TCM connector.
Terminal No.
Item Connector No. Continuity
(Wire color)
TCM F104 26 (G/Y)
A/T unit assembly harness Yes
F26 4 (G/Y)
connector
TCM F103 11 (R/L)
A/T unit assembly harness Yes
F27 3 (R/L)
connector
4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
5. Reinstall any part removed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.

SCIA3090E

3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector
and control valve assembly harness connector.
Item Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) Continuity
A/T unit assembly
F26 4 (Y)
harness connector
Yes
Control valve assem-
F302 11 (Y)
bly harness connector
A/T unit assembly
F27 3 (B/W)
harness connector
Yes
Control valve assem-
F301 5 (B/W)
bly harness connector
4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
5. Reinstall any part removed.
OK or NG
OK >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-312,
"Control Valve Assembly" .
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.

SCIA3091E

Revision: 2004 October AT-218 2004 M45

 DTC P1769 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION

4. CHECK DTC A
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-215, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END B
NG >> GO TO 5.

5. CHECK TCM AT

1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-86, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
D
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. E

Revision: 2004 October AT-219 2004 M45

 DTC P1772 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE

DTC P1772 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE PFP:31940

Description ACS004A6

Low coast brake solenoid valve is turned ON or OFF by the TCM in response to signals sent from the PNP
switch, vehicle speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears will then
be shifted to the optimum position.
CONSULT-II Reference Value ACS004PP

Item name Condition Display value

Low coast brake solenoid valve operates. ON
ON OFF SOL
Other conditions OFF

On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS004A7

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “LC/B SOLENOID/CIRC” with CONSULT-II or P1772 without CONSULT-II is
detected when TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve.
Possible Cause ACS004A8

● Harness or connectors
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
● Low coast brake solenoid valve
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS004A9

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine.
4. Maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive sec-
onds.
Selector lever: “M” position
Gear position: “M1-1st” or “M2-2nd” gear (LC/B ON/OFF)
5. If DTC is detected, go to AT-222, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SAT014K

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.

Revision: 2004 October AT-220 2004 M45

 DTC P1772 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE

Wiring Diagram — AT — LC/B ACS004AA

AT

TCWA0133E

Revision: 2004 October AT-221 2004 M45

 DTC P1772 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE

TCM terminal and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Terminal Wire
Item Condition Data (Approx.)
No. color
When the solenoid valve is operating (when running in
When Battery voltage
Low coast brake M1-1 gear or M2-2 gear)
13 W/L vehicle
solenoid valve When the solenoid valve is not operating (when running in
cruises 0V
“D”)

Diagnostic Procedure ACS004AB

1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “SELECTION FROM MENU” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out the value of “ON OFF SOL” while driving.
Item name Condition Display value
Low coast brake solenoid
ON
ON OFF SOL valve operates.
Other conditions OFF

SCIA4575E

Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Check voltage between TCM connector and ground.
Con-
Terminal Data
Item nector Condition
No. (Approx.)
No.
When the solenoid
Low valve is operating Battery
coast When (when running in M1-1 voltage
13 (W/L) gear or M2-2 gear)
brake F103 vehicle
- Ground
solenoid cruises When the solenoid
valve valve is not operating 0V
SCIA4578E
(when running in “D”)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 2.

Revision: 2004 October AT-222 2004 M45

 DTC P1772 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE

2. CHECK LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT A

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector at the trans-
mission right side. B
3. Check the resistance between terminal and ground.

Solenoid valve Connector No. Terminal No. Resistance (Approx.) AT

Low coast brake
F27 2 - Ground 20 - 40 Ω
solenoid valve
OK or NG D
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 3. SCIA1835E
E
3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY
1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .
F
2. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector
and control valve assembly harness connector. G
Item Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) Continuity
A/T unit assembly
F27 2 (B/R) H
harness connector
Control valve assem- Yes
bly harness connec- F301 4 (B/R)
tor I
4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG SCIA3092E

OK >> GO TO 4. J
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE K

Check valve resistance
● Refer to AT-224, "Component Inspection" . L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" . M

Revision: 2004 October AT-223 2004 M45

 DTC P1772 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE

5. CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect TCM connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector
and TCM connector.
Terminal No.
Item Connector No. Continuity
(Wire color)
TCM F103 13 (W/L)
A/T unit assembly harness Yes
F27 2 (W/L)
connector
SCIA1836E
4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
5. Reinstall any part removed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

6. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-220, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 7.

7. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-86, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Component Inspection ACS004AC

LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE

Resistance Check
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .
3. Disconnect control valve assembly harness connector.
4. Check resistance between terminal and ground.
Terminal No. Resistance
Solenoid Valve Connector No.
(Wire color) (Approx.)
Low coast brake sole-
F301 4 (W) - Ground 20 - 40 Ω
noid valve
5. If NG, replace control valve assembly. Refer to AT-312, "Control
Valve Assembly"

SCIA3093E

Revision: 2004 October AT-224 2004 M45

 DTC P1772 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE

Operation Check
● Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while A
applying battery voltage to the terminal 4 and ground.

AT

SCIA3094E
D

Revision: 2004 October AT-225 2004 M45

 DTC P1774 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION

DTC P1774 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION PFP:31940

Description ACS004AD

● Low coast brake solenoid valve is turned ON or OFF by the TCM in response to signals sent from the
PNP switch, vehicle speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears
will then be shifted to the optimum position.
● This is not only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but also by mechanical mal-
function such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation.
CONSULT-II Reference Value ACS004PQ

Item name Condition Display value

Low coast brake solenoid valve operates. ON
ATF PRES SW 2
Other conditions OFF

On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS004AE

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “LC/B SOLENOID FNCT” with CONSULT-II or P1774 without CONSULT-II is
detected under the following conditions.
– When TCM detects that actual gear ratio is irregular, and relation between gear position and condition of
ATF pressure switch 2 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
– When TCM detects that relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 2 is irregular
during releasing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
Possible Cause ACS004AF

● Harness or connectors
(The solenoid and switch circuits are open or shorted.)
● Low coast brake solenoid valve
● ATF pressure switch 2
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS004AG

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following condition.
Selector lever: “M” position
Gear position: “M1-1st” or “M2-2nd” gear (LC/B ON/OFF)
3. Perform step “2” again.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF, then perform step “1” to “3” again.
5. Check “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-
II. If DTC (P1774) is detected, refer to AT-228, "Diagnostic Pro-
cedure" .
If DTC (P1772) is detected, go to AT-222, "Diagnostic Proce- SAT014K
dure" .
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.

Revision: 2004 October AT-226 2004 M45

 DTC P1774 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION

Wiring Diagram — AT — LC/BF ACS004AH

AT

TCWA0134E

Revision: 2004 October AT-227 2004 M45

 DTC P1774 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION

TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Terminal Wire
Item Condition Data (Approx.)
No. color
When the solenoid valve is operating (when running in M1-1
When Battery voltage
Low coast brake gear or M2-2 gear)
13 W/L vehicle
solenoid valve When the solenoid valve is not operating (when running in
cruises 0V
“D”)
SEL1 (ATF pres-
16 W/G – –
sure switch 2)
40 Y/G DATA BIT1 – –

Diagnostic Procedure ACS004AI

1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” or “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA
MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Accelerate vehicle in the manual mode (“M1-1st” or “M2-2nd”
gear), and confirm the ON/OFF actuation of the “ATF PRES SW
2”.
Item name Condition Display value
Low coast brake solenoid
ON
ATF PRES SW 2 valve operates.
PCIA0067E
Other conditions OFF
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND A/T UNIT ASSEMBLY HARNESS CONNECTOR
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect TCM connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector
and TCM connector.
Terminal No.
Item Connector No. Continuity
(Wire color)
TCM F103 16 (W/G)
A/T unit assembly harness Yes
F26 5 (W/G)
connector
TCM F104 40 (Y/G)
A/T unit assembly harness Yes
F26 2 (Y/G)
connector
TCM F103 13 (W/L)
A/T unit assembly harness Yes
F27 2 (W/L)
connector
4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
5. Reinstall any part removed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.
SCIA3095E

Revision: 2004 October AT-228 2004 M45

 DTC P1774 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION

3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY A

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector B
and control valve assembly harness connector.
Item Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) Continuity
AT
A/T unit assembly
F26 2 (R)
harness connector
Yes
Control valve assem- D
F302 10 (R)
bly harness connector
A/T unit assembly
F26 5 (L)
harness connector
Yes E
Control valve assem-
F302 13 (L)
bly harness connector
A/T unit assembly
harness connector
F27 2 (B/R) F
Yes
Control valve assem-
F301 4 (B/R)
bly harness connector
G
4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
5. Reinstall any part removed.
OK or NG H
OK >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-312,
"Control Valve Assembly" . SCIA3096E

NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power I

in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK DTC
J
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-226, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END K
NG >> GO TO 5.

5. CHECK TCM L
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-86, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
M
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2004 October AT-229 2004 M45

 DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH

DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH PFP:34901

Description ACS004AJ

Manual mode switch is installed in A/T device. It sends manual mode switch, shift up and shift down switch
signals to TCM.
TCM sends the switch signals to unified meter and A/C amp by CAN communication line. Then manual mode
switch position is indicated on the A/T position indicator. For inspection, refer to AT-233, "A/T Position Indica-
tor" .
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ACS004AK

Item name Condition Display value

Manual shift gate position (neutral) ON
MANU MODE SW
Other than the above OFF
Manual shift gate position OFF
NON M-MODE SW
Other than the above ON
Select lever: + side ON
UP SW LEVER
Other than the above OFF
Select lever: - side ON
DOWN SW LEVER
Other than the above OFF

On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS004AL

● This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “MANU MODE SW/CIR” with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM monitors Man-
ual mode, Non manual mode, Up or Down switch signal, and detects as irregular when impossible input
pattern occurs 1 second or more.
Possible Cause ACS004AM

● Harness or connectors
(These switches circuit is open or shorted.)
● Mode select switch (Into control device)
● Position select switch (Into control device)
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS004AN

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine.
4. Move selector lever to “M” position for at least 2 consecutive
seconds.
5. If DTC is detected, go to AT-232, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SAT014K

Revision: 2004 October AT-230 2004 M45

 DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH

Wiring Diagram — AT — MMSW ACS004AO

AT

TCWA0242E

Revision: 2004 October AT-231 2004 M45

 DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH

Diagnostic Procedure ACS004AP

1. CHECK MANUAL MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out ON/OFF switching action of the “MANU MODE SW”,
“NON M-MODE SW”, “UP SW LEVER”, “DOWN SW LEVER”.
Item name Condition Display value
Manual shift gate posi-
ON
MANU MODE SW tion (neutral)
Other than the above OFF
PCIA0064E
Manual shift gate position OFF
NON M-MODE SW
Other than the above ON
Select lever: + side ON
UP SW LEVER
Other than the above OFF
Select lever: - side ON
DOWN SW LEVER
Other than the above OFF

Without CONSULT-II
● Drive vehicle in the manual mode, and confirm that the actual gear position and the meter's indication of
the position mutually coincide when the selector lever is shifted to the “+ (up)” or “- (down)” side (1st ⇔ 5th
gear).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.

2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

Check the following items.
● Power supply. Refer to DI-6, "COMBINATION METERS" .
● Manual mode switch. Refer to AT-233, "Component Inspection" .
● Pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
● Open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connector for A/T device (manual mode
switch).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

3. CHECK DTC
Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to AT-230, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Replace the control device assembly.

Revision: 2004 October AT-232 2004 M45

 DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH

Component Inspection ACS004AQ

MANUAL MODE SWITCH A

Check continuity between terminals.
Connector Terminal No. B
Item Position Continuity
No. (Unit side)

Manual mode Auto 4-5

select switch Manual 1-4 AT
M97 Yes
Manual mode Up 3-4
position select
switch Down 2-4
D
SCIA4626E

A/T Position Indicator ACS004AR

E
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS
F
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for A/T with G
CONSULT-II and read out the value of “GEAR”.
3. Drive vehicle in the manual mode, and confirm that the actual
gear position and the meter's indication of the position mutually H
coincide when the select lever is shifted to the “+ (up)” or “-
(down)” side (1st ⇔ 5th gear).
OK or NG I
OK >> INSPECTION END PCIA0065E

NG >> Check the following items.

A/T Position Indicator Symptom Chart J
Items Presumed location of trouble
Manual mode switch
The actual gear position does not change, or shifting into the K
manual mode is not possible (no gear shifting in the manual mode ● Refer to AT-230, "DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH" .
possible). A/T main system (Fail-safe function actuated)
The A/T position indicator is not indicated.
● Refer to AT-92, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" .
L
The actual gear position changes, but the A/T position indicator is Execute the self-diagnosis function.
not indicated. ● Refer to AT-92, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" .

The actual gear position and the indication on the A/T position Execute the self-diagnosis function. M
indicator do not coincide. ● Refer to AT-92, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" .

Only a specific position or positions is/are not indicated on the A/T Check the combination meter.
position indicator. ● Refer to DI-6, "COMBINATION METERS" .

Revision: 2004 October AT-233 2004 M45

 DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1

DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1 PFP:25240

Description ACS004AS

Fail-safe function to detect front brake clutch solenoid valve condition.

CONSULT-II Reference Value ACS004PR

Item name Condition Display value

Front brake solenoid valve operates. ON
ATF PRES SW 1
Other conditions OFF

On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS004AT

● This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “ATF PRES SW 1/CIRC” with CONSULT-II is detected, when TCM detects that
actual gear ratio is normal, and relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 1 is
irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
Possible Cause ACS004AU

● ATF pressure switch 1

● Harness or connectors
(The switch circuit is open or shorted.)
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS004AV

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following condition.
ACCELE POS: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8
Selector lever: “D” position
Gear position: 3rd Þ 4th Gear (FR/B ON/OFF)
3. Perform step “2” again.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF, then perform step “1” to “3” again.
5. Check “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-
II.
If DTC (P1841) is detected, go to AT-236, "Diagnostic Proce- SAT014K
dure" .
If DTC (P1757) is detected, go to AT-191, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

Revision: 2004 October AT-234 2004 M45

 DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1

Wiring Diagram — AT — FPSW1 ACS004AW

AT

TCWA0136E

Revision: 2004 October AT-235 2004 M45

 DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1

TCM terminal and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Terminal Wire
Item Condition Data (Approx.)
No. color
When When front brake solenoid valve OFF. Battery voltage
PSB2 (ATF pres-
35 B/Y vehicle
sure switch 1) When front brake solenoid valve ON. 0V
starts

Diagnostic Procedure ACS004AX

1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” or “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA
MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Accelerate vehicle in “D” position (3rd Þ 4th gear), and confirm
the ON/OFF actuation of the “ATF PRES SW 1”.
Item name Condition Display value
Front brake solenoid
ON
ATF PRES SW 1 valve operates.
Other conditions OFF
PCIA0067E

Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Accelerate vehicle in “D” position (3rd Þ 4th gear).
Connector Terminal No.
Solenoid valve Voltage
No. (Wire color)

Front brake solenoid OFF Battery voltage

F104 35 (B/Y) - Ground
valve ON Approx. 0 V
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. PCIA0066E

NG >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect TCM connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector
and TCM connector.
Terminal No.
Item Connector No. Continuity
(Wire color)
TCM F104 35 (B/Y)
A/T unit assembly harness Yes
F26 3 (B/Y)
connector

4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.

5. Reinstall any part removed.
SCIA3097E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

Revision: 2004 October AT-236 2004 M45

 DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1

3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY A

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector B
and control valve assembly harness connector.
Item Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) Continuity
AT
A/T unit assembly
F26 3 (G)
harness connector
Control valve assem- Yes
D
bly harness connec- F302 12 (G)
tor
4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
E
OK or NG SCIA3098E

OK >> Replace control valve assembly. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
F
4. CHECK DTC
Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to AT-189, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . G
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 5. H

5. CHECK TCM
I
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-86, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG J
OK >> Replace control valve assembly. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
K

Revision: 2004 October AT-237 2004 M45

 DTC P1843 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 3

DTC P1843 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 3 PFP:25240

Description ACS004AY

Fail-safe function to detect input clutch solenoid valve condition.

CONSULT-II Reference Value ACS004PS

Item name Condition Display value

Input clutch solenoid valve operates. OFF
ATF PRES SW 3
Other conditions ON

On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS004AZ

● This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “ATF PRES SW 3/CIRC” with CONSULT-II is detected, when TCM detects that
actual gear ratio is normal, and relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 3 is
irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
Possible Cause ACS004B0

● ATF pressure switch 3

● Harness or connectors
(The switch circuit is open or shorted.)
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS004B1

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following condition.
ACCELE POS: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8
Selector lever: “D” position
Gear position: 3rd Þ 4th Gear (I/C ON/OFF)
3. Perform step “2” again.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF, then perform step “1” to “3” again.
5. Check “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-
II.
If DTC (P1843) is detected, go to AT-240, "Diagnostic Proce- SAT014K
dure" .
If DTC (P1752) is detected, go to AT-181, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

Revision: 2004 October AT-238 2004 M45

 DTC P1843 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 3

Wiring Diagram — AT — FPSW3 ACS004B2

AT

TCWA0137E

Revision: 2004 October AT-239 2004 M45

 DTC P1843 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 3

TCM terminals and data are reference value.

Terminal Wire
Item Condition Data (Approx.)
No. color
SEL3 (ATF pres-
4 P/L – –
sure switch 3)
40 Y/G DATA BIT1 – –

Diagnostic Procedure ACS004B3

1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” or “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA
MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Accelerate vehicle in “D” position (3rd Þ 4th gear), and confirm
the ON/OFF actuation of the “ATF PRES SW 3”.
Item name Condition Display value
Input clutch solenoid
OFF
ATF PRES SW 3 valve operates.
Other conditions ON
PCIA0067E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND A/T UNIT ASSEMBLY HARNESS CONNECTOR
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect TCM connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector
and TCM connector.
Terminal No.
Item Connector No. Continuity
(Wire color)
TCM F103 4 (P/L)
A/T unit assembly harness Yes
F26 7 (P/L)
connector
TCM F104 40 (Y/G)
A/T unit assembly harness Yes
F26 2 (Y/G) SCIA3099E
connector

4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.

5. Reinstall any part removed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

Revision: 2004 October AT-240 2004 M45

 DTC P1843 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 3

3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY A

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector B
and control valve assembly harness connector.
Item Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) Continuity
AT
A/T unit assembly
F26 2 (R)
harness connector
Yes
Control valve assem- D
F302 10 (R)
bly harness connector
A/T unit assembly
F26 7 (W)
harness connector
Yes E
SCIA3100E
Control valve assem-
F302 15 (W)
bly harness connector

4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. F

OK or NG
OK >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. G
4. CHECK DTC
Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to AT-238, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . H
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 5. I

5. CHECK TCM
J
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-86, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG K
OK >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
L

Revision: 2004 October AT-241 2004 M45

 DTC P1845 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 5

DTC P1845 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 5 PFP:25240

Description ACS004B4

Fail-safe function to detect direct clutch solenoid valve condition.

CONSULT-II Reference Value ACS004PT

Item name Condition Display value

Direct clutch solenoid valve operates. OFF
ATF PRES SW 5
Other conditions ON

On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS004B5

● This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “ATF PRES SW 5/CIRC” with CONSULT-II is detected, when TCM detects that
actual gear ratio is normal, and relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 5 is
irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
Possible Cause ACS004B6

● ATF pressure switch 5

● Harness or connectors
(The switch circuit is open or shorted.)
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS004B7

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following condition.
ACCELE POS: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8
Selector lever: “D” position
Gear position: 1st Þ 2nd Gear (D/C ON/OFF)
3. Perform step “2” again.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF, then perform step “1” to “3” again.
5. Check “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-
II.
If DTC (P1845) is detected, go to AT-244, "Diagnostic Proce- SAT014K
dure" .
If DTC (P1762) is detected, go to AT-201, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

Revision: 2004 October AT-242 2004 M45

 DTC P1845 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 5

Wiring Diagram — AT — FPSW5 ACS004B8

AT

TCWA0138E

Revision: 2004 October AT-243 2004 M45

 DTC P1845 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 5

TCM terminals and data are reference value.

Terminal Wire
Item Condition Data (Approx.)
No. color
SEL2 (ATF pres-
22 P/B – –
sure switch 5)
40 Y/G DATA BIT1 – –

Diagnostic Procedure ACS004B9

1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” or “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA
MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Accelerate vehicle in “D” position (1st Þ 2nd gear), and confirm
the ON/OFF actuation of the “ATF PRES SW 5”.
Item name Condition Display value
Direct clutch solenoid
OFF
ATF PRES SW 5 valve operates.
Other conditions ON
PCIA0067E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND A/T UNIT ASSEMBLY HARNESS CONNECTOR
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect TCM connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector
and TCM connector.
Terminal No.
Item Connector No. Continuity
(Wire color)
TCM F103 22 (P/B)
A/T unit assembly harness Yes
F26 6 (P/B)
connector
TCM F104 40 (Y/G)
A/T unit assembly harness Yes
F26 2 (Y/G) SCIA3101E
connector

4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.

5. Reinstall any part removed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

Revision: 2004 October AT-244 2004 M45

 DTC P1845 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 5

3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY A

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector B
and control valve assembly harness connector.
Item Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) Continuity
AT
A/T unit assembly
F26 2 (R)
harness connector
Yes
Control valve assem- D
F302 10 (R)
bly harness connector
A/T unit assembly
F26 6 (GY)
harness connector
Yes E
SCIA3102E
Control valve assem-
F302 14 (GY)
bly harness connector

4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. F

OK or NG
OK >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. G
4. CHECK DTC
Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to AT-242, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . H
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 5. I

5. CHECK TCM
J
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-86, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG K
OK >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
L

Revision: 2004 October AT-245 2004 M45

 DTC P1846 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 6

DTC P1846 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 6 PFP:25240

Description ACS004BA

Fail-safe function to detect high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve condition.
CONSULT-II Reference Value ACS004PU

Item name Condition Display value

High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve
OFF
ATF PRES SW 6 operates.
Other conditions ON

On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS004BB

● This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “ATF PRES SW 6/CIRC” with CONSULT-II is detected, when TCM detects that
actual gear ratio is normal, and relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 6 is
irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
Possible Cause ACS004BC

● ATF pressure switch 6

● Harness or connectors
(The switch circuit is open or shorted.)
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS004BD

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following condition.
ACCELE POS: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8
Selector lever: “D” position
Gear position: 2nd Þ 3rd Gear (HLR/C ON/OFF)
3. Perform step “2” again.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF, then perform step “1” to “3” again.
5. Check “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-
II.
If DTC (P1846) is detected, go to AT-248, "Diagnostic Proce- SAT014K
dure" .
If DTC (P1767) is detected, go to AT-211, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

Revision: 2004 October AT-246 2004 M45

 DTC P1846 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 6

Wiring Diagram — AT — FPSW6 ACS004BE

AT

TCWA0139E

Revision: 2004 October AT-247 2004 M45

 DTC P1846 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 6

TCM terminal and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Terminal Wire
Item Condition Data (Approx.)
No. color
When When high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve ON. 0V
PSC2 (ATF pres-
26 G/Y vehicle
sure switch 6) When high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve OFF. Battery voltage
cruises

Diagnostic Procedure ACS004BF

1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” or “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA
MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Accelerate vehicle in “D” position (2nd Þ 3rd gear), and confirm
the ON/OFF actuation of the “ATF PRES SW 6”.
Item name Condition Display value
High and low reverse
clutch solenoid valve OFF
ATF PRES SW 6 operates.
PCIA0067E
Other conditions ON

Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Accelerate vehicle in “D” position (2nd Þ 3rd gear).

Connector Terminal No.

Solenoid valve Voltage
No. (Wire color)

High and low reverse OFF Battery voltage

F104 26 (G/Y) - Ground
clutch solenoid valve ON Approx. 0 V
OK or NG
PCIA0068E
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect TCM connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector
and TCM connector.
Terminal No.
Item Connector No. Continuity
(Wire color)
TCM F104 26 (G/Y)
A/T unit assembly harness Yes
F26 4 (G/Y)
connector

4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.

5. Reinstall any part removed.
SCIA3103E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

Revision: 2004 October AT-248 2004 M45

 DTC P1846 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 6

3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY A

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector B
and control valve assembly harness connector.
Item Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) Continuity
AT
A/T unit assembly
F26 4 (Y)
harness connector
Yes
Control valve assem- D
F302 11 (Y)
bly harness connector
4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG E
SCIA3104E
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
F
4. CHECK DTC
Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to AT-246, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG G
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 5.
H
5. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-86, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
I
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" . J
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2004 October AT-249 2004 M45

 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION, MANUAL MODE, BRAKE AND THROTTLE POSI-
TION SWITCH CIRCUIT

PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION, MANUAL MODE, BRAKE AND THROTTLE POSI-

TION SWITCH CIRCUIT PFP:31918

CONSULT-II Reference Value ACS0064O

Item name Condition Display value

When setting selector lever to “P” position. OFF
PNP SW 1
When setting selector lever to “N” position. ON
When setting selector lever to “P” position. OFF
PNP SW 2
When setting selector lever to “D” position. ON
When setting selector lever to “D” position. OFF
PNP SW 3
When setting selector lever to “R” position. ON
When setting selector lever to “P” position. OFF
PNP SW 4
When setting selector lever to “R” position. ON
When setting selector lever to “N” or “P” posi-
N·P
tion.
SLCT LVR POSI
When setting selector lever to “R” position. R
When setting selector lever to “D” position. D
Manual shift gate position (neutral) ON
MANU MODE SW
Other than the above OFF
Manual shift gate position OFF
NON M-MODE SW
Other than the above ON
Select lever: + side ON
UP SW LEVER
Other than the above OFF
Select lever: - side ON
DOWN SW LEVER
Other than the above OFF
Depressed brake pedal. ON
BRAKE SW
Released brake pedal. OFF
Released accelerator pedal. ON
CLSO THL POS
Fully depressed accelerator pedal. OFF
Fully depressed accelerator pedal. ON
W/O THL POS
Released accelerator pedal. OFF

Revision: 2004 October AT-250 2004 M45

 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION, MANUAL MODE, BRAKE AND THROTTLE POSI-
TION SWITCH CIRCUIT

Diagnostic Procedure ACS001FO

1. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT A

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) B
2. Select “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T”
with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out “N·P”, “R” and “D” position switches moving selector AT
lever to each position.
Item name Condition Display value (Approx.) D
When setting selector
lever to “N” or “P” posi- N·P
tion.
E
PCIA0034E
SLCT LVR POSI When setting selector
R
lever to “R” position.
When setting selector
D F
lever to “D” position.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. G
NG >> GO TO 2.

2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM H

Check the following items.
● Disconnection or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and PNP switch 1, 2, 3, 4.
● Disconnection or short-circuit in the harness between the PNP switch 3 monitor and TCM. I
● PNP switch. Refer to AT-110, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" .
OK or NG
J
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

3. CHECK MANUAL MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT K

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) L
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out ON/OFF switching action of the “MANU MODE SW”, M
“NON M-MODE SW”, “UP SW LEVER”, “DOWN SW LEVER”.
Item name Condition Display value
Manual shift gate posi-
ON
MANU MODE SW tion (neutral)
Other than the above OFF
PCIA0064E
Manual shift gate position OFF
NON M-MODE SW
Other than the above ON
Select lever: + side ON
UP SW LEVER
Other than the above OFF
Select lever: - side ON
DOWN SW LEVER
Other than the above OFF

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
Revision: 2004 October AT-251 2004 M45
 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION, MANUAL MODE, BRAKE AND THROTTLE POSI-
TION SWITCH CIRCUIT

4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

Check the following items.
● Manual mode switch. Refer to AT-230, "DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH" .
● Check the connector housing for missing, loosening, bending or falling down of any terminal.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

5. CHECK BRAKE SWITCH CIRCUIT

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out ON/OFF switching action of the “BRAKE SW”.
Item name Condition Display value
Depressed brake pedal. ON
BRAKE SW
Released brake pedal. OFF

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Check the following items. PCIA0070E

● Stop lamp switch. Refer to BR-6, "BRAKE PEDAL" .

● Combination meter. Refer to DI-6, "COMBINATION METERS" .

6. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Depress accelerator pedal and read out the value of “CLSD THL
POS” and “W/O THL POS”.
Monitor Item
Accelerator Pedal Operation
CLSD THL POS W/O THL POS
Released ON OFF
Fully depressed OFF ON PCIA0070E

4. Perform the self-diagnosis for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

7. CHECK DTC
Perform SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE.
● Refer to AT-89, "CONSULT-II" .
● CAN Communication Line. Refer to AT-103 .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 8.

Revision: 2004 October AT-252 2004 M45

 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION, MANUAL MODE, BRAKE AND THROTTLE POSI-
TION SWITCH CIRCUIT

8. CHECK TCM A
1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-86, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG B
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
AT

Revision: 2004 October AT-253 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS PFP:00007

Wiring Diagram — AT — NONDTC ACS001FP

TCWA0140E

Revision: 2004 October AT-254 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

AT

TCWA0141E

Revision: 2004 October AT-255 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Terminal Wire
Item Condition Data (Approx.)
No. color
6 L CAN-H – –
7 R CAN-L – –
K-line
23 PU/W (CONSULT-II sig- The terminal is connected to the Data link connector for CONSULT-II.
nal)

BACK-UP LAMP Selector lever in “R” position. 0V

41 R IGN ON
relay Selector lever in other positions. Battery voltage

A/T CHECK Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On ACS001FQ

SYMPTOM:
A/T CHECK indicator lamp does not come on for about 2 seconds when turning ignition switch to ON.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
Execute the self-diagnosis.
Is a malfunction in the CAN communication indicated in the results?
YES >> Check the CAN communication line. Refer to AT-103, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION
LINE" .
NO >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE

1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Check voltage between TCM connector terminals and ground.
Refer to AT-141, "Wiring Diagram — AT — POWER" .
Terminal No.
Item Connector No. Voltage
(Wire color)
F103 9 (W/B) - Ground
TCM 33 (G/R) - Ground Battery voltage
F104
42 (G/R) - Ground
3. Turn ignition switch OFF.
4. Check voltage between TCM connector terminals and ground. SCIA1672E

Refer to AT-141, "Wiring Diagram — AT — POWER" .

Terminal No.
Item Connector No. Voltage
(Wire color)
F103 9 (W/B) - Ground Battery voltage
TCM 33 (G/R) - Ground
F104 0V
42 (G/R) - Ground

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.

Revision: 2004 October AT-256 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM A

Check the following items:
● Harness for short or open between battery and TCM connector terminal 9
● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and TCM connector terminals 33 and 42 B
● 10A fuse [No. 32 or 35, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
● Ignition switch, Refer to PG-2, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" .
AT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
D
4. CHECK TCM GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. E
2. Disconnect the TCM connector.
3. Check continuity between terminals 5 (B), 14 (B), 24 (B), 46 (B)
and ground. Refer to AT-141, "Wiring Diagram — AT — F
POWER" .
Continuity should exist.
G
4. If OK, check the harness for short-circuit to ground or the power
source.
OK or NG
H
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair the short-circuit in the harness or connector to
ground or the power source. SCIA1161E

I
5. CHECK A/T CHECK INDICATOR LAMP CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. J
2. Check the combination meter.
Refer to DI-6, "COMBINATION METERS" .
OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace the combination meter. Refer to DI-19, "Removal and Installation of Combination Meter" .
L
6. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again. Refer to AT-56, "Check Before Engine is Started" .
OK or NG M
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 7.

7. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-86, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2004 October AT-257 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” or “N” Position ACS001FR

SYMPTOM:
● Engine cannot be started with selector lever in “P” or “N” position.
● Engine can be started with selector lever in “D”or “R” position.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT
Execute self-diagnosis.
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate PNP switch?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-110, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION
SWITCH" .
NO >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK CONTROL LINKAGE

Check the control linkage.
● Refer to AT-305, "Checking of A/T Position" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Adjust control linkage. Refer to AT-305, "Adjustment of
A/T Position" .

SCIA1612E

3. CHECK STARTING SYSTEM

Check starting system. Refer to SC-9, "STARTING SYSTEM" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2004 October AT-258 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves When Pushed ACS001FS

SYMPTOM: A
Even though the selector lever is set in “P” position, the parking mechanism is not actuated, allowing
the vehicle to be moved when it is pushed.
B
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT
AT
Execute self-diagnosis.
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate PNP switch?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-110, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION D
SWITCH" .
NO >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK CONTROL LINKAGE E

Check the control linkage.

● Refer to AT-305, "Checking of A/T Position" . F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Adjust control linkage. Refer to AT-305, "Adjustment of G
A/T Position" .

SCIA1612E

I
3. CHECK PARKING COMPONENTS
Check parking components. Refer to AT-325, "Parking Components" .
OK or NG J
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
K

Revision: 2004 October AT-259 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves ACS001FT

SYMPTOM:
Vehicle moves forward or backward when selecting “N” position.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT
Execute self-diagnosis.
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate PNP switch?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-110, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION
SWITCH" .
NO >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK CONTROL LINKAGE

Check the control linkage.
● Refer to AT-305, "Checking of A/T Position" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Adjust control linkage. Refer to AT-305, "Adjustment of
A/T Position" .

SCIA1612E

3. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL

Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-14, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Refill ATF.

SAT638A

4. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
Check" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged,
repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63, "Symp-
tom Chart" .

SCIA5199E

Revision: 2004 October AT-260 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

5. CHECK SYMPTOM A
Check again. Refer to AT-56, "Check at Idle" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END B
NG >> GO TO 6.

6. PERFORM TCM INSPECTION AT

1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.

2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
D
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. E

Revision: 2004 October AT-261 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

Large Shock (“N” to “D” Position) ACS001FU

SYMPTOM:
A noticeable shock occurs when the selector lever is shifted from “N” to “D” position.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Execute self-diagnosis.
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate A/T fluid temperature sensor, engine speed signal, accelerator pedal
position sensor, ATF pressure switch 1, front brake solenoid valve, CAN communication line?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-154, "DTC P1710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE
SENSOR CIRCUIT" , AT-121, "DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL" ., AT-152, "DTC P1705
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR" , AT-234, "DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1" , AT-189,
"DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE" ,AT-189, "DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLE-
NOID VALVE" , AT-103, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
NO >> GO TO 2.

2. ENGINE IDLE SPEED

Check the engine idle speed. Refer to EC-32, "Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair.

3. CHECK CONTROL LINKAGE

Check the control linkage.
● Refer to AT-305, "Checking of A/T Position" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Adjust control linkage. Refer to AT-305, "Adjustment of
A/T Position" .

SCIA1612E

4. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL

Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-14, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Refill ATF.

SAT638A

Revision: 2004 October AT-262 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

5. CHECK LINE PRESSURE A

Check line pressure at idle with selector lever in “D” position. Refer
to AT-53, "LINE PRESSURE TEST" .
OK or NG B
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG - 1 >> Line pressure high: GO TO 6.
NG - 2 >> Line pressure low: GO TO 7. AT

D
SAT494G

6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM E

1. Check control valve assembly. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .

2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-342, "DISASSEMBLY" .
F
3. Check the following items:
– Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-357, "Oil Pump" .
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
H
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1. Check control valve assembly. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-342, "DISASSEMBLY" . I
3. Check the following items:
– Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-357, "Oil Pump" .
J
– Power train system. Refer to AT-342, "DISASSEMBLY" .
– Transmission case. Refer to AT-342, "DISASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
L
8. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION
1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition M
Check" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 12.

SCIA5199E

Revision: 2004 October AT-263 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63,
"Symptom Chart" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

10. CHECK SYMPTOM

Check again. Refer to AT-56, "Check at Idle" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 11.

11. CHECK TCM

1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-86, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

12. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63,
"Symptom Chart" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2004 October AT-264 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward in “R” Position ACS001FV

SYMPTOM: A
The vehicle does not creep in “R” position, or an extreme lack of acceleration is observed.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE B
1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Execute self-diagnosis. AT
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate accelerator pedal position sensor, ATF pressure switch 6, high and low
reverse clutch solenoid valve, CAN communication line, PNP switch?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-152, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SEN- D
SOR" , AT-246, "DTC P1846 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 6" , AT-209, "DTC P1767 HIGH AND
LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-103, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION
LINE" , AT-110, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" .
NO >> GO TO 2. E

2. CHECK CONTROL LINKAGE

F
Check the control linkage.
● Refer to AT-305, "Checking of A/T Position" .
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Adjust control linkage. Refer to AT-305, "Adjustment of
A/T Position" .
H

I
SCIA1612E

3. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL J

Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-14, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. K
NG >> Refill ATF.

M
SAT638A

4. CHECK STALL TEST

Check stall revolution with selector lever in “M” and “R” positions.
Refer to AT-52, "STALL TEST" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
OK in “M” position, NG in “R” position>>[Link] A/T. Refer
to AT-342, "DISASSEMBLY" .
2. Check the following items. If any items are damaged,
repair or replace damaged parts.
– Reverse brake

NG in both “M” and “R” positions>>GO TO 7.

SAT493G

Revision: 2004 October AT-265 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

5. CHECK LINE PRESSURE

Check the line pressure with the engine idling. Refer to AT-53, "LINE
PRESSURE TEST" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG - 1 >> Line pressure high. GO TO 6.
NG - 2 >> Line pressure low. GO TO 7.

SAT494G

6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

1. Check control valve assembly. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-342, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following items:
– Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-357, "Oil Pump" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

1. Check control valve assembly. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-342, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following items:
– Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-357, "Oil Pump" .
– Power train system. Refer to AT-342, "DISASSEMBLY" .
– Transmission case. Refer to AT-342, "DISASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

8. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
Check" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 12.

SCIA5199E

Revision: 2004 October AT-266 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM A

● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63,
"Symptom Chart" .
OK or NG B
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
AT
10. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again. Refer to AT-56, "Check at Idle" .
D
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 11.
E
11. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-86, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . F
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END G
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

12. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM H

● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63,
"Symptom Chart" .
OK or NG I
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
J

Revision: 2004 October AT-267 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward in “D” Position ACS001FW

SYMPTOM:
Vehicle does not creep forward when selecting “D” position.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Execute self-diagnosis.
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate accelerator pedal position sensor, CAN communication line, PNP
switch?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-152, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SEN-
SOR" , AT-103, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" , AT-110, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEU-
TRAL POSITION SWITCH" .
NO >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK CONTROL LINKAGE

Check the control linkage.
● Refer to AT-305, "Checking of A/T Position" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Adjust control linkage. Refer to AT-305, "Adjustment of
A/T Position" .

SCIA1612E

3. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL

Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-14, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Refill ATF.

SAT638A

4. CHECK STALL TEST

Check stall revolution with selector lever in “D” position. Refer to AT-
52, "STALL TEST" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 7.

SAT493G

Revision: 2004 October AT-268 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

5. CHECK LINE PRESSURE A

Check line pressure at idle with selector lever in “D” position. Refer
to AT-53, "LINE PRESSURE TEST" .
OK or NG B
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG - 1 >> Line pressure high. GO TO 6.
NG - 2 >> Line pressure low. GO TO 7. AT

D
SAT494G

6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM E

1. Check control valve assembly. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .

2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-342, "DISASSEMBLY" .
F
3. Check the following items:
– Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-357, "Oil Pump" .
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
H
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1. Check control valve assembly. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-342, "DISASSEMBLY" . I
3. Check the following items:
– Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-357, "Oil Pump" .
J
– Power train system. Refer to AT-342, "DISASSEMBLY" .
– Transmission case. Refer to AT-342, "DISASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
L
8. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION
1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition M
Check" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 12.

SCIA5199E

Revision: 2004 October AT-269 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63,
"Symptom Chart" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

10. CHECK SYMPTOM

Check again. Refer to AT-56, "Check at Idle" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 11.

11. CHECK TCM

1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-86, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

12. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63,
"Symptom Chart" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2004 October AT-270 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 ACS001FX

SYMPTOM: A
Vehicle cannot be started from D1 on cruise test - Part 1 and Part 2.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE B
1. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Check if vehicle creeps in “R” position. AT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Refer to AT-265, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward in “R” Position" . D
2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Execute self-diagnosis. E
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic results?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system.
NO >> GO TO 3. F

3. CHECK ACCELERATOR POSITION (APP) SENSOR

G
Check accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor. Refer to AT-152, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SEN-
SOR"
OK or NG
H
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor.

4. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL I

Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-14, "Checking A/T Fluid" .

OK or NG J
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Refill ATF.
K

SAT638A

M
5. CHECK LINE PRESSURE
Check line pressure at the engine stall point. Refer to AT-53, "LINE
PRESSURE TEST" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG - 1 >> Line pressure high. GO TO 6.
NG - 2 >> Line pressure low. GO TO 7.

SAT494G

Revision: 2004 October AT-271 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

1. Check control valve assembly. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-342, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following items:
– Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-357, "Oil Pump" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

1. Check control valve assembly. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-342, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following items:
– Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-357, "Oil Pump" .
– Power train system. Refer to AT-342, "DISASSEMBLY" .
– Transmission case. Refer to AT-342, "DISASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

8. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
Check" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 12.

SCIA5199E

9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63,
"Symptom Chart" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

10. CHECK SYMPTOM

Check again. Refer to AT-58, "Cruise Test - Part 1" , AT-60, "Cruise Test - Part 2" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 11.

Revision: 2004 October AT-272 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

11. CHECK TCM A

1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-86, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG B
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
AT
12. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63,
D
"Symptom Chart" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. E
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2004 October AT-273 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 ACS001FY

SYMPTOM:
The vehicle does not shift-up from D1 to D2 gear at the specified speed.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Check if vehicle creeps forward in “D” position and vehicle can be started from D1.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Refer to AT-268, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward in “D” Position" , AT-271, "Vehicle Cannot Be
Started From D1" .

2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS

Execute self-diagnosis.
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate ATF pressure switch 5, direct clutch solenoid valve, accelerator pedal
position sensor, vehicle speed sensor A/T (revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor MTR?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-242, "DTC P1845 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 5" ,
AT-199, "DTC P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-152, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE
POSITION SENSOR" , AT-116, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION
SENSOR)" , AT-165, "DTC P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR" .
NO >> GO TO 3.

3. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL

Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-14, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Refill ATF.

SAT638A

4. CHECK LINE PRESSURE

Check line pressure at the engine stall point. Refer to AT-53, "LINE
PRESSURE TEST" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG - 1 >> Line pressure high. GO TO 5.
NG - 2 >> Line pressure low. GO TO 6.

SAT494G

Revision: 2004 October AT-274 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM A

1. Check control valve assembly. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-342, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following items: B
– Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-357, "Oil Pump" .
OK or NG
AT
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM D

1. Check control valve assembly. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .

2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-342, "DISASSEMBLY" . E
3. Check the following items:
– Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-357, "Oil Pump" .
– Power train system. Refer to AT-342, "DISASSEMBLY" . F
– Transmission case. Refer to AT-342, "DISASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG
G
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

7. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION H

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .

2. Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition I
Check" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. J
NG >> GO TO 11.

SCIA5199E L

8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63, M
"Symptom Chart" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

9. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again. Refer to AT-58, "Cruise Test - Part 1" , AT-60, "Cruise Test - Part 2" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 10.

Revision: 2004 October AT-275 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

10. CHECK TCM

1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-86, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63,
"Symptom Chart" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2004 October AT-276 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3 ACS001FZ

SYMPTOM: A
The vehicle does not shift-up from D2 to D3 gear at the specified speed.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE B
1. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Check if vehicle creeps forward in “D” position and vehicle can be started from D1. AT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Refer to AT-268, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward in “D” Position" ,AT-271, "Vehicle Cannot Be D
Started From D1" .

2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS E

Execute self-diagnosis.
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate ATF pressure switch 6, high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve,
accelerator pedal position sensor, vehicle speed sensor A/T (revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor F
MTR?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-246, "DTC P1846 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 6" ,
AT-209, "DTC P1767 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-152, "DTC G
P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR" , AT-116, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T
(REVOLUTION SENSOR)" , AT-165, "DTC P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR" .
NO >> GO TO 3.
H
3. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-14, "Checking A/T Fluid" . I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Refill ATF. J

SAT638A L

4. CHECK LINE PRESSURE

Check line pressure at the engine stall point. Refer to AT-53, "LINE M
PRESSURE TEST" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG - 1 >> Line pressure high. GO TO 5.
NG - 2 >> Line pressure low. GO TO 6.

SAT494G

Revision: 2004 October AT-277 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

1. Check control valve assembly. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-342, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following items:
– Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-357, "Oil Pump" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

1. Check control valve assembly. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-342, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following items:
– Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-357, "Oil Pump" .
– Power train system. Refer to AT-342, "DISASSEMBLY" .
– Transmission case. Refer to AT-342, "DISASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

7. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
Check" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 11.

SCIA5199E

8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63,
"Symptom Chart" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

9. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again. Refer to AT-58, "Cruise Test - Part 1" , AT-60, "Cruise Test - Part 2" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 10.

Revision: 2004 October AT-278 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

10. CHECK TCM A

1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-86, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG B
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
AT
11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63,
D
"Symptom Chart" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. E
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2004 October AT-279 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4 ACS001G0

SYMPTOM:
● The vehicle does not shift-up from D3 to D4 gear at the specified speed.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Check if vehicle creeps forward in “D” position and vehicle can be started from D1.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Refer to AT-268, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward in “D” Position" , AT-271, "Vehicle Cannot Be
Started From D1" .

2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS

Execute self-diagnosis.
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate ATF pressure switch 1, ATF pressure switch 3, front brake solenoid
valve, input clutch solenoid valve, accelerator pedal position sensor, vehicle speed sensor A/T (revolution sen-
sor) and vehicle speed sensor MTR?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-234, "DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1" ,
AT-238, "DTC P1843 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 3" , AT-179, "DTC P1752 INPUT CLUTCH
SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-189, "DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-152, "DTC
P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR" , AT-116, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T
(REVOLUTION SENSOR)" , AT-165, "DTC P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR" .
NO >> GO TO 3.

3. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL

Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-14, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Refill ATF.

SAT638A

4. CHECK LINE PRESSURE

Check line pressure at the engine stall point. Refer to AT-53, "LINE
PRESSURE TEST" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG - 1 >> Line pressure high. GO TO 5.
NG - 2 >> Line pressure low. GO TO 6.

SAT494G

Revision: 2004 October AT-280 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM A

1. Check control valve assembly. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-342, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following items: B
– Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-357, "Oil Pump" .
OK or NG
AT
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM D

1. Check control valve assembly. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .

2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-342, "DISASSEMBLY" . E
3. Check the following items:
– Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-357, "Oil Pump" .
– Power train system. Refer to AT-342, "DISASSEMBLY" . F
– Transmission case. Refer to AT-342, "DISASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG
G
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

7. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION H

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .

2. Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition I
Check" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. J
NG >> GO TO 11.

SCIA5199E L

8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63, M
"Symptom Chart" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

9. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again. Refer to AT-58, "Cruise Test - Part 1" , AT-60, "Cruise Test - Part 2" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 10.

Revision: 2004 October AT-281 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

10. CHECK TCM

1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-86, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63,
"Symptom Chart" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2004 October AT-282 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

A/T Does Not Shift: D4 → D5 ACS001G1

SYMPTOM: A
● The vehicle does not shift-up from D4 to D5 gear at the specified speed.
● The vehicle does not shift-up from D4 to D5 gear unless A/T is warmed up.
B
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
AT
Check if vehicle creeps forward in “D” position and vehicle can be started from D1.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. D
NG >> Refer to AT-268, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward in “D” Position" ,AT-271, "Vehicle Cannot Be
Started From D1" .

2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS E

Execute self-diagnosis.
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate ATF pressure switch 1, ATF pressure switch 5, front brake solenoid F
valve, direct clutch solenoid valve, accelerator pedal position sensor, turbine revolution sensor, vehicle speed
sensor A/T (revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor MTR?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-234, "DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1" , G
AT-242, "DTC P1845 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 5" , AT-189, "DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE
SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-199, "DTC P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-152,
"DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR" , AT-160, "DTC P1716 TURBINE REVOLUTION
H
SENSOR" , AT-116, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)" ,
AT-165, "DTC P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR" .
NO >> GO TO 3.
I
3. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-14, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Refill ATF.
K

SAT638A
M
4. CHECK LINE PRESSURE
Check line pressure at the engine stall point. Refer to AT-53, "LINE
PRESSURE TEST" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG - 1 >> Line pressure high. GO TO 5.
NG - 2 >> Line pressure low. GO TO 6.

SAT494G

Revision: 2004 October AT-283 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

1. Check control valve assembly. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-342, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following items:
– Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-357, "Oil Pump" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

1. Check control valve assembly. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-342, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following items:
– Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-357, "Oil Pump" .
– Power train system. Refer to AT-342, "DISASSEMBLY" .
– Transmission case. Refer to AT-342, "DISASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

7. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
Check" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 11.

SCIA5199E

8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63,
"Symptom Chart" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

9. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again. Refer to AT-58, "Cruise Test - Part 1" , AT-60, "Cruise Test - Part 2" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 10.

Revision: 2004 October AT-284 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

10. CHECK TCM A

1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-86, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG B
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
AT
11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63,
D
"Symptom Chart" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. E
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2004 October AT-285 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up ACS001G2

SYMPTOM:
A/T does not perform lock-up at the specified speed.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Execute self-diagnosis.
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate torque converter clutch solenoid valve, engine speed signal, turbine rev-
olution sensor, accelerator pedal position sensor, CAN communication line?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-123, "DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER
CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-121, "DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL" , AT-160, "DTC
P1716 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR" , AT-152, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SEN-
SOR" , AT-103, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
NO >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL

Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-14, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Refill ATF.

SAT638A

3. CHECK LINE PRESSURE

Check line pressure at the engine stall point. Refer to AT-53, "LINE
PRESSURE TEST" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG - 1 >> Line pressure high. GO TO 4.
NG - 2 >> Line pressure low. GO TO 5.

SAT494G

4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

1. Check control valve assembly. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-342, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following items:
– Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-357, "Oil Pump" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2004 October AT-286 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM A

1. Check control valve assembly. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-342, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following items: B
– Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-357, "Oil Pump" .
– Power train system. Refer to AT-342, "DISASSEMBLY" .
AT
– Transmission case. Refer to AT-342, "DISASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. D
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

6. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION E

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
Check" . F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 10. G

SCIA5199E

I
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63,
J
"Symptom Chart" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
K
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

8. CHECK SYMPTOM
L
Check again. Refer to AT-58, "Cruise Test - Part 1" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END M
NG >> GO TO 9.

9. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-86, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

10. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63,
"Symptom Chart" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2004 October AT-287 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition ACS001G3

SYMPTOM:
The lock-up condition cannot be maintained for more than 30 seconds.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Execute self-diagnosis.
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate torque converter clutch solenoid valve, engine speed signal, turbine rev-
olution sensor, CAN communication line?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-123, "DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER
CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-121, "DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL" , AT-160, "DTC
P1716 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR" , AT-103, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION
LINE" .
NO >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL

Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-14, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Refill ATF.

SAT638A

3. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
Check" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 7.

SCIA5199E

4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63,
"Symptom Chart" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

5. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again. Refer to AT-58, "Cruise Test - Part 1" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 6.
Revision: 2004 October AT-288 2004 M45
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

6. CHECK TCM A
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-86, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG B
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
AT
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63,
D
"Symptom Chart" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. E
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2004 October AT-289 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

Lock-up is Not Released ACS001G4

SYMPTOM:
The lock-up condition cannot be cancelled even after releasing the accelerator pedal.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Execute self-diagnosis.
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate torque converter clutch solenoid valve, engine speed signal, turbine rev-
olution sensor, CAN communication line?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-123, "DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER
CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-121, "DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL" , AT-160, "DTC
P1716 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR" , AT-103, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION
LINE" .
NO >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again. Refer to AT-58, "Cruise Test - Part 1" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 3.

3. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-86, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2004 October AT-290 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

Engine Speed Does Not Return to Idle ACS001G5

SYMPTOM: A
When a shift-down is performed, the engine speed does not smoothly return to the idling speed.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE B
1. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-14, "Checking A/T Fluid" . AT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Refill ATF. D

SAT638A
F
2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Execute self-diagnosis. G
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate front brake solenoid valve, direct clutch solenoid valve, ATF pressure
switch 1, ATF pressure switch 5, accelerator pedal position sensor, vehicle speed sensor A/T (revolution sen-
sor) and vehicle speed sensor MTR? H
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-189, "DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID
VALVE" , AT-199, "DTC P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-234, "DTC P1841 ATF
PRESSURE SWITCH 1" , AT-242, "DTC P1845 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 5" , AT-152, "DTC I
P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR" , AT-116, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T
(REVOLUTION SENSOR)" , AT-165, "DTC P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR" .
NO >> GO TO 3.
J
3. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION
1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" . K
2. Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
Check" .
OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 7.
M

SCIA5199E

4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63,
"Symptom Chart" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2004 October AT-291 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

5. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again. Refer to AT-58, "Cruise Test - Part 1" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 6.

6. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-86, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63,
"Symptom Chart" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2004 October AT-292 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

Cannot Be Changed to Manual Mode ACS001MB

SYMPTOM: A
Does not change to manual mode when manual shift gate is used.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE B
1. MANUAL MODE SWITCH
Check the manual mode switch. Refer to AT-230, "DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH" . AT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. D
2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Execute self-diagnosis. E
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate turbine revolution sensor?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-160, "DTC P1716 TURBINE REVOLUTION SEN-
SOR" . F
NO >> INSPECTION END

Revision: 2004 October AT-293 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

A/T Does Not Shift: 5th Gear → 4th Gear ACS001G6

SYMPTOM:
When shifted from 5M to 4M position in manual mode, does not downshift from 5th to 4th gear.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Execute self-diagnosis.
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate PNP switch, ATF pressure switch 1?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-110, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION
SWITCH" , AT-234, "DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1" .
NO >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL

Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-14, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Refill ATF.

SAT638A

3. CHECK CONTROL LINKAGE

Check the control linkage.
● Refer to AT-305, "Checking of A/T Position" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Adjust control linkage. Refer to AT-305, "Adjustment of
A/T Position" .

SCIA1612E

4. MANUAL MODE SWITCH

Check the manual mode switch. Refer to AT-230, "DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2004 October AT-294 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

5. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION A

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
Check" . B
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 9. AT

SCIA5199E
E
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63,
F
"Symptom Chart" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. G
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

7. CHECK SYMPTOM
H
Check again. Refer to AT-60, "Cruise Test - Part 3" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END I
NG >> GO TO 6.

8. CHECK TCM J
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-86, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
K
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
L
9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63, M
"Symptom Chart" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2004 October AT-295 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

A/T Does Not Shift: 4th Gear → 3rd Gear ACS001G7

SYMPTOM:
When shifted from 4M to 3M position in manual mode, does not downshift from 4th to 3rd gear.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Execute self-diagnosis.
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate PNP switch, ATF pressure switch 1, ATF pressure switch 3?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-110, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION
SWITCH" , AT-234, "DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1" , AT-238, "DTC P1843 ATF PRES-
SURE SWITCH 3" .
NO >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL

Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-14, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Refill ATF.

SAT638A

3. CHECK CONTROL LINKAGE

Check the control linkage.
● Refer to AT-305, "Checking of A/T Position" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Adjust control linkage. Refer to AT-305, "Adjustment of
A/T Position" .

SCIA1612E

4. MANUAL MODE SWITCH

Check the manual mode switch. Refer to AT-230, "DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2004 October AT-296 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

5. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION A

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
Check" . B
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 9. AT

SCIA5199E
E
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63,
F
"Symptom Chart" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. G
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

7. CHECK SYMPTOM
H
Check again. Refer to AT-60, "Cruise Test - Part 3" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END I
NG >> GO TO 8.

8. CHECK TCM J
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-86, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
K
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
L
9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63, M
"Symptom Chart" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2004 October AT-297 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

A/T Does Not Shift: 3rd Gear → 2nd Gear ACS001G8

SYMPTOM:
When shifted from 3M to 2M position in manual mode, does not downshift from 3rd to 2nd gear.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Execute self-diagnosis.
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate PNP switch, ATF pressure switch 6?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-110, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION
SWITCH" , AT-246, "DTC P1846 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 6" .
NO >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL

Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-14, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Refill ATF.

SAT638A

3. CHECK CONTROL LINKAGE

Check the control linkage.
● Refer to AT-305, "Checking of A/T Position" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Adjust control linkage. Refer to AT-305, "Adjustment of
A/T Position" .

SCIA1612E

4. MANUAL MODE SWITCH

Check the manual mode switch. Refer to AT-230, "DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2004 October AT-298 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

5. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION A

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
Check" . B
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 9. AT

SCIA5199E
E
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63,
F
"Symptom Chart" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. G
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

7. CHECK SYMPTOM
H
Check again. Refer to AT-60, "Cruise Test - Part 3" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END I
NG >> GO TO 8.

8. CHECK TCM J
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-86, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
K
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
L
9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63, M
"Symptom Chart" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2004 October AT-299 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

A/T Does Not Shift: 2nd Gear → 1st Gear ACS001G9

SYMPTOM:
When shifted from 2M to 1M position in manual mode, does not downshift from 2nd to 1st gear.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Execute self-diagnosis.
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate PNP switch, ATF pressure switch 5?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-110, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION
SWITCH" , AT-242, "DTC P1845 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 5" .
NO >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL

Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-14, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Refill ATF.

SAT638A

3. CHECK CONTROL LINKAGE

Check the control linkage.
● Refer to AT-305, "Checking of A/T Position" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Adjust control linkage. Refer to AT-305, "Adjustment of
A/T Position" .

SCIA1612E

4. MANUAL MODE SWITCH

Check the manual mode switch. Refer to AT-230, "DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2004 October AT-300 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

5. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION A

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
Check" . B
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 9. AT

SCIA5199E
E
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63,
F
"Symptom Chart" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. G
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

7. CHECK SYMPTOM
H
Check again. Refer to AT-60, "Cruise Test - Part 3" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END I
NG >> GO TO 8.

8. CHECK TCM J
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-86, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
K
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
L
9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63, M
"Symptom Chart" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2004 October AT-301 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

Vehicle Does Not Decelerate by Engine Brake ACS001GA

SYMPTOM:
No engine brake is applied when the gear is shifted from D2 to D1.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Execute self-diagnosis.
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate PNP switch, ATF pressure switch 5?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-110, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION
SWITCH" , AT-242, "DTC P1845 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 5" .
NO >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL

Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-14, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Refill ATF.

SAT638A

3. CHECK CONTROL LINKAGE

Check the control linkage.
● Refer to AT-305, "Checking of A/T Position" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Adjust control linkage. Refer to AT-305, "Adjustment of
A/T Position" .

SCIA1612E

4. MANUAL MODE SWITCH

Check the manual mode switch. Refer to AT-230, "DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2004 October AT-302 2004 M45

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

5. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION A

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-312, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
Check" . B
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 9. AT

SCIA5199E
E
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63,
F
"Symptom Chart" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. G
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

7. CHECK SYMPTOM
H
Check again. Refer to AT-60, "Cruise Test - Part 3" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END I
NG >> GO TO 8.

8. CHECK TCM J
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-86, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
K
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
L
9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63, M
"Symptom Chart" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2004 October AT-303 2004 M45

 SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM

SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM PFP:34901

Control Device Removal and Installation ACS001GB

SCIA5168E

1. Select lever knob 2. Position indicator plate 3. Slide plate

4. Control device assembly 5. Position lamp 6. A/T device harness connector
7. Control rod 8. Snap pin 9. Conical washer
10. Plain washer 11. Rod insulator 12. Cross tube
13. Pivot pin 14. Collar 15. Lock washer
16. Manual lever

Revision: 2004 October AT-304 2004 M45

 SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM

REMOVAL
1. Disconnect lower lever of control device and control rod. A
2. Remove console finisher.
● Refer to IP-10, "INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY" .
B
3. Remove console box assembly.
● Refer to IP-10, "INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY" .

4. Remove rear ventilator duct.

AT
● Refer to ATC-132, "Removal of Rear Ventilator Ducts" .

5. Disconnect control device harness connector.

6. Remove control device assembly. D
INSTALLATION
Install in reverse order of removal. Be careful of the following:
E
● After installation is completed, adjust and check A/T position.
Adjustment of A/T Position ACS001GC

1. Loosen nut of pivot pin. F

2. Place PNP switch and selector lever in “P” position.
3. While pressing lower lever toward rear of vehicle (in P-position
direction), tighten nut to specified torque. G

: 26 N·m (2.7 kg-m, 19 ft-lb)

H

SCIA1612E
I

Checking of A/T Position ACS001GD

1. Place selector lever in “P” position, and turn ignition switch ON (engine stop). J
2. Check that selector lever can be shifted to other than “P” position when brake pedal is depressed. Also
check that selector lever can be shifted from “P” position only when brake pedal is depressed.
3. Move the selector lever and check for excessive effort, sticking, noise or rattle. K
4. Confirm the selector lever stops at each position with the feel of engagement when it is moved through all
the positions. Check whether or not the actual position the selector lever is in matches the position shown
by the shift position indicator and the transmission body. L
5. The method of operating the lever to individual positions cor-
rectly should be as shown in the figure.
6. Confirm the back-up lamps illuminate only when lever is placed M
in “R” position. Confirm the back-up lamps does not illuminate
when selector lever is in “P” or “N” position with the lever pushed
against “R” position.
7. Confirm the engine can only be started with the selector lever in
“P” and “N” positions.
8. Check that transmission is locked completely in “P” position.
9. When selector lever is set to manual shift gate, check that man- SCIA4629E
ual mode is displayed on combination meter.
Shift selector lever to “+” and “-” sides, and check that set shift position changes.

Revision: 2004 October AT-305 2004 M45

 A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM

A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM PFP:34950

Description ACS001GE

● The electrical key interlock mechanism also operates as a shift lock:

With the ignition switch turned to ON, the selector lever cannot be shifted from “P” (parking) to any other
position unless the brake pedal is depressed.
With the key removed, the selector lever cannot be shifted from “P” to any other position.
The key cannot be removed unless the selector lever is placed in “P”.
● The shift lock and key interlock mechanisms are controlled by the ON-OFF operation of the shift lock sole-
noid and by the operation of the rotator and slider located inside the key cylinder, respectively.
Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location ACS001GF

SCIA4499E

Revision: 2004 October AT-306 2004 M45

 A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM

Wiring Diagram — AT — SHIFT ACS001GG

AT

TCWA0243E

Revision: 2004 October AT-307 2004 M45

 A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM

TCWA0244E

Revision: 2004 October AT-308 2004 M45

 A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM

Shift Lock Control Unit Reference Values ACS001KM

SHIFT LOCK HARNESS CONNECTOR TERMINALS LAYOUT A

AT

D
SCIA2004E

SHIFT LOCK CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION TABLE E

Data are reference values.
Terminal No. (Wire
Item Condition Judgement standard
color)
F
1 8
Power source Always Battery voltage
(Y/G) (B)
When selector lever is not in “P” position with
Battery voltage G
2 8 Detention switch (for key inserted.
(G/OR) (B) key) When selector lever is in “P” position with key
Approx. 0V
inserted.
H
3 8 Detention switch (for When selector lever is not “P” position. Battery voltage
(Y) (B) shift) When selector lever is “P” position. Approx. 0V

4 8 When brake pedal is depressed Battery voltage I

Stop lamp switch
(G) (B) When brake pedal is released Approx. 0V

5 8 Vehicle speed signal

Speed meter is operated
(SB) (B) (8pulse signal)
K

ELF1084D

6 8 Ignition switch: OFF Approx. 0V L

Ignition signal
(W/G) (B) Ignition switch: ON Battery voltage
● When selector lever is in “P” position, brake
pedal is depressed, and ignition switch is ON. M
● When selector lever is not in “P” position,
ignition switch is ON, and vehicle speed is
7 8 Approx. 0V
Shift lock solenoid 10km/h or less.
(L/Y) (B)
● For 3minutes after selector lever is not in “P”
position, vehicle speed is 10km/h or less, and
ignition switch is ON → OFF.
Except the above Battery voltage
8
— Ground Always Approx. 0V
(B)
Battery voltage for approx. 0.1 sec.
9 8 When selector lever is not “P” position.
Key lock solenoid (Note)
(BR) (B)
When selector lever is “P” position. Approx. 0V
When selector lever is “P” position with ignition Battery voltage for approx. 0.1 sec.
8 switch is OFF. (Note)
10 Key unlock solenoid
(B)
(R/W) When selector lever is not “P” position with igni-
Approx. 0V
tion switch is OFF.

Revision: 2004 October AT-309 2004 M45

 A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM

NOTE:
Make sure that the pointer swings only momentarily because the output time is so short. If the inspection is done with an oscilloscope, it
should be observed that the power source voltage lasts for 3.5 to 10 ms.

Component Inspection ACS004Y5

SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID

● Check operation by applying battery voltage to the A/T device
harness connector terminal.
CAUTION:
Be sure to apply the voltage of the correct polarity to the
respective terminals. Otherwise, the part may be damaged.
Connector No. Terminal No.
M97 10 (Battery voltage) - 9 (Ground)

SCIA4500E

DETENTION SWITCH
For Key:
● Check continuity between terminals of the A/T device harness
connector terminals.
Condition Connector No. Terminal No. Continuity
When selector lever is “P” posi-
No
tion.
M97 6-7
When selector lever is not “P”
Yes
position.

SCIA4501E

DETENTION SWITCH
For Shift:
● Check continuity between terminals of the A/T device harness
connector terminals.
Condition Connector No. Terminal No. Continuity
When selector lever is “P”
No
position.
M97 13 - 14
When selector lever is not “P”
Yes
position.

SCIA4502E

KEY LOCK SOLENOID

Key Lock
● Check operation by applying battery voltage to key switch and
key lock solenoid harness connector terminal.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to cause burnout of the harness.
Connector No. Terminal No.
M64 1 (Battery voltage) - 2 (Ground)

SCIA2042E

Revision: 2004 October AT-310 2004 M45

 A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM

Key Unlock
● Check operation by applying battery voltage to key switch and A
key lock solenoid harness connector terminal.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to cause burnout of the harness. B
Connector No. Terminal No.
M64 2 (Battery voltage) - 1 (Ground)
AT

SCIA2043E
D

KEY SWITCH
● Check continuity between terminals of the key switch and key E
lock solenoid harness connector terminals.
Condition Connector No. Terminal No. Continuity
Key inserted Yes F
M64 3-4
Key withdrawn No

SCIA2044E H
STOP LAMP SWITCH
● Check continuity between terminals of the stop lamp switch har-
ness connector. I
Condition Connector No. Terminal No. Continuity
When brake pedal is depressed Yes
M402 1-2 J
When brake pedal is released No

Check stop lamp switch after adjusting brake pedal. Refer to BR-6,
"Inspection and Adjustment" . K

SCIA2045E
L

Revision: 2004 October AT-311 2004 M45

 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

ON-VEHICLE SERVICE PFP:00000

Control Valve Assembly ACS004I7

CAUTION:
When replacing the control valve assembly, erase EEP ROM in TCM. Refer to AT-8, "Precautions for
TCM, A/T Assembly and Control Valve Assembly Replacement" .
COMPONENTS

SCIA3950E

1. Transmission assembly 2. Control valve assembly 3. Bracket

4. A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 5. Oil pan gasket 6. Oil pan
7. Magnet 8. Drain plug gasket 9. Drain plug
10. Oil pan mounting bolt

REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
2. Drain ATF through drain plug.
3. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.

Revision: 2004 October AT-312 2004 M45

 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

4. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket.

A

AT

SCIA2308E

D
5. Remove magnets from oil pan.

G
SCIA5200E

6. Check foreign materials in oil pan to help determine causes of H

malfunction. If the A/T fluid is very dark, smells burned, or con-
tains foreign particles, the frictional material (clutches, band)
may need replacement. A tacky film that will not wipe clean indi-
cates varnish build up. Varnish can cause valves, servo, and I
clutches to stick and can inhibit pump pressure.
● If frictional material is detected, perform A/T fluid cooler
cleaning. Refer to AT-16, "A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning" . J

SCIA5199E
K
7. Disconnect terminal cord assembly connectors.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage connector. L

SCIA3976E

8. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector.

CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage connector.

SCIA4967E

Revision: 2004 October AT-313 2004 M45

 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

9. Remove terminal cord assembly connectors from bracket.

CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage connector.

SCIA3977E

10. Disconnect revolution sensor connector.

CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage connector.

SCIA2313E

11. Straighten terminal clips to free terminal cord assembly and rev-
olution sensor harness then remove terminal clips.
CAUTION:
Hang down terminal cord assembly and revolution sensor
harness toward outside so as not to disturb removal of con-
trol valve assembly.

SCIA2314E

12. Remove bolts A, B and C from control valve assembly.

Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts
A 42 (1.65) 5
B 55 (2.17) 6
C 40 (1.57) 1

SCIA2312E

13. Remove control valve assembly from transmission case.

CAUTION:
When removing, be careful with the manual valve notch and
manual plate height. Remove it vertically.

SCIA3984E

Revision: 2004 October AT-314 2004 M45

 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

14. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from con-
trol valve assembly. A

AT

SCIA5126E
D
15. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2.

G
SCIA5127E

INSTALLATION H
CAUTION:
After completing installation, check A/T fluid leakage and A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-14, "Changing A/
T Fluid" , AT-14, "Checking A/T Fluid" . I
1. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 in bracket.

L
SCIA5128E

2. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 in control valve assembly. M

(With bracket.)
: 7.9 N·m (0.81 kg-m, 70 in-lb)

SCIA5126E

Revision: 2004 October AT-315 2004 M45

 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

3. Install control valve assembly.

a. Install control valve assembly in transmission case.
CAUTION:
● Make sure that turbine revolution sensor securely installs
turbine sensor hole.
● Hang down terminal cord assembly and revolution sen-
sor harness toward outside so as not to disturb installa-
tion of control valve assembly.

SCIA2479E

● Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with

manual plate projection.

SCIA3984E

b. Install bolts A, B and C in control valve assembly.

Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts
A 42 (1.65) 5
B 55 (2.17) 6
C 40 (1.57) 1

SCIA2312E

c. Tighten bolt 1, 2 and 3 temporarily to prevent dislocation. After

that tighten them in order (1 → 2 → 3), and then tighten other
bolts.
: 7.9 N·m (0.81 kg-m, 70 in-lb)

SCIA3170E

Revision: 2004 October AT-316 2004 M45

 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

4. Install terminal cord assembly connectors in bracket.

A

AT

SCIA3977E

D
5. Connect terminal cord assembly connectors.

G
SCIA3976E

6. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. H

SCIA4967E
K
7. Connect revolution sensor connector.

SCIA2313E

8. Securely fasten terminal harness with terminal clips.

SCIA2314E

Revision: 2004 October AT-317 2004 M45

 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

9. Install magnets in oil pan.

SCIA5200E

10. Install oil pan in transmission case.

a. Install oil pan gasket in oil pan.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse oil pan gasket.

● Install it in the direction to align hole positions.

● Completely remove all moisture, oil and old gasket, etc. from oil pan gasket mounting surface.

b. Install oil pan (with oil pan gasket) in transmission case.

CAUTION:
● Install it so that drain plug comes to the position as
shown in the figure.
● Be careful not to pinch harnesses.

● Completely remove all moisture, oil and old gasket, etc.

from oil pan gasket mounting surface.

SCIA2308E

c. Tighten oil pan mounting bolts to the specified torque in numeri-

cal order as shown in the figure after temporarily tightening
them.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse oil pan mounting bolts.
: 7.9 N·m (0.81 kg-m, 70 in-lb)

11. Install drain plug on oil pan.

CAUTION:
Do not reuse drain plug gasket. SCIA4113E

: 34 N·m (3.5 kg-m, 25 ft-lb)

12. Pour ATF into transmission assembly. Refer to AT-14, "Changing A/T Fluid" .
13. Connect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.
14. Connect the battery cable to the negative terminal.

Revision: 2004 October AT-318 2004 M45

 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

Revolution Sensor ACS0064M

COMPONENTS A

AT

SCIA3996E

1. Terminal bracket 2. Output shaft & companion flange 3. Needle bearing K

complement
4. Revolution sensor 5. Self sealing bolt 6. Transmission assembly
7. Drain plug 8. Drain plug gasket 9. Oil pan mounting bolt L
10. Oil pan 11. Oil pan gasket

REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. M
2. Drain ATF through drain plug.
3. Remove exhaust front tube and center muffler with a power tool. Refer to EX-3, "Removal and Installation"
.
4. Remove propeller shaft. Refer to PR-5, "Removal and Installation" .
5. Remove control rod. Refer to AT-304, "Control Device Removal and Installation" .
6. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.

Revision: 2004 October AT-319 2004 M45

 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

7. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket.

SCIA2308E

8. Check foreign materials in oil pan to help determine causes of

malfunction. If the A/T fluid is very dark, smells burned, or con-
tains foreign particles, the frictional material (clutches, band)
may need replacement. A tacky film that will not wipe clean indi-
cates varnish build up. Varnish can cause valves, servo, and
clutches to stick and can inhibit pump pressure.
● If frictional material is detected, perform A/T fluid cooler
cleaning. Refer to AT-16, "A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning" .

SCIA5199E

9. Support transmission assembly with a transmission jack.

CAUTION:
When setting the transmission jack, place wooden blocks to prevent from damaging control valve
and transmission case.
10. Remove engine rear member with a power tool. Refer to AT-
331, "Removal and Installation" .

SCIA3703E

11. Remove tightening bolts for output shaft & companion flange
complement and transmission case. (With terminal bracket)

SCIA5167E

Revision: 2004 October AT-320 2004 M45

 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

12. Tap output shaft & companion flange complement with a soft
hammer. A

AT

SCIA4109E

D
13. Remove output shaft & companion flange complement from
transmission assembly. (With needle bearing)
E

G
SCIA3968J

14. Remove revolution sensor connector. H

15. Straighten terminal clips to free revolution sensor harness then
remove terminal clips.
I

SCIA3969E
K
16. Remove revolution sensor from transmission assembly.
CAUTION:
● Do not subject it to impact by dropping or hitting it.
L
● Do not disassemble.

● Do not allow metal filings, etc. to get on the sensor's front

edge magnetic area. M
● Do not place in an area affected by magnetism.

SCIA3997E

Revision: 2004 October AT-321 2004 M45

 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
After completing installation, check A/T fluid leakage and A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-14, "Changing A/
T Fluid" , AT-14, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
1. Install revolution sensor in transmission assembly.
CAUTION:
● Do not subject it to impact by dropping or hitting it.

● Do not disassemble.

● Do not allow metal filings, etc. to get on the sensor's front

edge magnetic area.
● Do not place in an area affected by magnetism.

: 5.8 N·m (0.59 kg-m, 51 in-lb)

SCIA3997E

2. Connect revolution sensor connector.

3. Securely fasten revolution sensor harness with terminal clips.

SCIA3969E

4. Apply recommended sealant (Genuine Anaerobic Liquid Gasket

or equivalent. Refer to GI-46, "Recommended Chemical Prod-
ucts and Sealants" .) to output shaft & companion flange com-
plement as shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
Completely remove all moisture, oil and old sealant, etc.
from the transmission case and output shaft & companion
flange complement mounting surfaces.

SCIA5212E

5. Install output shaft & companion flange complement in transmis-

sion assembly.
CAUTION:
Insert the tip of parking rod between the parking pawl and
the parking actuator support when assembling the output
shaft & companion flange complement.

SCIA3968J

Revision: 2004 October AT-322 2004 M45

 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

6. Tighten output shaft & companion flange complement mounting

bolts to specified torque. (Because terminal bracket is tightened A
together with output shaft & companion flange, it should be
installed before procedure 5.)
CAUTION: B
Do not reuse self-sealing bolt.
Output shaft & companion flange complement
mounting bolt: AT
: 52 N·m (5.3 kg-m, 38 ft-lb)
SCIA5170E
Self-sealing bolt:
D
: 61 N·m (6.2 kg-m, 45 ft-lb)

7. Install engine rear member. Refer to AT-331, "Removal and E

Installation" .

SCIA3703E H
8. Install oil pan in transmission case.
a. Install oil pan gasket in oil pan.
I
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse oil pan gasket.

● Install it in the direction to align hole positions.

J
● Completely remove all moisture, oil and old gasket, etc. from oil pan gasket mounting surface.

b. Install oil pan (with oil pan gasket) in transmission case.

CAUTION: K
● Install it so that drain plug comes to the position as
shown in the figure.
● Be careful not to pinch harnesses. L
● Completely remove all moisture, oil and old gasket, etc.
from oil pan gasket mounting surface.
M

SCIA2308E

c. Tighten oil pan mounting bolts to the specified torque in numeri-

cal order shown in the figure after temporarily tightening them.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse oil pan mounting bolts.
: 7.9 N·m (0.81 kg-m, 70 in-lb)

9. Install drain plug on oil pan.

CAUTION:
Do not reuse drain plug gasket.
SCIA4113E
: 34 N·m (3.5 kg-m, 25 ft-lb)

10. Connect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.

11. Install control rod. Refer to AT-304, "Control Device Removal and Installation" .
Revision: 2004 October AT-323 2004 M45
 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

12. Install propeller shaft. Refer to PR-5, "Removal and Installation" .

13. Install exhaust front tube and center muffler. Refer to EX-3, "Removal and Installation" .
14. Connect the battery cable to the negative terminal
15. Pour ATF into transmission assembly. Refer to AT-14, "Changing A/T Fluid" .

Revision: 2004 October AT-324 2004 M45

 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

Parking Components ACS0064N

COMPONENTS A

AT

SCIA4108E G
1. Terminal bracket 2. Output shaft & companion flange 3. Pawl shaft
complement
4. Return spring 5. Parking actuator support 6. Parking pawl H
7. Self sealing bolt

REMOVAL
1. Drain ATF through drain plug. I
2. Remove exhaust front tube and center muffler with a power tool. Refer to EX-3, "Removal and Installation"
.
3. Remove propeller shaft. Refer to PR-5, "Removal and Installation" . J
4. Remove control rod. Refer to AT-304, "Control Device Removal and Installation" .
5. Support transmission assembly with a transmission jack.
K
CAUTION:
When setting the transmission jack, be careful not to allow it to collide against the drain plug.
6. Remove engine rear member with a power tool. Refer to AT- L
331, "Removal and Installation" .

SCIA3703E

Revision: 2004 October AT-325 2004 M45

 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

7. Remove tightening bolts for output shaft & companion flange

complement and transmission case. (With terminal bracket)

SCIA5167E

8. Tap output shaft & companion flange complement with a soft

hammer.

SCIA4109E

9. Remove output shaft & companion flange complement from

transmission assembly. (With needle bearing)

SCIA3968J

10. Remove parking actuator support from output shaft & compan-
ion flange complement.

SCIA2335E

11. Remove parking pawl, parking pawl shaft and return spring from
output shaft & companion flange complement.

SCIA4631E

Revision: 2004 October AT-326 2004 M45

 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

12. Remove return spring from parking pawl.

A

AT

SCIA2445E
D
INSPECTION
● If the contact surface on parking actuator support, parking pawl,
etc. has excessive wear, abrasion, bend, or any other damage, E
replace the components.

SCIA5143E
H

SCIA5144E

L
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
After completing installation, check A/T fluid leakage and A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-14, "Changing A/
T Fluid" , AT-14, "Checking A/T Fluid" . M
1. Install return spring in parking pawl.

SCIA2445E

Revision: 2004 October AT-327 2004 M45

 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

2. Install parking pawl and pawl shaft in output shaft & companion
flange complement.

SCIA4631E

3. Install parking actuator support in output shaft & companion

flange complement.

SCIA2335E

4. Apply recommended sealant (Genuine Anaerobic Liquid Gasket

or equivalent. Refer to GI-46, "Recommended Chemical Prod-
ucts and Sealants" .) to output shaft & companion flange com-
plement as shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
Completely remove all moisture, oil and old sealant, etc.
from the transmission case and output shaft & companion
flange complement mounting surfaces.

SCIA5212E

5. Install output shaft & companion flange complement in transmis-

sion assembly.
CAUTION:
Insert the tip of parking rod between the parking pawl and
the parking actuator support when assembling the output
shaft & companion flange complement.

SCIA3968J

6. Tighten output shaft & companion flange complement mounting

bolts to specified torque. (Because terminal bracket is tightened
together with output shaft & companion flange, it should be
installed before procedure 5.)
CAUTION:
Do not reuse self-sealing bolt.
Output shaft & companion flange complement
mounting bolt:
: 52 N·m (5.3 kg-m, 38 ft-lb)
SCIA5170E

Revision: 2004 October AT-328 2004 M45

 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

Self-sealing bolt:
A
: 61 N·m (6.2 kg-m, 45 ft-lb)

7. Install engine rear member. Refer to AT-331, "Removal and

Installation" . B
8. Install propeller shaft. Refer to PR-5, "Removal and Installation"
.
AT
9. Install control rod. Refer to AT-304, "Control Device Removal
and Installation" .
10. Install exhaust front tube and center muffler with a power tool.
Refer to EX-3, "Removal and Installation" . D
11. Install drain plug in oil pan.
CAUTION: SCIA3703E
Do not reuse drain plug gasket. E

: 34 N·m (3.5 kg-m, 25 ft-lb)

F
12. Pour ATF into transmission assembly. Refer to AT-14, "Changing A/T Fluid" .
● After completing installation, check fluid leakage and fluid level of transmission assembly. Refer to AT-14,
"Checking A/T Fluid" .
G

Revision: 2004 October AT-329 2004 M45

 AIR BREATHER HOSE

AIR BREATHER HOSE PFP:31098

Removal and Installation ACS001GL

Refer to the figure below for air breather hose removal and installation procedure.

SCIA4722E

CAUTION:
● When installing an air breather hose, be careful not to be crushed or blocked by folding or bend-
ing the hose.
● When inserting a hose to the transmission tube, be sure to insert it fully until its end reaches the
tube bend R portion.
● When inserting a hose to the air breather tube, be sure to insert it fully until its end reaches the
tube spool portion.

Revision: 2004 October AT-330 2004 M45

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY

TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY PFP:31020

A
Removal and Installation ACS001GM

AT

SCIA4676E
K
1. Transmission assembly 2. A/T fluid charging pipe 3. O-ring
4. Fluid cooler tube 5. Copper washer 6. Bracket
7. Engine rear member 8. Insulator 9. Fluid cooler hose L
10. Hose band

REMOVAL
CAUTION: M
When removing the A/T assembly from engine, first remove the crankshaft position sensor (POS) from
the A/T assembly.
Be careful not to damage sensor edge.
1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
2. Remove engine under cover with a power tool.
3. Remove exhaust front tube and center muffler with a power tool. Refer to EX-3, "Removal and Installation"
.
4. Remove propeller shaft. Refer to PR-5, "Removal and Installation" .
5. Remove control rod. Refer to AT-304, "Control Device Removal and Installation" .
6. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connectors.
7. Remove crankshaft position sensor (POS) from A/T assembly.
8. Remove fluid cooler tube and A/T fluid charging pipe.
9. Plug up openings such as the A/T fluid charging pipe hole, etc.
10. Remove air breather hose. Refer to AT-330, "Removal and Installation" .
11. Remove starter motor. Refer to SC-15, "Removal and Installation" .
Revision: 2004 October AT-331 2004 M45
 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY

12. Remove rear plate cover from converter housing part.

13. Turn crankshaft, and remove the four tightening bolts for drive
plate and torque converter.
CAUTION:
When turning crankshaft, turn it clockwise as viewed from
the front of the engine.

PCIA0045J

14. Support transmission assembly with a transmission jack.

CAUTION:
When setting the transmission jack, be careful not to allow it to collide against the drain plug.
15. Remove engine rear member with a power tool.
16. Remove bolts fixing transmission assembly to engine with a power tool.
CAUTION:
Do not perform any work that uses the companion flange
section located at the rear part of the transmission as a
point of support.

SCIA0490E

17. Remove transmission assembly from vehicle with a transmis-

sion jack.
● Secure torque converter to prevent it from dropping.

● Secure transmission assembly to the transmission jack.

SCIA0499E

Revision: 2004 October AT-332 2004 M45

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY

INSPECTION
Installation and Inspection of Torque Converter A
● After inserting torque converter to transmission, be sure to
check distance A to ensure it is within the reference value limit.
B
Distance “A” : 22.0 mm (0.87 in) or more

AT

D
SCIA5694E

INSTALLATION E
Install the removed parts in the reverse order of the removal, while
paying attention to the following work.
● When installing transmission to the engine, attach the fixing F
bolts in accordance with the following standard.
Bolt No. 1 2 3*
Number of bolts 4 5 1 G
Bolt length
65 (2.56) 70 (2.76) 70 (2.76)
“ ”mm (in)
H
Tightening torque 74 114
PCIA0044E
N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) (7.5, 55) (12.0, 84)
*: Tightening the bolt with A/T fluid charging pipe.
I

● Align the positions of tightening bolts for drive plate with those of
the torque converter, and temporarily tighten the bolts. Then, J
tighten the bolts with the specified torque.
: 51 N·m (5.2 kg-m, 38 ft-lb)
K
CAUTION:
● When turning crankshaft, turn it clockwise as viewed
from the front of the engine.
L
● When tightening the tightening bolts for the torque con-
verter after fixing the crankshaft pulley bolts, be sure to
confirm the tightening torque of the crankshaft pulley PCIA0045J

mounting bolts. M
● After converter is installed to drive plate, rotate crankshaft several turns and check to be sure
that transmission rotates freely without binding.
● Install crankshaft position sensor (POS). Refer to EM-25, "Removal and Installation" .
● After completing installation, check fluid leakage, fluid level, and the positions of A/T. Refer to AT-14,
"Checking A/T Fluid" , AT-305, "Adjustment of A/T Position" , AT-305, "Checking of A/T Position" .
● When replacing the A/T assembly, erase EEP ROM in TCM. Refer to AT-8, "Precautions for TCM, A/T
Assembly and Control Valve Assembly Replacement" .

Revision: 2004 October AT-333 2004 M45

 OVERHAUL

OVERHAUL PFP:00000

Components ACS004H8

SCIA5422E

Revision: 2004 October AT-334 2004 M45

 OVERHAUL

1. O-ring 2. Oil pump cover 3. O-ring

4. Oil pump housing 5. Self-sealing bolt 6. Torque converter
A
7. Converter housing 8. Oil pump housing oil seal 9. Bearing race
10. Needle bearing 11. O-ring 12. Front carrier assembly
B
13. Snap ring 14. Front sun gear 15. 3rd one-way clutch
16. Snap ring 17. Bearing race 18. Needle bearing
19. Seal ring 20. Input clutch assembly 21. Needle bearing
AT
22. Rear internal gear 23. Brake band 24. Mid carrier assembly
25. Needle bearing 26. Bearing race 27. Rear carrier assembly
28. Needle bearing 29. Mid sun gear 30. Seal ring
D
31. Rear sun gear 32. 1st one-way clutch 33. Snap ring
34. Needle bearing 35. High and low reverse clutch hub 36. Snap ring
37. Bearing race 38. Needle bearing
E

Revision: 2004 October AT-335 2004 M45

 OVERHAUL

SCIA5043E

1. Needle bearing 2. Bearing race 3. High and low reverse clutch assem-
bly
4. Needle bearing 5. Direct clutch assembly 6. Reverse brake dish plate

Revision: 2004 October AT-336 2004 M45

 OVERHAUL

7. Reverse brake driven plate 8. N-sprig 9. Reverse brake drive plate

10. Reverse brake retaining plate 11. Snap ring 12. Lip seal A
13. D-ring 14. Reverse brake piston 15. Return spring
16. Spring retainer 17. Snap ring
B

AT

Revision: 2004 October AT-337 2004 M45

 OVERHAUL

SCIA6845E

1. Terminal bracket 2. Output shaft & companion flange 3. Parking actuator support
complement
4. Return spring 5. Parking pawl 6. Pawl shaft

Revision: 2004 October AT-338 2004 M45

 OVERHAUL

7. Self sealing bolt 8. Seal ring 9. Needle bearing

10. Terminal cord assembly 11. Revolution sensor 12. Intermediate shaft A
13. Manual plate 14. Parking rod 15. Manual shaft oil seal
16. Manual shaft 17. O-ring 18. Band servo anchor end pin
19. Detent spring 20. Spacer 21. Seal ring B
22. Transmission case 23. Retaining pin 24. Return spring
25. O-ring 26. Servo assembly 27. Snap ring
28. Control valve assembly 29. Bracket 30. Fluid temperature sensor 2
AT
31. Oil pan gasket 32. Oil pan 33. Magnet
34. Drain plug 35. Drain plug gasket
D

Revision: 2004 October AT-339 2004 M45

 OVERHAUL

Oil Channel ACS004H9

SCIA4668E

Revision: 2004 October AT-340 2004 M45

 OVERHAUL

Locations of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings, Thrust Washers and Snap

Rings ACS004HA
A

AT

SCIA5456E

Revision: 2004 October AT-341 2004 M45

 DISASSEMBLY

DISASSEMBLY PFP:31020

Disassembly ACS004HB

CAUTION:
● Do not disassemble parts behind Drum Support. Refer to AT-19, "Cross-Sectional View" .
● When replacing the control valve assembly, erase EEP ROM in TCM. Refer to AT-8, "Precautions
for TCM, A/T Assembly and Control Valve Assembly Replacement" .
1. Drain ATF through drain plug.
2. Remove torque converter by holding it firmly and turing while
pulling straight out.

SCIA2297E

3. Check torque converter one-way clutch using a check tool as

shown in the figure.
a. Insert the check tool into the groove of bearing support built into
one-way clutch outer race.
b. When fixing bearing support with the check tool, rotate one-way
clutch spline using a screwdriver.
c. Check that inner race rotates clockwise only. If not, replace
torque converter assembly.

SCIA3171E

4. Remove converter housing from transmission case.

CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch converter housing.

SCIA2298E

Revision: 2004 October AT-342 2004 M45

 DISASSEMBLY

5. Remove O-ring from input clutch assembly.

A

AT

SCIA2299E

D
6. Remove tightening bolts for oil pump assembly and transmis-
sion case.
E

G
SCIA2300E

7. Attach the sliding hammers to oil pump assembly and extract it H

evenly from transmission case.
CAUTION:
● Fully tighten the sliding hammer screws.
I
● Make sure that bearing race is installed to the oil pump
assembly edge surface.

SCIA5312E

8. Remove O-ring from oil pump assembly.

SCIA5172E

Revision: 2004 October AT-343 2004 M45

 DISASSEMBLY

9. Remove bearing race from oil pump assembly.

SCIA6529E

10. Remove needle bearing from front sun gear.

SCIA2808E

11. Remove front sun gear assembly from front carrier assembly.
NOTE:
Remove front sun gear by rotating left/right.

SCIA2302E

12. Remove seal rings from input clutch assembly.

SCIA2470E

13. Remove front carrier assembly from transmission case. (With

input clutch assembly and rear internal gear.)
CAUTION:
Be careful to remove it with needle bearing.

SCIA2303E

Revision: 2004 October AT-344 2004 M45

 DISASSEMBLY

14. Loosen lock nut and remove band servo anchor end pin from
transmission case. A

AT

SCIA6512E
D
15. Remove brake band from transmission case.

G
SCIA2580E

● To prevent brake linings from cracking or peeling, do not H

stretch the flexible band unnecessarily. When removing
the brake band, always secure it with a clip as shown in
the figure at left. I
Leave the clip in position after removing the brake band.
● Check brake band facing for damage, cracks, wear or
burns. J

SAT655
K

16. Remove mid carrier assembly and rear carrier assembly as a

unit. L

SCIA2304E

17. Remove mid carrier assembly from rear carrier assembly.

SCIA5697E

Revision: 2004 October AT-345 2004 M45

 DISASSEMBLY

18. Remove needle bearing (front side) from mid carrier assembly.

SCIA2805E

19. Remove needle bearing (rear side) from mid carrier assembly.

SCIA2804E

20. Remove bearing race from rear carrier assembly.

SCIA5175E

21. Remove needle bearing from rear carrier assembly.

SCIA2803E

22. Remove mid sun gear assembly, rear sun gear assembly and
high and low reverse clutch hub as a unit.
CAUTION:
Be careful to remove then with bearing race and needle
bearing.

SCIA2305E

Revision: 2004 October AT-346 2004 M45

 DISASSEMBLY

23. Remove high and low reverse clutch assembly from transmis-
sion case. A
CAUTION:
Make sure that needle bearing is installed to the high and
low reverse clutch assembly edge surface. B

AT

SCIA2306E
D
24. Remove direct clutch assembly from reverse brake.

G
SCIA2307E

25. Remove needle bearing from drum support. H

SCIA5198E K

26. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket.

L

SCIA2308E

27. Remove magnets from oil pan.

SCIA5200E

Revision: 2004 October AT-347 2004 M45

 DISASSEMBLY

28. Check foreign materials in oil pan to help determine causes of

malfunction. If the A/T fluid is very dark, smells burned, or con-
tains foreign particles, the frictional material (clutches, band)
may need replacement. A tacky film that will not wipe clean indi-
cates varnish build up. Varnish can cause valves, servo, and
clutches to stick and can inhibit pump pressure.
● If frictional material is detected, perform A/T fluid cooler
cleaning. Refer to AT-16, "A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning" .

SCIA5199E

29. Disconnect terminal cord assembly connectors.

CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage connector.

SCIA2309E

30. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector.

CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage connector.

SCIA5129E

31. Remove terminal cord assembly connectors from bracket.

CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage connector.

SCIA2584E

32. Disconnect revolution sensor connector.

CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage connector.

SCIA2313E

Revision: 2004 October AT-348 2004 M45

 DISASSEMBLY

33. Straighten terminal clips to free terminal cord assembly and rev-
olution sensor harness then remove terminal clips. A
CAUTION:
Hang down terminal cord assembly and revolution sensor
harness toward outside so as not to disturb removal of con- B
trol valve assembly.

AT

SCIA2314E
D
34. Remove bolts A, B and C from control valve assembly.
Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts
E
A 42 (1.65) 5
B 55 (2.17) 6
C 40 (1.57) 1 F

G
SCIA2312E

35. Remove control valve assembly from transmission case. H

CAUTION:
When removing, be careful with the manual valve notch and
manual plate height. Remove it vertically. I

SCIA2315E K

36. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from con-
trol valve assembly. L

SCIA5126E

37. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2.

SCIA5127E

Revision: 2004 October AT-349 2004 M45

 DISASSEMBLY

38. Remove tightening bolts for output shaft & companion flange
complement and transmission case.

SCIA2316E

39. Tap output shaft & companion flange complement with a soft
hammer.

SCIA2317E

40. Remove output shaft & companion flange complement from

transmission case.

SCIA2318E

41. Remove intermediate shaft from transmission case by rotating

left/right.

SCIA4632E

42. Remove needle bearing from transmission case.

SCIA2440E

Revision: 2004 October AT-350 2004 M45

 DISASSEMBLY

43. Remove revolution sensor from transmission case.

A
CAUTION:
● Do not subject it to impact by dropping or hitting it.

● Do not disassemble.
B
● Do not allow metal filings, etc. to get on the sensor's front
edge magnetic area.
● Do not place in an area affected by magnetism.
AT

SCIA2320E
D
44. Remove reverse brake snap ring (fixing plate) using 2 flat-
bladed screwdrivers.
NOTE: E
Press out snap ring from the transmission case oil pan side gap
using the flat-bladed screwdriver, and remove it using another
screwdriver.
F
45. Remove reverse brake retaining plate from transmission case.
● Check facing for burns, cracks or damage. If necessary,
replace the plate. G
SCIA2321E

46. Remove N-spring from transmission case. H

SCIA5214E K

47. Remove reverse brake drive plates, driven plates and dish plate
from transmission case.
L
● Check facing for burns, cracks or damage. If necessary,
replace the plate.

SCIA2322E

48. Remove snap ring (fixing spring retainer) using a flat-bladed

screwdriver.

SCIA2323E

Revision: 2004 October AT-351 2004 M45

 DISASSEMBLY

49. Remove spring retainer and return spring from transmission

case.

SCIA2324E

50. Remove seal rings from drum support.

SCIA3333E

51. Remove needle bearing from drum support edge surface.

SCIA2796E

52. Remove reverse brake piston from transmission case with com-
pressed air. Refer to AT-340, "Oil Channel" .
CAUTION:
Care should be taken not to abruptly blow air. It makes pis-
tons incline, as the result, it becomes hard to disassemble
the pistons.

SCIA5047E

Revision: 2004 October AT-352 2004 M45

 DISASSEMBLY

53. Remove lip seal and D-ring from reverse brake piston.
A

AT

SCIA2795E
D
54. Remove terminal cord assembly connectors from bracket.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage connector. E

G
SCIA2326E

55. Remove terminal cord assembly from transmission case. H

SCIA2327E K

56. Use a pin punch (4mm dia. commercial service tool) to knock
out retaining pin.
L

SCIA2328E

57. Remove manual shaft retaining pin with a pair of nippers.

SCIA2329E

Revision: 2004 October AT-353 2004 M45

 DISASSEMBLY

58. Remove manual plate (with parking rod) from manual shaft.

SCIA5715E

59. Remove parking rod from manual plate.

SCIA5220E

60. Remove manual shaft from transmission case.

SCIA5716E

61. Remove manual shaft oil seals using a flat-bladed screwdriver.

CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch transmission case.

SCIA2331E

62. Remove detent spring and spacer from transmission case.

SCIA5248E

Revision: 2004 October AT-354 2004 M45

 DISASSEMBLY

63. Remove snap ring from transmission case using a pair of snap
ring pliers. A

AT

SCIA2333E
D
64. Remove servo assembly (with return spring) from transmission
case.
E

G
SCIA5679E

65. Remove return spring from servo assembly. H

SCIA5717E K

66. Remove O-rings from servo assembly.

L

SCIA5719E

67. Remove parking actuator support from output shaft & compan-
ion flange complement.

SCIA2335E

Revision: 2004 October AT-355 2004 M45

 DISASSEMBLY

68. Remove parking pawl, parking pawl shaft and return spring from
output shaft & companion flange complement.

SCIA4631E

69. Remove return spring from parking pawl.

SCIA2445E

Revision: 2004 October AT-356 2004 M45

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS PFP:00000

A
Oil Pump ACS004HC

COMPONENTS
B

AT

G
SCIA5323E

1. O-ring 2. Oil pump cover 3. O-ring

H
4. Oil pump housing 5. Oil pump housing oil seal

DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove oil pump housing from oil pump cover. I

SCIA5228E L

2. Remove oil pump housing oil seal using a flat-bladed screw-

driver.
M
CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch oil pump housing.

SCIA2840E

Revision: 2004 October AT-357 2004 M45

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

3. Remove O-ring from oil pump housing.

SCIA2841E

4. Remove O-ring from oil pump cover.

SCIA2837E

ASSEMBLY
1. Install O-ring in oil pump cover.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse O-ring.

● Apply ATF to O-ring.

SCIA2837E

2. Install O-ring in oil pump housing.

CAUTION:
● Do not reuse O-ring.

● Apply ATF to O-ring.

SCIA2841E

Revision: 2004 October AT-358 2004 M45

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

3. Using the drift, install oil pump housing oil seal to the oil pump
housing until is flush. A
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse oil pump housing oil seal.

● Apply ATF to oil pump housing oil seal. B

AT

SCIA5313E

D
4. Install oil pump housing to oil pump cover.
5. Tighten bolts to the specified torque in numerical order shown in
E
the figure after temporarily tightening them.
: 9.0 N·m (0.92 kg-m, 80 in-lb.)
F

G
SCIA6388E

Revision: 2004 October AT-359 2004 M45

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

Front Sun Gear, 3rd One-Way Clutch ACS004HD

COMPONENTS

SCIA3114E

1. Front sun gear 2. 3rd one-way clutch 3. Snap ring

DISASSEMBLY
1. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, remove snap ring from front sun
gear.

SCIA3110E

2. Remove 3rd one-way clutch from front sun gear.

SCIA3111E

INSPECTION
3rd One-Way Clutch
● Check frictional surface for wear or damage.
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the 3rd one-way clutch.
Front Sun Gear Snap Ring
● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage.

Revision: 2004 October AT-360 2004 M45

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the snap ring. A
Front Sun Gear
● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage.
B
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the front sun gear.
ASSEMBLY AT
1. Install 3rd one-way clutch in front sun gear.
CAUTION:
Apply ATF to 3rd one-way clutch. D

F
SCIA3111E

2. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, install snap ring in front sun

gear. G

SCIA3110E
J
3. Check operation of 3rd one-way clutch.
a. Hold oil pump assembly and turn front sun gear.
K
b. Check 3rd one-way clutch for correct locking and unlocking
directions.
CAUTION:
If not as shown in the figure, check installation direction of L
3rd one-way clutch.

M
SCIA3131E

Revision: 2004 October AT-361 2004 M45

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

Front Carrier, Input Clutch, Rear Internal Gear ACS004HE

COMPONENTS

SCIA5426E

1. Seal ring 2. O-ring 3. Needle bearing

4. Bearing race 5. Front carrier assembly 6. Snap ring
7. Snap ring 8. Retaining plate 9. Driven plate
10. Input clutch drum 11. Drive plate 12. Rear internal gear

Revision: 2004 October AT-362 2004 M45

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

DISASSEMBLY
1. Compress snap ring using 2 flat-bladed screwdrivers. A
2. Remove front carrier assembly and input clutch assembly from
rear internal gear.
3. Remove front carrier assembly from input clutch assembly. B

AT

SCIA5339E
D

a. Remove bearing race from front carrier assembly.

E

SCIA2847E
H
b. Remove snap ring from front carrier assembly.
CAUTION:
Do not expand snap ring excessively. I

K
SCIA5476E

4. Disassemble input clutch assembly. L

a. Remove O-ring and seal rings from input clutch assembly.

SCIA5235E

Revision: 2004 October AT-363 2004 M45

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

b. Remove needle bearing from input clutch assembly.

SCIA2853E

c. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, remove snap ring from input

clutch drum.
d. Remove drive plates, driven plates and retaining plate from input
clutch drum.

SCIA2864E

INSPECTION
Front Carrier Snap Ring
● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage.
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the snap ring.
Input Clutch Snap Ring
● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage.
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the input clutch assembly.
Input Clutch Drum
● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage or burns.
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the input clutch assembly.
Input Clutch Drive Plates
● Check facing for burns, cracks or damage.
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the input clutch assembly.
Input Clutch Retaining Plate and Driven Plates
● Check facing for burns, cracks or damage.
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the input clutch assembly.
Front Carrier
● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage.
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the front carrier assembly.
Rear Internal Gear
● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage.
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the rear internal gear assembly.

Revision: 2004 October AT-364 2004 M45

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

ASSEMBLY
1. Install input clutch. A
a. Install drive plates, driven plates and retaining plate in input
clutch drum.
CAUTION: B
Take care with order of plates.
b. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, install snap ring in input clutch
drum. AT

D
SCIA2864E

c. Install needle bearing in input clutch assembly. E

CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.
F

SCIA2853E H

d. Install O-ring and seal rings in input clutch assembly.

CAUTION: I
● Do not reuse O-ring and seal rings.

● Apply ATF to O-ring.

● Apply petroleum jelly to seal rings. J

SCIA5235E

L
2. Install front carrier assembly.
a. Install snap ring to front carrier assembly.
CAUTION: M
Do not expand snap ring excessively.

SCIA5476E

Revision: 2004 October AT-365 2004 M45

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

b. Install bearing race in front carrier assembly.

CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to bearing race.
c. Install front carrier assembly to input clutch assembly.

SCIA2847E

3. Compress snap ring using 2 flat-bladed screwdrivers.

4. Install front carrier assembly and input clutch assembly to rear
internal gear.

SCIA5339E

Revision: 2004 October AT-366 2004 M45

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

Mid Sun Gear, Rear Sun Gear, High and Low Reverse Clutch Hub ACS004HF

COMPONENTS A

AT

SCIA2851E G
1. Needle bearing 2. Bearing race 3. Snap ring
4. High and low reverse clutch hub 5. Needle bearing 6. Snap ring
7. 1st one-way clutch 8. Rear sun gear 9. Seal ring H
10. Mid sun gear

DISASSEMBLY
I
1. Remove needle bearing and bearing race.

L
SCIA2854E

2. Using a pair of snap ring pliers, remove snap ring from high and
low reverse clutch hub. M
CAUTION:
Do not expand snap ring excessively.

SCIA2855E

Revision: 2004 October AT-367 2004 M45

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

3. Remove high and low reverse clutch hub from mid sun gear
assembly.

SCIA2856E

a. Remove needle bearing from high and low reverse clutch hub.

SCIA2857E

4. Remove rear sun gear assembly from mid sun gear assembly.

SCIA2858E

a. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, remove snap ring from rear sun

gear.

SCIA2859E

Revision: 2004 October AT-368 2004 M45

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

b. Remove 1st one-way clutch from rear sun gear.

A

AT

SCIA4633E

D
5. Remove seal rings from mid sun gear.

G
SCIA2861E

INSPECTION H
High and Low Reverse Clutch Hub Snap Ring, Rear Sun Gear Snap Ring
● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage.
CAUTION: I
If necessary, replace the snap ring.
1st One-Way Clutch
J
● Check frictional surface for wear or damage.
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the 1st one-way clutch.
K
Mid Sun Gear
● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage.
CAUTION: L
Replace mid sun gear assembly and high and low reverse clutch assembly as a set if necessary.
Rear Sun Gear
● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. M
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the rear sun gear.
High and Low Reverse Clutch Hub
● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage.
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the high and low reverse clutch hub.

Revision: 2004 October AT-369 2004 M45

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

ASSEMBLY
1. Install seal rings from mid sun gear.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse seal rings.

● Apply petroleum jelly to seal rings.

SCIA2861E

2. Install 1st one-way clutch in rear sun gear.

CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to 1st one-way clutch.

SCIA4633E

3. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, install snap ring in rear sun

gear.

SCIA2859E

4. Install rear sun gear assembly in mid sun gear assembly.

SCIA2858E

Revision: 2004 October AT-370 2004 M45

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

5. Install needle bearing in high and low reverse clutch hub.

CAUTION: A
Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.

AT

SCIA2857E

D
6. Install high and low reverse clutch hub in mid sun gear assem-
bly.
E

G
SCIA2856E

7. Using a pair of snap ring pliers, install snap ring in high and low H
reverse clutch hub.
CAUTION:
Do not expand snap ring excessively.
I

SCIA2855E
K
8. Check operation of 1st one-way clutch.
a. Hold mid sun gear and turn rear sun gear.
L
b. Check 1st one-way clutch for correct locking and unlocking
directions.
CAUTION:
If not as shown in the figure, check installation direction of M
1st one-way clutch.

SCIA3132E

9. Install needle bearing and bearing race.

CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing and bearing race.

SCIA2854E

Revision: 2004 October AT-371 2004 M45

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

High and Low Reverse Clutch ACS004HG

COMPONENTS

SCIA5224E

1. High and low reverse clutch drum 2. Driven plate 3. Retaining plate
4. Snap ring 5. Drive plate 6. Bearing race

DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove bearing race from high and low reverse clutch drum.

SCIA5215E

2. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, remove snap ring from high and

low reverse clutch drum.
3. Remove drive plates, driven plates and retaining plate from high
and low reverse clutch drum.

SCIA2868E

Revision: 2004 October AT-372 2004 M45

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

INSPECTION
● Check the following, and replace high and low reverse clutch assembly if necessary. A

High and Low Reverse Clutch Snap Ring

● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. B
High and Low Reverse Clutch Drive Plates
● Check facing for burns, cracks or damage.
AT
High and Low Reverse Clutch Retaining Plate and Driven Plates
● Check facing for burns, cracks or damage.
ASSEMBLY D
1. Install drive plates, driven plates and retaining plate in high and low reverse clutch drum.
CAUTION:
Take care with order of plates. E
2. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, install snap ring in high and low
reverse clutch drum.
F

H
SCIA2868E

3. Install bearing race to high and low reverse clutch drum. I

CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to bearing race.
J

SCIA5215E L

Revision: 2004 October AT-373 2004 M45

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

Direct Clutch ACS004HH

COMPONENTS

SCIA5226E

1. Direct clutch drum 2. Driven plate 3. Retaining plate

4. Snap ring 5. Drive plate

DISASSEMBLY
1. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, remove snap ring from direct
clutch drum.
2. Remove drive plates, driven plates and retaining plate from
direct clutch drum.

SCIA2868E

INSPECTION
● Check the following, and replace direct clutch assembly if necessary.
Direct Clutch Snap Ring
● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage.
Direct Clutch Drive Plates
● Check facing for burns, cracks or damage.
Direct Clutch Retaining Plate and Driven Plates
● Check facing for burns, cracks or damage.

Revision: 2004 October AT-374 2004 M45

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

ASSEMBLY
1. Install drive plates, driven plates and retaining plate in direct clutch drum. A
CAUTION:
Take care with order of plates.
2. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, install snap ring in direct clutch B
drum.

AT

SCIA2868E
E

Revision: 2004 October AT-375 2004 M45

 ASSEMBLY

ASSEMBLY PFP:00000

Assembly (1) ACS004HI

1. As shown in the right figure, use a drift [commercial service tool

φ22 mm (0.87 in)] to drive manual shaft oil seals into the trans-
mission case until it is flush.
CAUTION:
● Apply ATF to manual shaft oil seals.

● Do not reuse manual shaft oil seals.

SCIA5259E

2. Install detent spring and spacer in transmission case.

: 7.9 N·m (0.81 kg-m, 70 in-lb)

SCIA5248E

3. Install manual shaft to transmission case.

SCIA5716E

4. Install parking rod to manual plate.

SCIA5220E

Revision: 2004 October AT-376 2004 M45

 ASSEMBLY

5. Install manual plate (with parking rod) to manual shaft.

A

AT

SCIA5715E

D
6. Install retaining pin into the manual plate and manual shaft.
a. Fit pinhole of the manual plate to pinhole of the manual shaft with a pin punch.
b. Use a hammer to tap the retaining pin into the manual plate. E
CAUTION:
● Drive retaining pin to 2±0.5 mm (0.08±0.020 in) over the
manual plate. F
● Do not reuse retaining pin.

SCIA5297E H

7. Install retaining pin into the transmission case and manual shaft.
a. Fit pinhole of the transmission case to pinhole of the manual shaft with a pin punch. I
b. Use a hammer to tap the retaining pin into the transmission
case.
CAUTION: J
● Drive retaining pin to 5±1 mm (0.20±0.04 in) over the
transmission case.
● Do not reuse retaining pin. K

L
SCIA2427E

8. Install terminal cord assembly in transmission case. M

CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to O-ring.

SCIA2428E

Revision: 2004 October AT-377 2004 M45

 ASSEMBLY

9. Install terminal cord assembly connectors in bracket.

SCIA2326E

10. Install O-rings in servo assembly.

CAUTION:
Do not reuse O-rings.
Apply petroleum jelly to O-rings.

SCIA5719E

11. Install return spring in servo assembly.

SCIA5717E

12. Install servo assembly in transmission case.

SCIA5679E

13. Using a pair of snap ring pliers, install snap ring in transmission
case.

SCIA2333E

Revision: 2004 October AT-378 2004 M45

 ASSEMBLY

14. Install lip seal and D-ring in reverse brake piston.

A
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse lip seal and D-ring.

● Apply petroleum jelly to lip seal.

B
● Apply ATF to D-ring.

AT

SCIA2795E
D
15. Install reverse brake piston in transmission case.

G
SCIA2325E

16. Install needle bearing in transmission case. H

CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.
I

SCIA2796E K

17. Install seal rings in drum support.

CAUTION: L
● Do not reuse seal rings.

● Apply petroleum jelly to seal rings.

SCIA3333E

18. Install spring retainer and return spring in transmission case.

SCIA2324E

Revision: 2004 October AT-379 2004 M45

 ASSEMBLY

19. Set the SST on spring retainer and install snap ring (fixing spring
retainer) in transmission case while compressing return spring.
CAUTION:
Securely assemble them using a flat-bladed screwdriver so
that snap ring tension is slightly weak.

SCIA5877E

20. Install reverse brake drive plates, driven plates and dish plate in
transmission case.
CAUTION:
Take care with order of plates.

SCIA5731E

Revision: 2004 October AT-380 2004 M45

 ASSEMBLY

21. Assemble N-spring.

22. Install reverse brake retaining plate in transmission case. A

AT

G
SCIA5249E

23. Install snap ring in transmission case.

H

SCIA2439E
K
24. Measure clearance between retaining plate and snap ring. If not
within specified clearance, select proper retaining plate.
Specified clearance “A”: L
Standard: 0.7 - 1.1mm (0.028 - 0.043 in)
Retaining plate:
M
Refer to AT-398, "Reverse Brake" .

SCIA3129E

25. Install return spring in parking pawl.

SCIA2445E

Revision: 2004 October AT-381 2004 M45

 ASSEMBLY

26. Install parking pawl and pawl shaft in output shaft & companion
flange complement.

SCIA4631E

27. Install parking actuator support in output shaft & companion

flange complement.

SCIA2335E

28. Install intermediate shaft in transmission case.

CAUTION:
Be careful not to mistake front for rear because both sides
looks similar. (Thinner end is front side.)

SCIA4632E

29. Install revolution sensor in transmission case.

CAUTION:
● Do not subject it to impact by dropping or hitting it.

● Do not disassemble.

● Do not allow metal filings, etc., to get on the sensor's

front edge magnetic area.
● Do not place in an area affected by magnetism.

: 5.8 N·m (0.59 kg-m, 51 in-lb)

SCIA2320E

30. Install needle bearing in transmission case.

CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.

SCIA2440E

Revision: 2004 October AT-382 2004 M45

 ASSEMBLY

31. Apply recommended sealant (Genuine Anaerobic Liquid Gasket

or equivalent. Refer to GI-46, "Recommended Chemical Prod- A
ucts and Sealants" .) to output shaft & companion flange com-
plement as shown in the figure.
CAUTION: B
Completely remove all moisture, oil and old sealant, etc.
From the transmission case and output shaft & companion
flange complement mounting surfaces.
AT

SCIA5212E

D
32. Install output shaft & companion flange complement in transmis-
sion case.
CAUTION: E
Insert the tip of parking rod between the parking pawl and
the parking actuator support when assembling the output
shaft & companion flange complement.
F

G
SCIA2318E

33. Tighten output shaft & companion flange complement mounting H

bolts to specified torque. (Because terminal bracket is tightened
together with output shaft & companion flange, it should be
installed before procedure 32.)
CAUTION: I
Do not reuse self-sealing bolt.
Output shaft & companion flange complement
mounting bolt: J

: 52 N·m (5.3 kg-m, 38 ft-lb)

SCIA5170E
Self-sealing bolt: K
: 61 N·m (6.2 kg-m, 45 ft-lb)

34. Install direct clutch assembly in reverse brake. L

CAUTION:
Make sure that drum support edge surface and direct clutch
inner boss edge surface come to almost same place. M

SCIA2307E

Revision: 2004 October AT-383 2004 M45

 ASSEMBLY

35. Install needle bearing in drum support edge surface.

CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.

SCIA5198E

36. Install high and low reverse clutch assembly in direct clutch
assembly.
CAUTION:
Be sure to replace high and low reverse clutch and mid sun
gear as a set.

SCIA2306E

37. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, range drive plates.

SCIA3169E

38. Install high and low reverse clutch hub, mid sun gear assembly
and rear sun gear assembly as a unit.

SCIA2305E

Revision: 2004 October AT-384 2004 M45

 ASSEMBLY

CAUTION:
Check that portion “A” of high and low reverse clutch drum A
protrudes approximately 2 mm (0.08 in) beyond portion “B”
of rear sun gear.
B

AT

SCIA3130E D

39. Install needle bearing in rear carrier assembly.

CAUTION: E
Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.

SCIA2803E

H
40. Install bearing race in rear carrier assembly.
CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to bearing race.
I

K
SCIA5175E

41. Install rear carrier assembly in direct clutch drum.

L

SCIA2462E

Revision: 2004 October AT-385 2004 M45

 ASSEMBLY

42. Install needle bearing (rear side) in mid carrier assembly.

CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.

SCIA2804E

43. Install needle bearing (front side) in mid carrier assembly.

CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.

SCIA2805E

44. Install mid carrier assembly in rear carrier assembly.

SCIA2304E

45. Install front carrier assembly (With input clutch assembly and
rear internal gear.) to rear carrier assembly.

SCIA2303E

46. Install seal rings in input clutch assembly.

CAUTION:
● Do not reuse seal rings.

● Apply petroleum jelly to seal rings.

SCIA2470E

Revision: 2004 October AT-386 2004 M45

 ASSEMBLY

47. Install band servo anchor end pin and lock nut in transmission
case. A
CAUTION:
Do not reuse band servo anchor end pin.
B

AT

SCIA6512E
D
48. Install brake band in transmission case.
CAUTION:
Assemble it so that identification to avoid incorrect installa- E
tion faces servo side.

G
SCIA5498E

49. Install front sun gear in transmission case. H

CAUTION:
Apply ATF to front sun gear bushing and one-way clutch
end bearing. I

SCIA2302E K

50. Install needle bearing in front sun gear.

CAUTION: L
Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.

SCIA2808E

51. Adjust brake band tilting using a clip so that brake band contacts
front sun gear drum evenly.

SCIA2473E

Revision: 2004 October AT-387 2004 M45

 ASSEMBLY

52. Adjust brake band.

a. Loosen lock nut.
b. Tighten band servo anchor end pin to specified torque.
: 5.0 N·m (0.51 kg-m, 44 in-lb)

c. Back of band servo anchor end pin three turns.

d. While band servo anchor end pin, tighten lock nut to specified
torque.
: 46 N·m (4.7 kg-m, 34 ft-lb) SCIA5498E

Adjustment ACS004HJ

TOTAL END PLAY

● Measure clearance between front sun gear and needle bearing
for oil pump cover.
● Select proper thickness of bearing race so that end play is within
specifications.

SCIA2810E

1. Measure dimensions “K” and “L” and then calculate dimension

“J”.

SCIA5350E

a. Measure dimension “K”.

SCIA5351E

Revision: 2004 October AT-388 2004 M45

 ASSEMBLY

b. Measure dimension “L”.

c. Calculate dimension “J”. A
“J”: Distance between oil pump fitting surface of
transmission case and needle bearing mating surface
of front sun gear. B
J=K–L
AT

SCIA5352E

D
2. Measure dimensions “M1 ” and “M2 ” and then calculate dimen-
sion “M”.
E

G
SCIA3125E

a. Place bearing race and needle bearing on oil pump assembly. H

SCIA3124E K
b. Measure thickness of straightedge “M1 ”.
L

SCIA3126E

c. Measure thickness of straightedge “M2 ”.

SCIA3127E

Revision: 2004 October AT-389 2004 M45

 ASSEMBLY

d. Calculate dimension “M”.

“M”: Distance between transmission case fitting sur-
face of oil pump and needle bearing on oil pump.
M = M1 – M2

SCIA3125E

3. Adjust total end play “T1 ”.

T1 = J – M
Total end play “T1 ”:
0.25 - 0.55 mm (0.0098 - 0.0217 in)
● Select proper thickness of bearing race so that total end play
is within specifications.
Bearing races: Refer to AT-399, "BEARING RACE
FOR ADJUSTING TOTAL END PLAY" .
SCIA2810E

Assembly (2) ACS004HK

CAUTION:
When replacing the control valve assembly, erase EEP ROM in TCM. Refer to AT-8, "Precautions for
TCM, A/T Assembly and Control Valve Assembly Replacement" .
1. Install O-ring in oil pump assembly.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse O-ring.

● Apply ATF to O-ring.

SCIA5172E

2. Install bearing race in oil pump assembly.

CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to bearing race.

SCIA6529E

Revision: 2004 October AT-390 2004 M45

 ASSEMBLY

3. Install oil pump assembly in transmission case.

CAUTION: A
Apply ATF to oil pump bearing.

AT

SCIA2811E

D
4. Apply recommended sealant (Genuine RTV silicone sealant or
equivalent. Refer to GI-46, "Recommended Chemical Products
and Sealants" .) to oil pump assembly as shown in the figure.
E
CAUTION:
Completely remove all moisture, oil and old sealant, etc.
from the oil pump mounting bolts and oil pump mounting
bolt mounting surfaces. F

G
SCIA5321E

5. Tighten oil pump mounting bolts to specified torque. H

: 48 N·m (4.9 kg-m, 35 ft-lb)
CAUTION:
Apply ATF to oil pump bushing. I

SCIA2300E
K
6. Install O-ring in input shaft.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse O-ring.
L
● Apply ATF to O-ring.

SCIA2299E

7. Install converter housing in transmission case.

CAUTION:
Do not reuse self-sealing bolt.
Converter housing mounting bolt:
: 52 N·m (5.3 kg-m, 38 ft-lb)
Self-sealing bolt:
: 61 N·m (6.2 kg-m, 45 ft-lb)

SCIA4634E

Revision: 2004 October AT-391 2004 M45

 ASSEMBLY

8. Make sure that brake band does not close turbine revolution
sensor hole.

SCIA2479E

9. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 in bracket.

SCIA5128E

10. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control

valve assembly.
CAUTION:
Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve.
: 7.9 N·m (0.81 kg-m, 70 in-lb)

SCIA5126E

11. Install control valve assembly.

a. Install control valve assembly in transmission case.

SCIA2315E

Revision: 2004 October AT-392 2004 M45

 ASSEMBLY

CAUTION:
● Hang down terminal cord assembly and revolution sen- A
sor harness toward outside so as not to disturb installa-
tion of control valve assembly.
● Make sure that turbine sensor securely installs turbine B
sensor hole.
● Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with
manual plate projection.
AT

SCIA2812E D

b. Install bolts A, B and C in control valve assembly.

Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts E
A 42 (1.65) 5
B 55 (2.17) 6
F
C 40 (1.57) 1

SCIA2312E

c. Tighten bolt 1, 2 and 3 temporarily to prevent dislocation. After H

that tighten them in order (1 → 2 → 3), and then tighten other
bolts.
: 7.9 N·m (0.81 kg-m, 70 in-lb) I

SCIA3170E K
12. Install terminal cord assembly connectors in bracket.
L

SCIA2584E

13. Connect terminal cord assembly connectors.

SCIA2309E

Revision: 2004 October AT-393 2004 M45

 ASSEMBLY

14. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector.

SCIA5129E

15. Connect revolution sensor connector.

SCIA2313E

16. Securely fasten terminal harness with terminal clips.

SCIA2314E

17. Install magnets in oil pan.

SCIA5200E

18. Install oil pan in transmission case.

a. Install oil pan gasket in transmission case.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse oil pan gasket.

● Install it in the direction to align hole positions.

● Completely remove all moisture, oil and old gasket, etc. from oil pan gasket mounting surface.

Revision: 2004 October AT-394 2004 M45

 ASSEMBLY

b. Install oil pan in transmission case.

CAUTION: A
● Install it so that drain plug comes to the position as
shown in the figure.
● Be careful not to pinch harnesses. B
● Completely remove all moisture, oil and old gasket, etc.
from oil pan gasket mounting surface.
AT

SCIA2308E

D
c. Tighten oil pan mounting bolts to the specified torque in numeri-
cal order shown in the figure after temporarily tightening them.
CAUTION: E
Do not reuse oil pan mounting bolts.

: 7.9 N·m (0.81 kg-m, 70 in-lb)

F
19. Install drain plug in oil pan.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse drain plug gasket. G
: 34 N·m (3.5 kg-m, 25 ft-lb) SCIA4113E

20. Install torque converter. H

a. Pour ATF into torque converter.
● Approximately 2 liter (2-1/8 US qt, 1-3/4 Imp qt) of fluid is
required for a new torque converter. I
● When reusing old torque converter, add the same amount
of fluid as was drained.
J

SAT428DA K

b. Install torque converter while aligning notches of torque con-

verter with notches of oil pump. L

SCIA2297E

Revision: 2004 October AT-395 2004 M45

 ASSEMBLY

c. Measure distance “A” to check that torque converter is in proper

position.
Distance “A” : 22.0 mm (0.87 in) or more

SCIA5694E

Revision: 2004 October AT-396 2004 M45

 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) PFP:00030

A
General Specifications ACS001GN

Applied model VK45DE engine

Automatic transmission model RE5R05A B
Transmission model code number 91X78
Stall torque ratio 2.0: 1
AT
1st 3.540
2nd 2.264
3rd 1.472 D
Transmission gear ratio
4th 1.000
5th 0.834
E
Reverse 2.370
Recommended fluid Genuine Nissan Matic J ATF
Fluid capacity 10.3 liter (10-7/8 US qt, 9-1/8 Imp qt) F
CAUTION:
● Use only Genuine Nissan Matic J ATF. Do not mix with other fluid.

● Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine Nissan Matic J ATF will deteriorate in driveability and automatic G
transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the warranty.
*1: Refer to MA-10, "Fluids and Lubricants" .
H
Vehicle Speed When Shifting Gears ACS001GO

Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)

Throttle position
D1 →D2 D2 →D3 D3 →D4 D4 →D5 D5 →D4 D4 →D3 D3 →D2 D2 →D1 I
64 - 68 95 - 103 147 - 157 219 - 229 215 - 225 136 - 146 85 - 93 41 - 45
Full throttle
(40 - 42) (59 - 64) (91 - 98) (136 - 142) (134 - 140) (85 - 91) (53 - 58) (25 - 28)
22 - 26 59 - 67 100 - 110 153 - 163 102 - 112 55 - 65 38 - 46 11 - 15 J
Half throttle
(14 - 16) (37 - 42) (62 - 68) (95 - 101) (63 - 70) (34 - 40) (24 - 29) (7 - 9)
● At half throttle, the accelerator opening is 4/8 of the full opening.
K
Vehicle Speed When Performing and Releasing Complete Lock-Up ACS001GP

Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)

Throttle position L
Lock-up ON Lock-up OFF
Closed throttle 71 - 79 (44 - 49) 53 - 61 (33 - 38)
Half throttle 191 - 199 (119 - 124) 136 - 144 (85 - 89)
M
● At closed throttle, the accelerator opening is less than 1/8.
● At half throttle, the accelerator opening is 4/8 of the full opening.

Vehicle Speed When Performing and Releasing Slip Lock-Up ACS001GQ

Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)

Throttle position Gear position
Slip lock-up ON Slip lock-up OFF
3rd 27 - 35 (17 - 22) 24 - 32 (15 - 20)
Closed throttle 4th 39 - 47 (24 - 29) 36 - 44 (22 - 27)
5th 48 - 56 (30 - 35) 45 - 53 (28 - 33)

● At closed throttle, the accelerator opening is less than 1/8.

Stall Speed ACS001GR

Stall speed 2,300 - 2,600 rpm

Revision: 2004 October AT-397 2004 M45

 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

Line Pressure ACS001GS

Line pressure kPa (kg/cm2 , psi)

Engine speed
“R” position “D”, “M” positions
At idle speed 392 - 441 (4.0 - 4.5, 57 - 64) 373 - 422 (3.8 - 4.3, 54 - 61)
At stall speed 1,700 - 1,890 (17.3 - 19.3, 247 - 274) 1,310 - 1,500 (13.3 - 15.3, 190 - 218)

Solenoid Valves ACS001GT

Name Resistance (Approx.) (Ω) Terminal No.

Line pressure solenoid valve 7
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve 8
Input clutch solenoid valve 6
3-9
High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve 3
Front brake solenoid valve 5
Direct clutch solenoid valve 4
Low coast brake solenoid valve 20 - 40 2

A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor ACS001GU

Name Condition CONSULT-II “DATA MONITOR” (Approx.) (V) Resistance (Approx.) (kΩ)
0°C (32°F) 3.2 15
A/T fluid temperature sensor 1 20°C (68°F) 2.5 6.5
80°C (176°F) 0.8 0.9
0°C (32°F) 3.2 10
A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 20°C (68°F) 2.4 4
80°C (176°F) 0.65 0.5

Turbine Revolution Sensor ACS001GV

Name Condition Data (Approx.)

Turbine revolution
When running at 50 km/h (31 MPH) in 4th gear with the closed throttle position signal “OFF”.
sensor 1
1.3 (kHz)
Turbine revolution
When running at 20 km/h (12 MPH) in 1st gear with the closed throttle position signal “OFF”.
sensor 2

Revolution Sensor ACS001GW

Name Condition Data (Approx.)

Revolution sensor When running at 20 km/h (12 MPH). 185 (Hz)

Reverse Brake ACS004I8

Clearance mm (in) Standard 0.7 - 1.1 (0.028 - 0.043)

Thickness mm (in) Part number*
4.2 (0.165) 31667 90X14
Thickness of retaining plates 4.4 (0.173) 31667 90X15
4.6 (0.181) 31667 90X16
4.8 (0.189) 31667 90X17
5.0 (0.197) 31667 90X18
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.

Total End Play ACS004I9

Total end play mm (in) 0.25 - 0.55 (0.0098 - 0.0217)

Revision: 2004 October AT-398 2004 M45

 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

BEARING RACE FOR ADJUSTING TOTAL END PLAY

Thickness mm (in) Part number*
A

1.2 (0.047) 31435 90X02

1.4 (0.055) 31435 90X03
1.6 (0.063) 31435 90X04 B
1.8 (0.071) 31435 90X05
2.0 (0.079) 31435 90X06
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. AT

Revision: 2004 October AT-399 2004 M45

 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

Revision: 2004 October AT-400 2004 M45